1 files changed, 11821 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/21298.txt b/21298.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f1bcd05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21298.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11821 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Black Tor, by George Manville Fenn
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Black Tor
+       A Tale of the Reign of James the First
+
+Author: George Manville Fenn
+
+Illustrator: W. S. Stacey
+
+Release Date: May 4, 2007 [EBook #21298]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE BLACK TOR ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England
+
+
+
+
+
+The Black Tor, by George Manville Fenn,
+A Tale of the Reign of James the First.
+
+_______________________________________________________________________
+
+As always with this author there is plenty of action in this book.  Two
+teenage boys of about the same age come from families which have been
+in intense rivalry for centuries.  Each of them lives in a castle set
+among the wild and desolate hills of Derbyshire, an almost mountainous
+area in the Midlands of England, known generally as the Peak District.
+
+The boys know each other but as enemies.  Yet events occur which draw
+them together as allies, but they dare not call themselves friends.  A
+roguish band of ex-soldiers have arrived in the district, and set up
+camp out on the moors, from whence they descend to steal from, rob and
+loot the houses of the poorer folk.
+
+The boys privately form an alliance using the men working on their
+fathers' land as a private army, to attack and rid the land of these
+desperadoes.  Their first attack results in dreadful failure.  But then
+they revise their ideas of what they can use for weaponry, and are
+finally successful.
+
+Yet another excellent book from the prolific pen of this great author.
+NH
+_______________________________________________________________________
+
+THE BLACK TOR, BY GEORGE MANVILLE FENN,
+A TALE OF THE REIGN OF JAMES THE FIRST.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER ONE.
+
+ONE CAPTAIN PURLROSE.
+
+About as rugged, fierce-looking a gang of men as a lad could set eyes
+on, as they struggled up the steep cliff road leading to the castle,
+which frowned at the summit, where the flashing waters of the Gleame
+swept round three sides of its foot, half hidden by the beeches and
+birches, which overhung the limpid stream.  The late spring was at its
+brightest and best, but there had been no rain; and as the men who had
+waded the river lower down, climbed the steep cliff road, they kicked up
+the white limestone dust, and caked their wet high boots, which, in
+several instances, had opened holes in which toes could be seen, looking
+like curious reptiles deep in gnarled and crumpled shells.
+
+"Beggars!  What a gang!" said Ralph Darley, a dark, swarthy lad of
+perhaps seventeen, but looking older, from having an appearance of
+something downy beginning to come up that spring about his chin, and a
+couple of streaks, like eyebrows out of place, upon his upper lip.  He
+was well dressed, in the fashion of Solomon King James's day; and he
+wore a sword, as he sat half up the rugged slope, on a huge block of
+limestone, which had fallen perhaps a hundred years before, from the
+cliff above, and was mossy now, and half hidden by the ivy which covered
+its side.
+
+"Beggars," he said again; "and what a savage looking lot."
+
+As they came on, it began to dawn upon him that they could not be
+beggars, for if so, they would have been the most truculent-looking
+party that ever asked for the contributions of the charitable.  One, who
+seemed to be their leader, was a fierce, grizzled, red-nosed fellow,
+wearing a rusty morion, in which, for want of a feather, a tuft of
+heather was stuck; he wore a long cloak, as rusty-looking as his helmet;
+and that he carried a sword was plain enough, for the well-worn scabbard
+had found a very convenient hole in the cloak, through which it had
+thrust itself in the most obtrusive manner, and looked like a tail with
+a vicious sting, for the cap of the leathern scabbard had been lost, and
+about three inches of steel blade and point were visible.
+
+Ralph Darley was quick at observation, and took in quickly the fact that
+all the men were armed, and looked shabbier than their leader, though
+not so stout; for he was rubicund and portly, where he ought not to have
+been, for activity, though in a barrel a tubby space does indicate
+strength.  Neither were the noses of the other men so red as their
+leader's, albeit they were a villainous-looking lot.
+
+"Not beggars, but soldiers," thought Ralph; "and they've been in the
+wars."
+
+He was quite right, but he did not stop to think that there had been no
+wars for some years.  Still, as aforesaid, he was right, but the war the
+party had been in was with poverty.
+
+"What in the world do they want in this out-of-the-way place--on the
+road to nowhere?" thought Ralph.  "If they're not beggars, they have
+lost their way."
+
+He pushed back the hilt of his sword, and drew up one leg, covered with
+its high, buff-leather boot, beneath him, holding it as he waited for
+the party to come slowly up; and as they did, they halted where he sat,
+at the side of the road, and the leader, puffing and panting, took off
+his rusty morion with his left hand, and wiped his pink, bald head,
+covered with drops of perspiration, with his right, as he rolled his
+eyes at the lad.
+
+"Hallo, young springald!" he cried, in a blustering manner.  "Why don't
+you jump up and salute your officer?"
+
+"Because I can't see him," cried the lad sharply.
+
+"What?  And you carry a toasting-iron, like a rat's tail, by your side.
+Here, who made this cursed road, where it ought to have been a ladder?"
+
+"I don't know," said Ralph angrily.  "Who are you?  What do you want?
+This road does not lead anywhere."
+
+"That's a lie, my young cock-a-hoop; if it did not lead somewhere, it
+would not have been made."
+
+The man's companions burst into a hoarse fit of laughter, and the boy
+flushed angrily.
+
+"Well," he said haughtily, "it leads up to Cliff Castle, and no
+farther."
+
+"That's far enough for us, my game chicken.  Is that heap of blocks of
+stone on the top there the castle?"
+
+"Yes!  What do you want?"
+
+The man looked the lad up and down, rolled one of his eyes, which looked
+something like that of a lobster, and then winked the lid over the
+inflated orb, and said:
+
+"Gentlemen on an ambassage don't read their despatches to every
+springald they see by the roadside.  Here, jump up, and show us the way,
+and I'll ask Sir Morton Darley to give you a stoup of wine for your
+trouble, or milk and water."
+
+"You ask Sir Morton to give you wine!" cried the lad angrily.  "Why, who
+are you, to dare such a thing?"
+
+"What!" roared the man.  "Dare?  Who talks to Captain Purlrose, his
+Highness's trusted soldier, about dare?" and he put on a tremendously
+fierce look, blew out his cheeks, drew his brows over his eyes, and
+slapped his sword-hilt heavily, as if to keep it in its sheath, for fear
+it should leap out and kill the lad, adding, directly after, in a hoarse
+whisper: "Lie still, good sword, lie still."
+
+All this theatrical display was evidently meant to awe the lad, but
+instead of doing so, it made him angry, for he flushed up, and said
+quickly:
+
+"I dare," and the men laughed.
+
+"You dare!" cried the leader; "and pray, who may you be, my bully boy?"
+
+"I don't tell my name to every ragged fellow I meet in the road," said
+the boy haughtily.
+
+"What!" roared the man, clapping his hand upon the hilt of his blade, an
+action imitated by his followers.
+
+"Keep your sword in its scabbard," said Ralph, without wincing in the
+least.  "If you have business with my father, this way."
+
+He sprang to his feet now, and gazed fiercely at the stranger.
+
+"What?" cried the man, in a voice full of exuberant friendliness, which
+made the lad shrink in disgust, "you the son of Sir Morton Darley?"
+
+"Yes: what of it?"
+
+"The son of my beloved old companion-in-arms?  Boy, let me embrace
+thee."
+
+To Ralph's horror, the man took a step forward, and would have thrown
+his arms about his neck; but by a quick movement the lad stepped back,
+and the men laughed to see their leader grasp the wind.
+
+"Don't do that," said Ralph sternly.  "Do you mean to say that you want
+to speak to my father?"
+
+"Speak to him?  Yes, to fly to the hand of him whom I many a time saved
+from death.  And so you are the son of Morton Darley?  And a
+brave-looking, manly fellow too.  Why, I might have known.  Eye, nose,
+curled-up lip.  Yes: all there.  You are his very reflection, that I
+ought to have seen in the looking-glass of memory.  Excuse this weak
+moisture of the eyes, boy.  The sight of my old friend's son brings up
+the happy companionship of the past.  Time flies fast, my brave lad.
+Your father and I were hand and glove then.  Never separate.  We fought
+together, bled together, and ah! how fate is partial in the way she
+spreads her favours!  Your father dresses his son in velvet; while I,
+poor soldier of fortune--I mean misfortune--am growing rusty; sword,
+morion, breast-plate, body battered, and face scarred by time."
+
+"Aren't we going to have something to eat and drink, captain?" growled
+one of the men, with an ugly scowl.
+
+"Ay, brave boys, and soon," cried the leader.
+
+"Then, leave off preaching, captain, till we've got our legs under a
+table."
+
+"Ah, yes.  Poor boys, they are footsore and weary with the walk across
+your hilly moors.  Excuse this emotion, young sir, and lead me to my old
+brother's side."
+
+There was something comic in the boy's look of perplexity and disgust,
+as, after a few moments' hesitation, he began to lead the way toward the
+half castle, half manor-house, which crowned the great limestone cliff.
+
+"Surely," he thought, "my father cannot wish to see such a ragamuffin as
+this, with his coarse, bloated features, and disgraceful rags and dirt."
+
+But the next minute his thoughts took a different turn.
+
+"If what the man says be true, father will be only too glad to help an
+old brother-officer in misfortune, and be sorry to see him in such a
+plight."
+
+With the frank generosity of youth, then, he softened his manner toward
+his companion, as they slowly climbed upward, the great beeches which
+grew out of the huge cracks and faults of the cliff shading them from
+the sun.
+
+"So this is the way?" cried the man.
+
+"Yes: the castle is up there," and Ralph pointed.
+
+"What! in ruins?" cried the captain.
+
+"Ruins?  No!" cried Ralph.  "Those stones are natural; the top of the
+cliff.  Our place is behind them.  They do look like ruins, though."
+
+"Hah!  But what an eagle's nest.  No wonder I find an eaglet on my way."
+
+Ralph winced, for the man clapped a dirty hand upon his shoulder, and
+gripped him fast, turning the lad into a walking-staff to help him on
+his road.
+
+"Have you come far this morning?" said Ralph, to conceal his disgust.
+
+"Ay, miles and miles, over stones and streams, and in and out among
+mines and holes.  We were benighted, too, up yonder on the mountain."
+
+"Hill," said Ralph; "we have no mountains here."
+
+"Hills when you're fresh, lad; mountains when you're footsore and weary.
+But we stumbled upon a niche, in a bit of a slope near the top, and
+turned out the bats and foxes, and slept there."
+
+"Where?" cried Ralph quickly.  "Was there a little stream running
+there--warm water?"
+
+"To be sure there was.  Hard stones, and warm water: those were our bed
+and beverage last night."
+
+"I know the place.  Darch Scarr."
+
+"Fine scar, too, lad.  Been better if it had been healed up, with a door
+to keep out the cold wind.  Oh! so this is where my old comrade lives,"
+he added, as he came in sight of an arched gateway, with embattled top
+and turrets, while through the entry, a tree-shaded courtyard could be
+seen.  "And a right good dwelling too.  Come on, brave boys.  Here's
+rest and breakfast at last."
+
+"And I hope you'll go directly after," thought Ralph, as he led the way
+into the courtyard, and paused at a second entrance, at the top of a
+flight of stone steps, well commanded by loopholes on either side.  Then
+aloud:
+
+"Will you wait here a minute, while I go and tell my father?"
+
+"Yes: tell him his old brother-officer is here."
+
+"I did not catch your name when you spoke before," said Ralph.  "Captain
+Pearl Ross?"
+
+"Nay, nay, boy; Purlrose.  He'll know directly you speak.  Tell him, I'm
+waiting to grasp him by the hand."
+
+Ralph nodded, and sprang up the stone flight, while the visitor's
+companions threw themselves down upon the steps to rest, their leader
+remaining standing, and placing himself by the mounting stone on one
+side, hand upon sword-hilt, and arranging his ragged cloak in folds with
+as much care as if it had been of newest velvet.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWO.
+
+SIR MORTON RECEIVES HIS GUEST.
+
+"Father can't be pleased," thought the lad, as he hurried in through a
+heavy oaken door, strengthened by the twisted and scrolled iron bands of
+the huge hinges, and studded with great-headed nails.  This yielded
+heavily, as, seizing a ring which moved a lever, he raised the heavy
+latch, and for a moment, as he passed through, he hesitated about
+closing the door again upon the group below.  But as he glanced at the
+party, he hesitated no longer.  Their appearance begat no confidence,
+and the great latch clicked directly.
+
+The next minute, he was hurrying along a dark stone passage, to spring
+up a few more stairs, leading into a corridor with a polished oaken
+floor, and mullioned windows looking down upon the courtyard; and as he
+reached the second, a bright, handsome girl, whose features proclaimed
+sisterhood, started out to meet him.
+
+"Oh Ralph," she said, "who are those dreadful-looking men you have
+brought up?"
+
+"Don't stop me, Min," he said hastily.  "Old soldiers who want to see
+father.  Where is he?"
+
+"In his room."
+
+The lad hurried on, and entered through a door way on his left, to
+where, in an oaken-panelled room, a stern, slightly grey,
+military-looking man sat poring over an old book, but looked up directly
+the lad entered.
+
+"Ah, Ralph, boy," he said; "been out?"
+
+"Only on the cliff, father," cried the lad hastily.  "Visitors."
+
+"Visitors?  Nonsense!  I expect no visitors.  Who are they?"
+
+"Captain Purlrose and his men."
+
+"Purlrose!" cried Sir Morton, with a look of angry disgust.  "Here?"
+
+"Yes, father," said Ralph, watching keenly the impression made by his
+words.  "Waiting at the foot of the steps."
+
+"Bah!  I thought the drunken, bullying scoundrel was dead and gone years
+ago.  Hung or shot, for he deserved either."
+
+"Hah!" ejaculated the lad, with a sigh of relief.  "Then you are not
+glad to see him, father?"
+
+"Glad to see him?  Are you mad, boy?"
+
+"No, father," said the lad, with a merry laugh.  "I hope not; but he
+said you would be, and that you were old brothers-in-arms, and that he
+longed to grip you by the hand; and he tried to hug me, and shed tears,
+and flattered me, and said all sorts of things."
+
+"Pah! the same as of old; but you said--and his men."
+
+"Yes, about a dozen like him; ruffianly-looking, rag-bags of fellows,
+all armed, and looking like a gang of bullies and robbers."
+
+Sir Morton frowned, rose from his seat, and walked to the side of the
+room, where his sword and belt lay in front of a bookcase.
+
+"Well, I suppose I must see the fellow.  He served under me, years ago,
+Ralph, and I suppose he has come begging, unless he sees a chance to
+steal."
+
+"Then I was not unjust, father, in thinking ill of the man and disliking
+him."
+
+"Unjust?  Pah!  The fellow was a disgrace to the name of soldier; and
+now, I suppose, that there is no war on the way, he has been discharged
+from the king's service, with a pack of his companions."
+
+"He said he had saved your life, father."
+
+Sir Morton laughed contemptuously.  "I have no recollection of the fact,
+Ralph, boy, and I don't think I should have forgotten so important a
+matter; but I do recollect saving his, by interceding when he was about
+to be shot for plundering some helpless people.  There; let him and a
+couple of his men come in.  The poor wretch is in a bad state, I
+suppose, and I will give him something to help him on his road."
+
+Ralph went to the door, but turned back, hesitating.
+
+"Well, my boy?" said his father.
+
+"Had I not better tell some of the men to arm, and be ready?" asked the
+lad.
+
+"What!  Nonsense, boy!  I know my man.  He would not dare to be
+insolent."
+
+"But he has a dangerous-looking gang of fellows with him."
+
+"Of the same kind as himself, Ralph.  Have no fear of that.  If there
+were real danger, we could soon summon a dozen stout men to deal with
+him and his party.  But, as I said, let him only bring in two or three
+with him."
+
+Ralph hurried out, and found the captain and his men forming a
+picturesque group about the stone steps; and as soon as he appeared, the
+former swung himself round, and threw his cloak over his shoulder, with
+a swaggering gesture.
+
+"Hallo, my young eagle," he cried.  "What saith the parent bird, the
+gallant lord of the castle?"
+
+"My father will see you, sir," replied Ralph.  "This way."
+
+"Aha!  I knew he would," cried the man, giving his steel cap a cock over
+on one side, and displaying a large pink patch of his bald head.  "Come
+on, brave boys."
+
+"Stop!" cried Ralph quickly.  "Three of you, only, are to accompany your
+leader."
+
+"Eh?  What?" cried the captain fiercely, as a low murmur arose.
+
+"That is what my father said, sir."
+
+"What does this mean?" cried the man theatrically.  "Separate me from my
+brave companions-in-arms?  Does this mean treachery, young sir?"
+
+"Treachery?  Why should it mean that?" cried Ralph stoutly, as the man's
+words endorsed the character so lately given of him.  "If," argued Ralph
+to himself, "the fellow were the honest, brave soldier, why should he
+fear treachery from the brother-officer with whom he said he had often
+shared danger?"
+
+"The world is full of wickedness, boy," replied the captain; "and I have
+often been misjudged.  But there; a brave man never knows fear.  You
+three come with me, and if in half an hour I do not come back, boys, you
+know what to do."
+
+There was a shout at this, and hands struck sword-hilts with a loud
+clang.
+
+"Right, brave boys, and don't leave one stone upon another until you
+have found your captain."
+
+Ralph burst out into a fit of laughter, and then felt annoyed with
+himself, as the man turned round scowling.
+
+"What do you mean by that, boy?"
+
+"That your men would have their work cut out, sir," said Ralph sharply.
+"This way, please."
+
+The captain uttered a low growl, signed to three of his men, and the
+party followed the lad, who, to his annoyance, once more came across his
+sister, hurrying along the passage.
+
+"Salute, brave boys, salute," cried the captain.  "Youth and beauty in
+front--the worship of the gallant soldiers of the king."
+
+He struck an attitude, which was roughly imitated by the men.
+
+"A sister, on my life," cried the captain.
+
+"This way," said Ralph shortly, and with the colour coming into his
+cheeks, as he felt indignant with the man for daring to notice his
+sister, and angry with her for being there.
+
+The door of Sir Morton's room was thrown open, and the captain strode
+in, followed by his men; and, as he saw the knight, standing with his
+back to the fireplace, he struck a fresh attitude.
+
+"Ah! at last!" he cried.  "My old brave companion-in-arms!  Well met,
+once more."
+
+He stretched out his hands, and swaggered forward to grasp Sir Morton's.
+
+"Halt!" cried that gentleman sharply, without stirring from his
+position.  "Now, Captain Purlrose, what is your business with me?"
+
+"Business with you?  Is this my reception, after long years of absence?
+Ah, I see!  The war-worn soldier forgotten once again.  Ah, Sir Morton
+Darley, why humble me before my gallant men?"
+
+"I have not forgotten you, Captain Purlrose.  I remember you perfectly,
+and you are not changed in the least.  Now, if you please, be brief, and
+explain your business."
+
+"My business!  I thought I was coming to an old friend and brother."
+
+"No, sir; you thought nothing of the kind.  Come, you know I understand
+you thoroughly.  State your business, if you please."
+
+The three men laughed aloud, and Sir Morton, who had not before noticed
+them, turned upon them sharply, with the result that the laughter died
+out, and they looked uncomfortable.
+
+"And this before my men!  Humbled thus!  Have I fallen so low?"
+
+"You are wasting words, Captain Purlrose; and, as you have found where I
+lived, and have evidently journeyed long, tell me at once why you have
+come."
+
+"I will," cried the captain, resuming his swaggering air.  "I, as an old
+soldier, sir, came to ask favours of no man."
+
+"Then why have you come, sir, if not to ask a favour?"
+
+"I was passing this way, and, as an old brother-in-arms lived here, I
+thought I would call."
+
+"You were not passing this way, sir; no brother-in-arms lived here, but
+an officer, under whom you once served; and you had some object in view
+to make you cross our desolate moors," said Sir Morton, sternly.  "If
+you want help, speak out."
+
+"I am no beggar, Sir Morton Darley," said the man, in blustering tones.
+
+"I am glad to hear it.  Now, then, what is it?"
+
+"Well, sir, you boast of knowing me thoroughly.  Let me tell you that I
+know you, and your position here."
+
+"And find it is in every respect a strong one, sir.  Well?"
+
+"You live here, close at hand to an enemy who covets your lands, and
+with whom you have fought again and again.  You and your ancestors were
+always enemies with the Edens."
+
+"Quite right, sir.  Well, what is that to you?"
+
+"This, Sir Morton Darley.  The war is over.  I and my brave fellows are
+idle, our swords rusting in their sheaths."
+
+"More shame to the brave fellows who do not keep their weapons bright.
+Well, this is a long preamble to tell me that you have all been
+dismissed from the king's service.  Go on."
+
+The captain stared and scowled, but he could not fully meet the
+searching eyes which looked him down.
+
+"Well," he said, rather blunderingly now, "knowing what I did of my old
+officer's state--"
+
+"`Old officer' is better, Captain Purlrose.  Go on, sir."
+
+"I said, here am I, a brave soldier, with a handful of stout followers,
+eager to do good, honest work; why should I not go and offer my sword to
+Sir Morton Darley?  He is sorely pressed."
+
+"Wrong," said Sir Morton.
+
+"He would be glad of our help," continued the man, without heeding the
+interruption; "we could garrison his castle and help him to drive his
+enemy from the field.  Twelve of them, all well-tried soldiers, who can
+make him king of the country round.  That, sir, is why I have come, to
+confer a favour more than ask one.  Now, sir, what do you say?  Such a
+chance for you may never occur again."
+
+"Hah!" ejaculated Sir Morton; "and all this out of pure good
+fellowship!"
+
+"Of course; save that a retainer who risks his life in his chief's
+service is worthy of his hire."
+
+"Naturally, sir.  So that is your meaning--your object in coming?"
+
+"That is it, Sir Morton.  We can put your castle in a state of defence,
+make raids, and harass the enemy, fetch in stores from the surrounding
+country, and make you a great man.  Think of how you can humble the
+Edens."
+
+Sir Morton frowned as he looked back at the past, and then from thence
+up to his present position, one in which he felt that he played a humble
+part in presence of his stronger enemy; and Ralph watched him, read in
+his face that he was about to accept his visitor's proposal, and with a
+feeling of horror at the thought of such a gang being hired to occupy a
+part of the castle, and brought, as it were, into a kind of intimacy, he
+turned quickly to his father, laid his hand upon his arm, and whispered
+eagerly:
+
+"Father, pray, pray don't do this.  They are a terribly villainous set
+of ruffians."
+
+The captain twitched his big ears in his efforts to catch what was said;
+but he could only hear enough to make out that the son was opposing the
+plans, and he scowled fiercely at the lad.
+
+"Wait, wait," said Sir Morton.
+
+"But do go out and look at the rest of the men, father," whispered
+Ralph.
+
+"There is no need."
+
+"Then you will not agree, father?"
+
+"Most certainly not, my boy."
+
+Purlrose could not catch all this, but he scowled again.
+
+"Look here, young cockerel," he cried, "don't you try and set my old
+officer against me."
+
+"No need," said Sir Morton hotly.
+
+"Ah, that's because hard times have made me and my poor gallant fellows
+look a little shabby."
+
+"Not that, sir.  Your old character stands in your way."
+
+"Oh, this is hard--this is hard.  You rich, and with everything
+comfortable, while I am poor, and unrewarded for all my labour and risk
+by an ungrateful Scot."
+
+"Don't insult your sovereign, sir!" cried Sir Morton.
+
+"Oh, this is hard--this is hard."
+
+"Look here, Michael Purlrose, if you had been an officer and a gentleman
+in distress, I would have helped you."
+
+"Do you mean to say that I am not an officer, and a gentleman in
+distress, sir?" cried the captain, clapping his hand to the hilt of his
+sword, a movement imitated by Ralph, angrily.  But Sir Morton stood
+back, unmoved.
+
+"Let your sword alone, boy," he said sternly.  "You, Michael Purlrose,
+knowing you as I do of old, for a mouthing, cowardly bully, do you think
+that I am going to be frightened by your swagger?  Yes, I tell you that
+you are no gentleman."
+
+"Oh, this is too much," cried the visitor.  "It is enough to make me
+call in my men."
+
+"Indeed!" said Sir Morton coolly.  "Why call them in to hear me
+recapitulate your disgrace?  As to your appeals to me for help, and your
+claim, which you profess to have upon me, let me remind you that you
+were engaged as a soldier of fortune, and well paid for your services,
+though you and yours disgraced the royal army by your robberies and
+outrages.  All you gained you wasted in riot and drunkenness, and now
+that you are suffering for your follies, you come and make claims upon
+me."
+
+"Oh, this is too hard upon a poor soldier who has bled in his country's
+service.  Did I not once save your life, when you were at your last
+gasp?"
+
+"No, sir; it was the other way on.  I saved yours, and when I was
+surrounded, and would have been glad of your help, you ran away."
+
+"Ha-ha-ha!" cried Ralph, bursting into a roar of laughter.
+
+"Ah-h-ah!" cried the captain fiercely, as he half drew his sword; but he
+drove it back with a loud clang into its sheath directly.  "Stay there,
+brave blade, my only true and trusted friend.  He is the son of my old
+companion-in-arms, and I cannot draw upon a boy."
+
+Ralph laughed aloud again, and the captain scowled, and rolled his eyes
+fiercely; but he did not startle the lad in the least, and after a long,
+fierce stare, the man turned to Sir Morton.
+
+"Don't be hard upon an old brother-soldier, Morton Darley," he said.
+
+"No, I will not," said Sir Morton quietly.  "You and your men can
+refresh yourselves in the hall, and when you start on your way, I will
+give you a pound or two to help you."
+
+"Oh, as if I were a common wayside beggar.  Comrade, this is too hard.
+Can you not see that my beard is getting grizzled and grey?"
+
+"Yes; but I do not see what that has to do with it."
+
+"Think again, old comrade.  Twelve brave and true men have I with me.
+Take us as your gentlemen and men at arms to protect you and yours
+against those who are unfriendly.  You must have enemies."
+
+Sir Morton started and glanced at his son, for these words touched a
+spring in his breast.  With thirteen fighting men to increase his little
+force, what might he not do?  The Edens' stronghold, with its regularly
+coming-in wealth, must fall before him; and, once in possession, Sir
+Edward Eden might petition and complain; but possession was nine points
+of the law, and the king had enough to do without sending a force into
+their wild out-of-the-way part of the world to interfere.  Once he had
+hold of the Black Tor, he could laugh at the law, and see the old enemy
+of his house completely humbled.
+
+Sir Morton hesitated and turned his head, to find his son watching him
+keenly, while Captain Purlrose stood with his left hand resting on the
+hilt of his sword, making the scabbard cock out behind, and lift up the
+back of his ragged cloak, as with his right he twisted up and pointed
+one side of his rusty-grey fierce moustache.
+
+The man was watching Sir Morton keenly, and his big ears twitched, as he
+tried to catch the whispered words which passed between father and son.
+
+"What do you say, Ralph, lad?  With the help of these men I could easily
+make Eden bite the dust.  Then the Black Tor would be mine, and
+afterwards yours; with all the rich revenue to be drawn from the
+lead-mine.  It is very tempting, boy."
+
+"Yes, father," said the boy hotly, and his face flushed as he spoke;
+"but that's what it is--a miserable temptation.  We'll humble the Edens,
+and have the Black Tor and the lead-mine; but we'll win all with our
+swords like gentlemen, or fail.  We could not go and take the place with
+a set of ruffians like those outside, and helped by such a man as yonder
+bully.  You couldn't do it, father.  Say no."
+
+"Hah!  More insults," cried Purlrose, who had caught a word here and
+there.  "But no; lie still, good sword: he is a beardless boy, and the
+son of the brave comrade I always honoured, whate'er my faults."
+
+Ralph turned upon him angrily; but his father laid a hand upon the boy's
+shoulder, and pressed it hard.
+
+"Right, Ralph, lad," he said warmly, and he looked proudly in the boy's
+eyes.  "I could not do it in that way."
+
+"Hah!" ejaculated the lad, with a sigh of content.
+
+"No, Purlrose," continued Sir Morton.  "I shall not avail myself of your
+services.  Go into the hall and refresh yourself and your men.  Come to
+me afterward, and I will help you as I said."
+
+"With a mouthful of bread, and a few pence, and after all this weary
+journey across these wild moors.  But I see: it is all through the words
+of this beardless boy.  Suppose I tell you that, now I have come, I mean
+to stay?" he added threateningly.
+
+"Shall I get the men together, father?" said Ralph quickly.
+
+"No, boy, there is no need," said Sir Morton firmly.  "I am not afraid
+of Michael Purlrose's threats."
+
+"What!" cried the man.  "You do not know me yet."
+
+"Better than you know yourself, sir," said Sir Morton, rising.  "That is
+the way to the hall.  Have the goodness to go first."
+
+The captain threw his cloak back over his right shoulder, slapped his
+right hand heavily upon his rusty breast-plate, and then, with a
+flourish, caught at the hilt of his sword, and again half drew it from
+its sheath, to stand scowling at Ralph, the intentness of his gaze
+seeming to affect his eyes, so that they began to lean towards each
+other, as if for help, till his look became a villainous squint.  Then,
+as neither father nor son quailed before him, he uttered a loud "Hah!"
+thrust back his sword, and strode with a series of stamps to the door,
+his high, buff-leather boots rustling and creaking the while.
+
+There he faced round.
+
+"I give you one more chance, Morton Darley," he cried.  "Yes or no?"
+
+"No," said Sir Morton firmly.
+
+"One moment before it is too late.  Are we to be friends or foes?"
+
+"Neither," shouted Ralph quickly.
+
+"Yes, boy, one or the other.  You, Morton Darley, will you take me into
+your service, or do you drive me into going straight to your rival and
+enemy, who will jump at my offer, and pay me better than I could expect
+of you?"
+
+"Go where you please, sir," said Sir Morton.
+
+"Ah, you drive me to it, when I would have been your friend.  There, it
+must be so; but don't blame me when you are humbled in the dust."
+
+"Why, if you go there," cried Ralph, "Sir Edward Eden will make his men
+disarm your crew of ragged Jacks, and set you all to work in his mine."
+
+"What!  Never.  Now, Darley, once more--friends or foes?"
+
+"Neither, I tell you, man.  Now leave my place at once, you and yours.
+I will neither help you nor have any further dealings with you.  Go."
+
+"What!" roared Purlrose; and this time he drew his sword fully, and
+Ralph's bright blade followed suit, glittering, while the captain's
+looked rusty and dull.
+
+"Pooh! put up your sword, Ralph," said Sir Morton, advancing toward
+their visitor, who began to shrink back.  "Sheathe your blade, sir," he
+said sternly, and without paying the least attention to the man's
+bullying looks, he threw open the door, and pointed to the entrance.
+
+He passed out, giving the door behind him a heavy slam, and marched out
+to the group standing about the broad steps and road, where father and
+son could hear him haranguing his men, who immediately burst into an
+angry yell, and for the most part turned menacingly toward the house.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THREE.
+
+ABOUT THE ENEMY.
+
+"Shall I fasten the door, father?" cried Ralph excitedly.
+
+"No," said Sir Morton firmly.  "I know my man of old."
+
+Ralph looked on and listened, as a low growl arose; but, bully and
+coward or no, it was evident that Captain Purlrose was master of his
+men, who stood listening and nodding their heads, one or two slapping
+the hilts of their swords menacingly, and at last the leader of the
+ragged crew turned and shook his fist threateningly at the house, and
+ended by striding jauntily away through the embattled gateway, followed
+by his gang.
+
+"Will they come back, father, at night?" said Ralph, after uttering a
+sigh of relief.
+
+"No, my boy; I judge the men by their leader.  Michael Purlrose always
+had a wholesome love of keeping his skin sound; his men have, without
+doubt, the same.  He will execute his threat, though, of going to
+Eden's."
+
+"And if Sir Edward takes them into his service, it will be awkward for
+us, father."
+
+"Yes, _if_, my boy; but I do not think that Eden will.  We shall hear no
+more of the vagabonds, unless Purlrose comes back to beg."
+
+"I'll go and watch them, father," cried Ralph eagerly.
+
+"Yes; but you will not go near, so as to run any risk?  If they found
+you alone, they would attack and strip you of everything of value you
+have."
+
+"I'll take care," cried the lad.  "I can get up to the side of the
+cliff, and watch them right away.  I can see the path to the Black Tor
+from there."
+
+"Yes; go," said Sir Morton, and the boy hurried out, crossed the little
+court, and passing through a small side-door, reached the slope of the
+cliff upon which the old castle was built, and then by a narrow pathway,
+clambered a couple of hundred feet higher, starting the jackdaws from
+their resting-places, making them fly off, uttering angry cries of
+_tah_! _tah_!  Then throwing himself down behind a great block of
+limestone, which had fallen from above, and which looked as if a thrust
+would send it hurtling down some hundred feet, into the river below, he
+waited till, as he fully expected, he saw the party of men appear down
+below in the track; and then he followed their course, seeing them
+disappear behind the trees, appear again, and after making divers short
+cuts, as if their leader were well acquainted with the place, make off
+for the ford.  Then he watched them as they straggled across the river,
+and struck into the narrow cliff path which led to the great dark-hued
+cliff known as the Black Tor, where the Edens' impregnable stronghold
+stood, perched upon a narrow ledge of rock which rose up like a
+monstrous tongue from the earth, connected on one side by a narrow
+natural bridge with the main cliff, the castellated building being
+protected on all sides by a huge rift fully a couple of hundred feet
+deep, the tongue being merely a portion of the cliff split away during
+some convulsion of nature; or perhaps gradually separated by subsidence,
+the top affording sufficient space for the building, and its courtyards.
+
+Ralph watched the men until the last had disappeared; and then, knowing
+from the configuration of the place as he had seen it from another point
+of view, that he would probably not see them again for an hour or two,
+perhaps not again that day, if Sir Edward Eden received the proposals of
+Captain Purlrose favourably, he began slowly and thoughtfully to
+descend.  For he knew that it would be a serious matter for his father
+if Sir Edward Eden seized upon the opportunity for strengthening his
+retainers and attacking his rival.
+
+The feud between the two families had lasted for generations, beginning
+so far back that the origin was lost in the mists of time.  All that
+Ralph Darley knew was, that in the days of Henry the Eighth, an Eden had
+done a Darley deadly injury that could never be forgiven, and ever since
+the wrong had been handed down from father to son as a kind of
+unpleasant faith by which it was the duty of all Darleys to be prepared
+to exterminate all Edens; and if they could not exterminate them and
+seize upon their possessions, to do them all the injury they could.
+
+There was another version of the story, as Ralph well knew, and it was
+precisely the same, saving for the following exception: that in the
+beginning it was a Darley who did the deadly wrong to an Eden.  But one
+thing was certain--the two families had carried on their petty warfare
+in the most determined way.  Edens had fallen by the sword; so had
+Darleys.  There was a grim legend, too, of an Eden having been taken
+prisoner, and starved to death in one of the dungeons of Cliffe Castle,
+in Queen Mary's time; and Ralph had often gone down below to look at the
+place, and the staple ring and chain in the gloomy place, shuddering at
+the horror of the prisoner's fate.
+
+For this the Edens had waited their time, and surprised the castle one
+night, driving the occupants from place to place, till they took refuge
+in the central tower, from which they could not be dislodged; so the
+Edens contented themselves by the following reprisal: they set fire to
+the castle in a dozen places before they retired, the flames raging till
+there was no more woodwork to destroy, and nothing was left but the
+strong central tower and the sturdy walls.  The place was restored,
+though, soon after, and the Sir Ralph Darley of Elizabeth's time made an
+expedition one night to give tit-for-tat, but only to find out that it
+was impossible to get across the stoutly-defended natural bridge at
+Black Tor, and that it was waste of time to keep on shooting arrows,
+bearing burning rags soaked in pitch, on to the roofs of the towers and
+in at the loopholes.  So he retreated, with a very sore head, caused by
+a stone thrown from above, dinting in his helmet, and with half his men
+carrying the other half, wounded or dead.
+
+His successor had tried again and again to master the Edens and seize
+their possessions.  Amongst these was the Black Tor lead-mine,
+approached by steps in the side of the cliff; its galleries honeycombed
+the place, running right under the earth, and into natural caverns of
+the large opposite cliffs of limestone, where the jackdaws built their
+nests.
+
+Ralph Darley, living as he did that day in the days of King James,
+pondered on all those old legends as he descended to give his father the
+information he had acquired; and as he stepped down, he knit his brows
+and began to think that it was quite time this feud had an end, and that
+it must be his duty to finish it all off, in spite of the addition to
+the strength at Black Tor, by waiting his opportunity, and meeting, and
+in fair fight slaying, young Mark Eden, who was about his own age,
+seventeen, and just back home from one of the great grammar-schools.
+This done, he would make a scheme for seizing the Black Tor, putting Sir
+Edward Eden and his mercenaries to the sword, but sparing the men who
+were miners, so that they might go on working for the Darleys.  By this
+means he would end the feud, secure peace, and make his father a rich
+and happy man, having proved himself a thoroughly good and chivalrous
+son.
+
+Ralph felt very brave, and proud, and happy, when he had reached this
+point, which was just as he opened the door of his father's room, which
+contained a very small library--books being rare and precious in those
+days--plenty of handsome armour and war-like weapons of offence, and a
+corner set apart for alchemy and the study of minerals; for, in a
+desultory way, Sir Morton Darley, bitten by the desire to have a mine of
+his own to produce him as good an income as that of his enemy neighbour,
+had been given to searching without success for a good lode of lead.
+
+Sir Morton was reading an old tome as his son entered the room, hot,
+eager, and excited.
+
+"Well, boy," he said, looking up dreamily; "what is it?"
+
+"They've gone straight to Black Tor, father."
+
+"The Edens?  Have they?  I did not know they had been away."
+
+"No, no, father; that captain fellow and his men."
+
+"Oh, of course.  I had almost forgotten them.  Tut, tut, tut!  It will
+be very awkward for us, Ralph, if Sir Edward listens to that scoundrel's
+proposals.  But there, it cannot be helped.  There never was an Eden yet
+who was a gentlemen, and all we have to do is to be well prepared.  The
+old tower is stronger than ever, and if they come we'll fight them from
+the outer gate to the wall, from the wall to the inner wall, and if they
+drive us from that, there is the tower, where we can set them at
+defiance."
+
+"As old Sir Ralph did, father," cried the boy, flushing with pride.
+
+"Exactly, my boy; and I do not feel much fear of Captain Purlrose and
+his men."
+
+"No, father; I suppose he will keep on half-drawing his sword, and
+thrusting it back with a clang."
+
+"Exactly, Ralph, boy," cried Sir Morton, laughing.  "Just that one act
+shows the man's character to a T.  Bluster, and then retreat.  But
+suppose it should come to fighting, my boy.  Hadn't you better go back
+to school, and stay till the trouble's over?"
+
+"What!" cried Ralph fiercely.
+
+"You surely don't want to fight, boy?"
+
+"No, father, I don't want to fight; but if you are obliged to--Oh,
+father, you will not send me away?"
+
+Sir Morton looked searchingly at the flushed countenance before him for
+some moments before speaking.
+
+"If you wish to stay, Ralph, certainly I shall not send you away.  I
+only gave you the opportunity to go if you wished.  However, perhaps we
+shall hear no more of the matter.  Eden may not listen to that
+scoundrel.  If he does, we may set to work and furbish up our arms, lay
+in stores of provisions, and be prepared for our defence."
+
+"Then I hope he will engage the men, father," cried Ralph.
+
+"Eh?  And pray why, boy?" exclaimed Sir Morton.
+
+"Because, father," said the lad, speaking in a deeply-moved tone of
+voice, his eyes flashing and his cheeks flushed.  "You have done nothing
+lately to show how deeply you resent all the old wrongs; and if the
+Edens hire these men, it will be a good opportunity for fighting our old
+foes, beating them and taking possession, and ending the feud."
+
+"Yes," said Sir Morton, smiling, "a good opportunity, boy; but we might
+lose the day."
+
+"We will not lose the day, father," cried the lad hotly.  "Those men who
+fight for pay are cowards at heart, and they will lead the Edens to
+their destruction."
+
+"But suppose that, after all, the Darleys were the ones to blame?"
+
+"Oh, father, we can't stop to think of that.  We do know that they have
+committed outrage after outrage against our family, and you have always
+taught me that it was our duty to punish the Edens."
+
+"Yes, my boy, I have, as my father and my grandfather taught me; but I
+have often wished the wretched business were at an end.  I want to be at
+peace."
+
+"And you shall be, father, and soon, too, now," cried Ralph excitedly.
+"But you will begin at once?"
+
+"What, making peace?"
+
+"No, father, war," cried the lad eagerly.
+
+"Yes," said Sir Morton sternly, "if the Edens do."
+
+"Oh, father, how calmly you take it all.  I should have thought you
+would be ready to begin at once."
+
+"Yes, Ralph, because you are young, and have never seen what even the
+pettiest war means, not even the bright side, with its chivalry and
+panoply, and gay show.  I have seen that, and the other side too."
+
+"But you would fight, father?" cried the lad, looking astonished.
+
+"Yes," said Sir Morton, with his face turning hard and stern, "if the
+need arises, boy, and to the death."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FOUR.
+
+MARK EDEN HAS A MORNING'S WALK.
+
+Eden, fresh from Linkeham, on account of a terrible attack of fever
+ravaging the school to such an extent that it was considered wise to
+close it for a time, was enjoying the pleasant change, and wondering how
+long it would be before the school would reopen, and whether his father,
+Sir Edward Eden of Black Tor, would send him back.
+
+"I ought to be old enough now to give up a schoolboy's life," he said to
+himself, "and begin thinking of what I shall be as a man."
+
+He said this to himself as he descended the stone steps which led to the
+platform at the side of the precipice, where a natural Gothic arch hung
+over the entrance to the mine, which began with a steep slope running
+down through the limestone for fifty yards, and then opened out into an
+extensive cavity, whose roof was a hundred feet overhead, and in whose
+floor the square hole had been cut to follow the great vein of lead,
+which spread like the roots of some gigantic tree in various directions.
+The great hole represented the trunk of the tree, and this had once
+been solid lead ore, but all had been laboriously cut away, as well as
+many of the branches, which represented the roots, though plenty were
+left to excavate, and fresh ones and new cavities were constantly being
+formed, so that the Eden mine at Black Tor was looked upon as the
+richest in the county.
+
+Mark Eden stopped to have a chat with some of his father's men, who were
+going and coming from the square trunk-hole, and he watched them
+ascending and descending the greasy ladders fixed against the side, each
+man bearing a candle, stuck in his leather cap.
+
+"I shan't want to be a miner," he said, as he gazed down at the tiny
+sparks of light below.  "Faugh! how dark and dismal it looks.  A dirty
+hole.  But father says dirty work brings clean money, and it's just as
+well to be rich, I suppose.  But what a life!  Might just as well be a
+mole."
+
+He began to hum over an old English ditty, and his voice echoed
+strangely from above.
+
+"Let's see: Mary wants some of that blue spar, and I promised to get a
+lot.  Must go down one of these days with Dummy Rugg: he says he knows
+of some fine bits.  Not to-day, though."
+
+He hurried out into the bright sunshine again, went up the steps to the
+castle, which stood perched at the top of a huge mass of rock,
+surrounded on all sides by the deep gorge, and then crossed the natural
+bridge to the main cliff, of which the foundation of the castle was the
+vast slice, split away, most probably by some volcanic disturbance.
+Masses of lava and scoria uncovered by the miners, from time to time,
+showed that volcanic action had been rife there at one period;
+additional suggestion that the said action had not yet died out, being
+afforded by the springs of beautifully clear warm water, which bubbled
+out in several places in the district.
+
+As the lad crossed the bridge, thinking nothing of the giddy, profound
+depths on either side, there being not the slightest protection in the
+way of rail to the six-foot wide path, he shook back his brown hair,
+thrust his hands in his pockets, and with the sheath of his sword
+banging against his legs, started off along the first level place for a
+run.
+
+A looker-on would have wondered why he did this, and would have gazed
+ahead to see what there was to induce him to make so wild a rush in a
+dangerous place.  But he would have seen nothing but rugged path,
+tree-top, and the face of the cliff, and would not have grasped the fact
+that the reason for the boy's wild dash was, that he was overcharged
+with vitality, and that energy which makes a lad exert himself in that
+natural spontaneous effort to get rid of some of the vital gas, flashing
+along his nerves and bubbling through his veins.
+
+"What a day!" he cried aloud.  "How blue the sky is.  Hallo! there they
+go."
+
+He stopped suddenly to watch a cavernous hole in the cliff, from which
+half-a-dozen blue rock-pigeons had darted out, and as he watched, others
+swooped by, and darted in.
+
+The next minute he went on, followed the path, and turned a
+buttress-like corner, which took him to the other side of the great
+chine of limestone, which was here quite as precipitous, but clothed
+with trees, which softened the asperities of nature, and hung from
+shelf, crack, and chasm, to cast shadows down and down, right to where
+the river flashed and sparkled in its rapid flow, or formed deep dark
+pools, which reflected the face of the cliff in picture after picture.
+
+"One never gets tired of this place," muttered the lad, as he began to
+descend a zigzag path, worn in the face of the cliff, starting the
+powdered-headed jackdaws from their breeding shelves and holes, and
+sending the blackbirds chinking from out of the bushes which clung to
+the grey precipice.
+
+"That's where the brown owl's nest was," muttered the lad.  "Bound to
+say there's one this year.  S'pose I'm getting too old for
+birds'-nesting and climbing.  Don't see why I should be, though."
+
+He reached the river's bank at last, and after walking for a few yards,
+trampling down the white blossoms of the broad-leaved garlic, which here
+grew in profusion, and suggested salad, he reached a rippling shallow,
+stepped down into the river, and waded across, the water only reaching
+to his ankles.
+
+As he stepped out on the other side, and kicked and stamped to get rid
+of the water, he gazed along the winding dale at as glorious a bit of
+English scenery as England can produce; and on that bright May morning,
+as he breathed in the sweet almond-like odour of the fully-blown
+hawthorn blossom, he muttered: "Linkeham's nice enough, but the lads
+would never believe how beautiful it is here.  Hallo! there he goes.  I
+wonder where they are building this year."
+
+He shaded his eyes as he looked up at a great blackbird, winging its way
+high up above the top of the great cliff which hung over the river, and
+watched till it disappeared, when, in a low melodious voice, he began
+singing softly another snatch of an old English song, something about
+three ravens that sat upon a tree, with a chorus of: "Down, a-down,
+a-down," which he repeated again and again, as if it helped him to
+reflect.
+
+"Wonder where they are building this year," he said to himself again.
+"I should like a couple of little ones to bring up.  Get them young, and
+they'd be as tame as tame."
+
+He went on wondering where the ravens, which frequented the
+neighbourhood of the river and its mountainous cliffs, built their
+nests; but wondering did not help him, and he gave up the riddle, and
+began, in his pleasant holiday idleness, to look about at other things
+in the unfrequented wilderness through which the river ran.  To trace
+the raven by following it home seemed too difficult, but it was easy to
+follow a great bumble-bee, which went blundering by, alighting upon a
+block of stone, took flight again, and landed upon a slope covered with
+moss, entering at last a hole which went sloping down beneath the
+stones.
+
+A little farther on, where a hawthorn whitened the bank with its
+fragrant wreaths, there was a quick, fluttering rush, a glimpse of a
+speckle-breasted thrush, and a little examination showed the neat nest,
+plastered inside smoothly with clay, like a cup, to hold four beautiful
+blue eggs, finely-spotted at the ends.
+
+"Sitting, and nearly hatched," said the lad.  "Might wait for them, and
+bring them up.  I dunno, though.  Sing best in the trees.  Wouldn't hop
+about the courtyard and cliffs like the young ravens.  Wonder where they
+build?"
+
+He went on, to stop and watch the trout and grayling, which kept darting
+away, as he approached the riverside, gleaming through the sunlit water,
+and hiding in the depths, or beneath some mass of rock or tree-root on
+the other side.
+
+"Rather stupid for me, getting to be a man, to think so much about
+birds' nests; but I don't know: perhaps it isn't childish.  Old Rayburn
+is always watching for them, and picking flowers, and chipping bits of
+stone.  Why, he has books full of pressed grasses and plants; and boxes
+full of bits of ore and spar, and stony shells out of the caves and
+mines.--Well now, isn't that strange?"
+
+He stopped short, laughing to himself, as he suddenly caught sight of a
+droll-looking figure, standing knee-deep in the river, busy with rod and
+line, gently throwing a worm-baited hook into the deep black water,
+under the projecting rocks at the foot of the cliff.
+
+The figure, cut off, as it were, at the knees, looked particularly short
+and stout, humped like a camel, by the creel swung behind to be out of
+the way.  His dress was a rusty brown doublet, with puffed-out breeches
+beneath, descending half-way down the thigh, and then all was bare.  A
+steeple-crowned, broad-brimmed hat, from beneath which hung an abundance
+of slightly-curling silvery hair, completed the figure at which Mark
+Eden gazed, unseen; for the old man was intent upon his fishing, and
+just then he struck, and after a little playing, drew in and unhooked a
+finely-spotted trout, which he was about to transfer to his basket, when
+he was checked by a greeting from the back.
+
+"Morning, Master Rayburn.  That's a fine one."
+
+"Ah, Mark, boy, how are you?" said the old man, smiling.  "Yes: I've got
+his brother in the basket, and I want two more.  Better come and help me
+to eat them."
+
+"Can't to-day.--Quite well?"
+
+"Yes, thank God, boy.  Well for an old man.  I heard you were back from
+school.  How's that?"
+
+"Bad fever there.  All sent home."
+
+"That's sad.  Ought to be at work, boy.  Better come and read with me."
+
+"Well, I will sometimes, sir."
+
+"Come often, my boy; keep you out of mischief."
+
+"Oh, I shan't get into mischief, sir."
+
+"Of course not; idle boys never do.  Not likely to get fighting, either.
+I see young Ralph Darley's at home.  Fine chance for you," said the old
+man, with a sarcastic ring in his voice, as he slipped his trout into
+the basket.
+
+"Is he?" cried the lad excitedly.
+
+"Oh yes; he's up at the Cliff.  Now then, why don't you fill your
+pockets with big stones to throw at him, or cut a big club?  Oh, I see,
+though.  You've mounted a skewer.  Pull it out, and try if the point's
+sharp.  I suppose you're going down the river to lay wait for him and
+kill him."
+
+"There, you're as bad as ever, Master Rayburn," cried the lad, flushing,
+and looking mortified.  "Last time I saw you it was just the same:
+laughing at, and bantering, and sneering at me.  No wonder my father
+gets angry with you, and doesn't ask you to the Tor."
+
+"Yes, no wonder.  Quarrels with me, boy, instead of with himself for
+keeping up such a mad quarrel."
+
+"It isn't father's fault, sir," cried the lad quickly.  "It's the old
+feud that has been going on for generations."
+
+"Old feud!  Old disgrace!" cried the fisherman, throwing away the worm
+he was about to impale on his hook, to see it snapped up at once by a
+good fish; and standing his rod in the water, like a staff to lean on,
+as he went on talking, with the cold water swirling about over his
+knees, and threatening to wet his feather-stuffed breeches.  "I'm
+ashamed of your father and Ralph's father.  Call themselves Christian
+gentlemen, and because a pair of old idiots of ancestors in the dark
+ages quarrelled, and tried to cut one another's throats, they go on as
+their fathers did before them, trying to seize each other's properties,
+and to make an end of one another, and encouraging their sons to grow up
+in the same vile way."
+
+"My father is a gentleman and a knight, sir," cried Mark Eden hotly;
+"and I'm sure that he would never turn cut-throat or robber if he was
+left alone."
+
+"Of course; and that's what Sir Morton Darley would say, or his son
+either; and still the old feud is kept up.  Look here, boy; suppose you
+were to run against young Ralph now, what would happen?"
+
+"There'd be a fight," cried the lad, flushing up; and he drew in his
+breath with a hiss.
+
+"Of course!" sneered the old man.
+
+"Well, he never sees me without insulting me."
+
+"And you never see him without doing the same."
+
+"But--"
+
+"But!  Bah!  I haven't patience with you all.  Six of one; half a dozen
+of the other.  Both your families well off in this world's goods, and
+yet miserable, Fathers, two Ahabs, longing for the other's land to make
+a garden of herbs; and if they got it, a nice garden of herbs it would
+be!  Why, Mark Eden, as I'm a scholar and a gentleman, my income is
+fifty pounds a year.  My cottage is my own, and I'm a happier man than
+either of your fathers.  Look about you, boy--here, at the great God's
+handiwork; wherever your eyes rest, you see beauty.  Look at this
+silvery flashing river, the lovely great trees, the beautiful cliffs,
+and up yonder in the distance at the soft blues of the mountains,
+melting into the bluer skies.  Did you ever see anything more glorious
+than this dale?"
+
+"Never," cried the lad enthusiastically.
+
+"Good, boy!  That came from the heart.  That heart's young and soft, and
+true, as I know.  Don't let it get crusted over with the hard shell of a
+feud.  Life's too great and grand to be wasted over a miserable quarrel,
+and in efforts to make others wretched.  And it's so idiotic, Mark, for
+you can't hurt other people without hurting yourself more.  Look here,
+next time you, spring boy, meet the other spring boy, act at once; don't
+wait till you are summer men, or autumn men.  When you get to be a
+winter man as I am, it will be too late.  Begin now, while it is early
+with you.  Hold out your hand and shake his, and become fast friends.
+Teach your fathers what they ought to have done when they were young.
+Come, promise me that."
+
+"I can't, sir," said the boy, frowning.  "And if I could, Ralph Darley
+would laugh in my face."
+
+"Bah!" ejaculated the old man, stamping the butt of his rod in the
+water.  "There, I've done with you both.  You are a pair of young
+ravens, sons of the old ravens, who have their nests up on the stony
+cliffs, and you'll both grow up to be as bad and bitter as your fathers,
+and take to punching out the young lambs' eyes with your beaks.  I've
+done with you both."
+
+"No, you haven't, Master Rayburn," said the lad softly.  "I was coming
+to see you this evening, to ask you to go with me for a day, hunting for
+minerals and those stones you showed me in the old cavern, where the hot
+spring is."
+
+"Done with you, quite," said the old man fiercely, as he began to bait
+his hook with another worm.
+
+"And I say, Master Rayburn, I want to come and read with you."
+
+"An untoward generation," said the old man.  "There, be off!  I'm
+wasting time, and I want my trout, and _thymallus_, my grayling, for man
+must eat, and it's very nice to eat trout and grayling, boy.  Be off!
+I've quite done with you."  And the old man turned his back, and waded a
+few steps upstream.
+
+"I say, Master Rayburn," continued the lad, "when you said `Bah!' in
+that sharp way, it was just like the bark of one of the great black
+birds."
+
+"What, sir!" snapped the old man; "compare me to a raven?"
+
+"You compared me and my father, and the Darleys, all to ravens, sir."
+
+"Humph!  Yes, so I did," muttered the old fisherman.
+
+"I didn't mean to be rude.  But you reminded me: I saw one of them fly
+over just before I met you, sir.  Do you know where they are nesting
+this year?"
+
+"Eh?" cried the fisherman, turning sharply, with a look of interest in
+his handsome old face.  "Well, not for certain, Mark, but I've seen them
+several times lately--mischievous, murderous wretches.  They kill a
+great many lambs.  They're somewhere below, near the High Cliffs.  I
+shouldn't at all wonder, if you got below there and hid among the
+bushes, you'd see where they came.  It's sure to be in the rock face."
+
+"I should like to get the young ones," said the lad.
+
+"Yes, do, my boy; and if you find an addled egg or two, save them for
+me.  Bring then on, and we'll blow them."
+
+"I will," said the lad, smiling.--"Don't be hard on me, Master Rayburn."
+
+"Eh?  No, no, my boy; but I can't help being a bit put out sometimes.
+Coming down this evening, were you?  Do.  I'll save you a couple of
+grayling for supper--if I catch any," he added, with a smile.
+
+"May I come?"
+
+"Of course.  Come early, my boy.  I've a lot of things to show you that
+I've found since you were at home, and we'll plan out some reading, eh?
+Mustn't go back and get rusty, because you are at home.  We'll read a
+great deal, and then you won't have time to think about knocking Ralph
+Darley's brains out--if he has any.  You haven't much, or you wouldn't
+help to keep up this feud."
+
+"Oh, please don't say any more about that, Master Rayburn."
+
+"Not a word, boy.  Must go on--a beautiful worm morning."
+
+The old man turned his back again.
+
+"Don't be late," he cried; and he waded onward, stooping, and looking
+more humped and comical than ever, as he bent forward to throw his bait
+into likely places, while Mark Eden went onward down-stream.
+
+"I like old Master Rayburn," he said to himself; "but I wish he wouldn't
+be so bitter about the old trouble.  It isn't our fault.  Father would
+be only too glad to shake hands and be friends, if the Darleys were only
+nice, instead of being such savage beasts."
+
+He went on, forcing his way among the bushes, and clambering over the
+great blocks of stone which strewed the sides of the river, and then
+stopped suddenly, as he sent up a moor-hen, which flew across the river,
+dribbling its long thin toes in the water as it went.
+
+"I wonder," he said thoughtfully, "whether the Darleys think we are
+beasts too?"
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FIVE.
+
+HOW MARK EDEN FOUND THE RAVEN'S NEST.
+
+"Ah, there he goes," said Mark, beneath his breath, as he stood
+motionless, and watched a large raven flapping along, high overhead, in
+the direction he was taking.  "Perhaps that's the cock bird.  Looks big.
+The nest may be where old Master Rayburn says, or up this way, and the
+bird's going for food."
+
+He waited till the raven disappeared, and then went on down-stream,
+taking to a path higher up, which led him by a pretty cottage, standing
+in a niche at a bend of the river, so that the place had a good view up
+and down-stream, and with its pleasant garden, looked the sort of home
+which might well make its owner content.
+
+But Mark Eden's mind was too full of ravens' nests, to leave room for
+any contemplation of the old scholar's cottage; and he hurried on by the
+path, which cut off two or three bends of the river, taking him right
+away for quite a couple of miles, and bringing him to the water's-edge
+again, just in front of a mighty cliff, which towered up out of a dense
+grove of beeches on the other side of the river.
+
+The place was solitary and still in the extreme; and going close down to
+the water's-edge, Mark Eden seated himself upon a mossy stone, between
+two great hawthorns, which hid him from anything coming up or
+down-stream, while brambles, ferns, and clustering hemlock-plants, hid
+his back and front.
+
+It was a pleasant resting-place, to sit and watch the rapidly running
+river, which was very shallow here; and from his hiding-place, he could
+see the shadows of the ripples, and the stony bottom, and also those
+cast by trout, as they glided here and there, waiting for the
+unfortunate flies and caterpillars which had fallen from overhanging
+boughs, to be washed down the stream.
+
+But Mark had but a glance for the fish: his attention was taken up by
+the mass of precipitous stone before him, so steep, that it was only
+here and there, in cracks or on ledges, that herb or stunted bush could
+find a place to root; and as he scanned the precipice, from its foot
+among the beeches, to its brow, five hundred feet above where he sat, he
+wondered whether the ravens nested there.
+
+No more likely place could be found for the great birds to rear their
+young; the cliff looked inaccessible, and days would pass, sometimes
+weeks, and not a soul come near.
+
+"Old Master Rayburn must be right," thought the lad.  "What eyes he has
+for everything of this kind.  There are no rooks in the beeches; there
+isn't a jackdaw about; and I haven't seen a rock-dove; all proof that
+the ravens are here, for the others would not dare to nest near them.
+Only be to hatch young ones for food.  But I don't see my gentleman nor
+his lady."
+
+A hoarse, distant bark was heard, just as the lad's neck began to ache
+with staring up in vain, in the search for the nest, and he sat
+perfectly motionless, crouched amongst the hemlock and heracleum, to be
+rewarded by seeing a shadow thrown on the white limestone far on high,
+and directly after one of the great glossy black birds alight, right on
+the edge of the cliff, from whence it hopped into the air, and seemed to
+let itself fall some forty feet, down behind a stunted patch of broom,
+which had rooted in a cleft.  There it disappeared for a few moments, to
+reappear, diving down toward the stream, but only to circle upward
+again, rise higher and higher, and finally disappear over the cliff,
+half a quarter of a mile away.
+
+"Found it!" panted Mark; "a nest with young ones.  Chance if there are
+any eggs for Master Rayburn."
+
+He leaned back to examine the place.
+
+"Can't get up there," he muttered at last; "but it would be easy to get
+down from the top.  I could do it, but--"
+
+He took off his cap, and gave his brown hair a vicious scratch, for
+there were other obstacles in the way.
+
+It would be easy to wade across the river; easy to make his way along
+the other side to where the cliff sloped, five hundred yards lower down
+the stream.  From there he could reach the high down, which was broken
+off short to form the cliff, and walk along the edge till he was exactly
+over the nest, and then descend.  Those were not obstacles, but trifles.
+The great difficulty was moral.  That great mass of limestone was on
+the Darley estate, and for a few minutes, the lad felt as if he must
+give it up.
+
+But obstacles only spurred him on to action, and he cried to himself,
+petulantly:
+
+"Is it theirs?  Who are they, to claim an open wild place like that?
+They'll be saying next that all Darbyshire belongs to them.  It's as
+much ours as theirs, and, if we had our rights, it would be ours.  I
+shall go, in spite of all the Darleys in the county.  Who are they?
+Piece of rock and moor like that, and they claim it.  Let them.  I shall
+not stop away for them."
+
+The boy flushed, and ignoring the fact that he was about to commit a
+trespass, he slipped off shoes and hose, waded straight across the
+shallow river, and sat down on the other side to dry his feet, and put
+on hose and shoes again.
+
+And all the time he felt a strong desire to glance up and down the
+river, to see if he had been observed by any one; but in his pride of
+heart he would not, for fear that he would be seen watching, and some
+one connected with his family's enemies take it for a sign of fear.
+
+This done, he rose, gave his feet a stamp, glanced up at the face of the
+cliff, to see one of the parent ravens fly off, uttering an angry croak;
+and then he began to bear off to the right, so as to ascend the low part
+of the cliff, reaching the top quite five hundred yards away, and
+turning at once to continue his ascent by walking along the edge, which
+rose steeply, till it reached the point above the raven's nest, and then
+sloped down into a hollow, to rise once more into the wooded eminence
+which was crowned by Cliff Castle, the Darleys' home.
+
+"They've a deal better place than we," said Mark to himself, as he
+strode on, in full defiance of the possibility of being seen, though it
+was hardly likely, a great patch of mighty beech-trees, mingled with
+firs, lying between the top of the big cliff and the Darleys' dwelling.
+"More trees, and facing toward the west and south, with the river below
+them, while our home is treeless and bare, and looks to the north and
+east, and is often covered with snow when their side's sunny and bright.
+My word! warm work, climbing up here, and the grass is as slippery as
+if it had been polished.  Mustn't go over.  Father wouldn't like it if I
+were to be killed; but I shouldn't be, for I should come down in the
+tree-tops, and then fall from bough to bough into the river, and it's
+deep just under the raven's nest."
+
+Thinking this, he went on, up and up, cautiously, clear of head as one
+who had from childhood played about the cliffs, and reaching the summit
+breathless, to stand on the extreme verge, watching one of the ravens,
+which came sailing up, saw him at a distance, rose above his head, and
+then began to circle round, uttering hoarse cries.
+
+"Ah, thief!" cried the lad; "I see what you have in your beak.  A
+chicken; but your tricks are at an end.  No more feeding young ravens
+here."
+
+"Better get to the nest, first, though," said the boy laughingly; and he
+leaned forward, quite out of the perpendicular, to look down below the
+bush which sheltered the nest.  "Easy enough: I can do it.  If Ralph
+Darley had been half a fellow, he would have taken it himself.  Better
+take off my sword, though.  No; mustn't leave that in the enemy's
+country.  I'll take it down with me.  Be nice to come up again, and find
+that one of those ragged Jacks had got hold of it!  I wonder whether Sir
+Morton engaged them the other day.  Very likely.  He's bad enough to do
+such an ungentlemanly thing.  What did that fellow call himself.  Pearl
+nose?  Ought to have been Ruby nose.  No, no; I remember now; it was
+Pearl Rose.  My word, how high and mighty he was!  Quite threatening.
+He'd go straight to Sir Morton Darley, if father did not enlist him and
+his men in our service.  That upset father, just as he was thinking
+whether he should have them.  He never could bear being threatened.  How
+soon he sent them about their business, and threatened to summon the
+miners as well as our men.  It will be awkward, though, if Sir Morton
+has engaged them, and strengthened his followers like that.  May mean an
+attack.  I wonder whether he did take their offer.  If he has, father
+will wish he had agreed to the fellow's terms.  I don't know, though.
+As he said to me, they would have been falling out with the mine men,
+and they seemed a ragged, drunken-looking set.  Glad he sent them about
+their business."
+
+All this, suggested by the possibility of losing his sword, just when he
+was upon an enemy's land; but he had not stopped on the top to think,
+for after lying down upon his breast, to gaze down and select the best
+place for his descent, he turned as he mused, lowered his legs, and
+began to descend, finding that after all his sword was not much in his
+way.
+
+It was no new thing to Mark Eden to climb about the limestone cliffs,
+which formed one side of the Gleame, sometimes sloping down gradually,
+at others perpendicular, and in some cases partly overhanging, though in
+the latter case, it meant only for a few winters before, after being
+well saturated, the frost split them, piece by piece, till they went
+thundering down among the trees, generally to bound right into the river
+bed.
+
+But, sloping or perpendicular, the formation was nearly always the same,
+stratum after stratum of from one to three feet in thickness, lying one
+upon the other, and riven into blocks which looked as if they had been
+laid by giant masons, to form a monstrous wall.  Consequently, between
+the strata and their upright dividing cracks, there were plenty of
+places where a bold climber could find foot and hand-hold, without
+counting upon roots of trees, wiry shrubs, and tough herbs, to hold on
+by when other objects failed.
+
+So easily enough, down went Mark, humming his tune again, and changing
+the humming to singing about the three ravens sitting on a tree, though
+in this instance, excepting the young in the nest below, there were only
+two, and instead of sitting, they were sailing round and round, croaking
+and barking angrily, the cock bird, if it was not the hen, making a
+pretence every now and then, to dart down and strike at the would-be
+marauder, who was descending to their home.
+
+But Mark lowered himself steadily enough, laughing at the angry birds,
+and listening for the first cries of their young, as he wondered how big
+they would be.
+
+He soon found that appearances were deceitful, upon a great height like
+that, for instead of the bush which hid the nest, being forty feet from
+the cliff brow, it was a good sixty, and the climbing was not so good as
+he had anticipated.  The limestone crumbled away here and there; tufts
+of tough grass came out by the roots, and the stunted stems of bushes
+were not plentiful enough for hand-hold.  But whenever the lad found the
+place too difficult, he edged off to right or left, and found an easier
+spot from which he lowered himself, and edged his way back along the
+joining of the next row of blocks.
+
+To any one gazing from the opposite side, his appearance, flattened
+against the cliff, would have seemed appalling, but to Mark Eden it was
+a mere nothing; he was descending the old cliff, and trying to find the
+easiest way, that was all.  No nervous qualms troubled him, and the
+thought of falling never once came into his head.
+
+Lower and lower, with the sun beating upon his back, and the ravens
+croaking more and more loudly, and getting more threatening.
+
+"Just wait till I get down to the bush, my fine fellows," he said aloud.
+"Then you may come on if you like, and I should like to see you do it;
+only look out, for it means spitting yourselves.  Glad I brought my
+sword."
+
+He was now only about ten feet above the bush; and as he held on for a
+few moments and looked down, he saw that there was a good-sized ledge in
+front of a cranny, in which the nest must be, and upon this ledge,
+bones, bits of wool, feathers, and remains of rabbits' fur, were
+scattered, showing how hard the old birds had worked to feed their
+young.
+
+He saw, too, something else which completely upset one of his plans,
+which was, to continue his descent right to the bottom of the cliff,
+after securing the young ravens; for the strata retired for some
+distance below the bush, and he grasped at once the fact, that he must
+return by the way he descended.
+
+"Wish I had a bag with me," he thought, as he heard a peculiar squeaking
+arise from beneath his feet.  "Never mind: I'll tie their legs together
+with my handkerchief, or thrust them into toy breast."
+
+_Croak_--_croak_--_craw_--_awk_! came from one of the ravens, as it
+swept by him with a rush.
+
+"Wait a minute, my fine fellow, or madam," said the boy.  "Hard for you,
+perhaps; but how many chickens and ducklings have you stolen? how many
+unfortunate lambs have you blinded this spring?  Can't have ravens here.
+Hah! that's it."
+
+For upon forcing his hands well into a fault in the rock, he had lowered
+his feet and found good foot-hold on the ledge, lowered himself a little
+more, and saw that he could easily sit down, hold on by his left hand,
+the stout bush being ready, and draw out a pair of well-grown nestlings
+as soon as he liked.
+
+"I'm afraid, Master Rayburn, that if there are eggs I should get them
+broken if I put them in my pocket," he said aloud; "and if they do
+break, phew!  It would be horrible.  Ah, put them in my cap.  Let's
+see."
+
+He thrust his right hand into the niche, and snatched it back, for the
+young ravens were big enough to use their beaks fiercely, and set up a
+loud, hoarse series of cries, as soon as they found that an enemy was at
+the gate.
+
+"You vicious little wretches!" he cried.  "My word, they can bite.  Ah,
+would you!"
+
+This was to one of the ravens, which rendered frantic by the cries of
+the young, swooped at him, and struck him with a wing in passing.
+
+"Declaration of war, eh!" he said.  "Well, it's your doing, you
+murderous creatures, you lamb-slayers.  I did not know you could be so
+fierce."
+
+The raven had sailed off to a distance now, croaking loudly, and joined
+its mate; and as at the next movement of Mark, seated on his perilous
+perch, the young ravens screeched hoarsely again, it was evident that
+there was to be a fresh attack, this time united.
+
+But the lad reached down his right arm, got hold of the hilt of his thin
+rapier, and pressing closely to the niche, drew the weapon from its
+sheath.
+
+"Now then!" he cried, as the blade flashed in the sunshine, "I'm ready
+for you.  A new way of killing ravens.  Come on."
+
+He had not long to wait, for finding the entrance to their nesting-place
+partly darkened, the young birds set up a loud series of cries,
+maddening the old ones, and with a rush, down came one of them, so
+fiercely that the lad's arm received a heavy stroke from a powerful
+wing, the sword, passing through the feathers, between the bird's wing
+and body.
+
+"That's one to you," said the lad, drawing his breath with a sharp hiss.
+"My word, you can hit hard!  It's your life or mine, my fine fellow, so
+look out."
+
+Almost before he had breathed these words, amidst the outcry made by the
+young, the second raven stooped at him, just as a falcon would at a
+heron, and it came so unexpectedly, that once more the point of the
+sword was ill directed, and a severe buffet of the bird's wing nearly
+sent him down.
+
+"This is getting too serious," he said, pressing his teeth together, as
+he for the first time fully realised what enormous power a bird has in
+its breast muscles.
+
+They gave him no time for thinking, the first bird which had attacked,
+after taking a swift curve round and upward, coming down again with a
+fierce rush.  But it was its last.  Mark's sword was too well pointed
+this time; there was a whirr, a heavy thud which made the hilt jar
+against the lad's thigh, and the brave fierce bird had spitted itself so
+thoroughly, that it struggled and beat its wings heavily as it lay on
+the lad's lap, till he thrust out his arm to keep off the rain of blows,
+and the bird fluttered itself off the rapier, and fell with the force of
+a stone, down, down, out of sight.
+
+A hoarse croak set the lad on guard again, and none too soon, for once
+more he received a heavy blow from the companion raven's wing, as it
+passed him with a whirr, striking the bush as well.  Then recovering
+itself from the stoop which carried it low down, it sailed up again, to
+prepare for another attack.
+
+"A bad miss," muttered the lad.  "There was so little time to aim.  Now
+then, come on again."
+
+The raven was far enough away, but as if it heard the challenge, it
+swept round, and came on now from the other direction, an awkward one
+for Mark; but he managed to hoist himself round a little, and presented
+his point steadily at the advancing bird, as it came on, looking small
+at first, then rapidly appearing bigger and bigger, till, with a furious
+whish through the air, it was upon him.
+
+"Hah!" ejaculated the lad, as his right arm was swung round by the
+violence of the raven's stoop, and the unfortunate bird had shared its
+mate's fate, for with the rush it had not only pierced itself through
+and through, but swept itself off the blade, wrenching the holder's
+shoulder, and falling, fluttering feebly, downward, till it too passed
+from sight.
+
+"Well done, brave birds!" panted the lad.  "Seems too bad: but it has
+saved no end of lambs.  Who'd have thought that they would fight like
+that?  Why, they could have beaten me off.  Lucky I brought my sword.
+Phew! it has made me hot," he muttered, as he wiped the blade carefully;
+and after a little wriggling to find the hole in the scabbard, thrust
+the weapon home.  "They will not come at me again; so now for our young
+friends."
+
+He began to feel the nest again, making the young birds squeal hoarsely,
+and peck at him viciously as well; but after the parents' attack, this
+seemed trifling, and, to his great satisfaction, he found that there was
+an egg as well.
+
+"Must get that down safe," he said.  "Old Master Rayburn will be so--"
+
+He did not finish his sentence, for at that moment a hoarse voice
+shouted: "Hallo, below!  What you doing there?"  And looking up, to his
+horror he saw three heads against the sky, as their owners lay on the
+cliff and looked down at him; one of the faces being that of Ralph
+Darley, the others, those of two of the enemy's men.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER SIX.
+
+NICK GARTH MAKES A FIND.
+
+"Hi!  Nick!  Nick, I say, hallo!"  Ralph Darley ran as he shouted at a
+couple of his father's men, who were descending the slope on the eastern
+side of the castle, each shouldering a short sharp pick, of the kind in
+common use for hewing stone.
+
+At first, though they must have heard, they paid no attention whatever;
+but at the third angry summons, they both stopped short, looked slowly
+round, and seeing their young master running, they stood still, and
+waited for him to come up, which he did, panting and angry.
+
+"You, Nick Garth," he cried; "you must have heard me call."
+
+"Yerse," said the man addressed, a strong-built fellow, with a perfectly
+smooth face, and an unpleasant-looking pair of eyes, so arranged that
+they did not work properly; in fact, he could only use one at a time.
+If he brought one to bear upon an object, that eye dragged its fellow
+round so that the pupil dived under the man's thick nose; and if he made
+an effort to see with the eclipsed one, it served its fellow in the same
+way.
+
+"You must have heard too, Ram Jennings."
+
+"Yoss, I heared," said the other man, a dark, rather villainous-looking
+fellow, whose face could not be called troubled with yellow specks, but
+streaked here and there with a little whitish red, the rest being one
+enormous freckle, which covered brow, cheeks, and chin.
+
+"Then why didn't you answer?"
+
+"Both on us stopped," said the first man addressed.
+
+"Ay, that's so," said the other.
+
+"Why didn't you come back, then?"
+
+"'Cause we see you running.  Didn't we, mate?"
+
+"Ay, that's so."
+
+"It's your duty to come to me when your called," said Ralph hotly.  "The
+man to the master, not the master to the man."
+
+"Allus do," said Nick, looking insolently at the lad first with one eye,
+and then with the other.
+
+"Don't be impertinent, sir.  Now then, where are you two going?"
+
+"Over yonder," said the first man surlily.
+
+"Ay, over yonder," said the other.
+
+"What for?"
+
+"Fads."
+
+"What?"
+
+"Fads.  Young missus wants some o' they softy stones cut to build up in
+the yard, round a bit o' drain pipe, to make a puddle to keep fishes
+in."
+
+"Oh!" said the lad, cooling down.  "Go and do it then; I'll wait till
+the afternoon."
+
+The men grinned, shouldered their picks, and went off, while the lad
+took a few paces in another direction; but turned sharply, and called
+the men again, with the same result--that is, they stood still and
+waited for him to join them.
+
+"They're a pair of thick-headed fools, that's what they are," muttered
+the lad.  "I could teach a dog to be more dutiful.  Here, Nick--Ram--did
+you see those soldiers who came the other day?"
+
+"Nay, only one o' their cloak things as they left behind."
+
+"Left a cloak behind?"
+
+"Ay," said the second man.  "I fun' it."
+
+"What did you do with it?"
+
+"Burnt it.  Warn't good for nothing else."
+
+"Do you know where they went?"
+
+"Summun said they went to Black Tor, and old Eden set 'em to work in the
+mine, and keeps 'em there," said Nick, moving his head from side to
+side, so as to bring his eyes alternately to bear upon his young master.
+
+"Oh!" said Ralph softly to himself.  Then aloud: "That will do."
+
+The men grinned again, and went off, while Ralph walked slowly away to
+where he could throw himself down at the side of the cliff in the
+sunshine, swing his legs over the edge, where it was nice and dangerous
+if he slipped, and finally leaned back to rest on one elbow, and gaze in
+the direction of the high cliff beyond the depression, where the men
+were gone to chip out pieces of the soft spongy-looking tufa, which lay
+in beds on the slope.
+
+"That's bad news," thought the lad.  "I wonder what father will say.  It
+will be horrible.  They will be so strong there, that one doesn't know
+what will happen, only that we shall have to fight.  Well, then," he
+cried hotly, "we'll fight.  Let them come.  The Darleys have never been
+beaten yet."
+
+For the next half-hour, he lay thinking about swords, and pikes, and
+armour, and big stones to cast down off the towers upon assailants, and
+then his attention was taken by one of the great black ravens, flapping
+its way along over the dale, and he watched it till it seemed to him to
+slide down toward the cliff, a quarter of a mile away.
+
+By-and-by he saw another great bird, and thought it the same, but
+directly after, the first one reappeared, and he saw the pair cross in
+the air.
+
+"They've got a nest, and it must be on the High Cliff.  Wonder whether I
+could hit one of the great thieves with a crossbow-bolt.  Be practice,"
+he thought; "I may have to shoot at two-legged thieves."
+
+Then the absurdity of his words came to him, and he laughed aloud.
+
+"Well, ravens have only two legs.  Rather horrible, though, to shoot at
+a man.  Well, I don't want to, but if they come and attack us, I'll
+shoot, that I will.  What are those great birds flying to and fro for?
+and, yes, now they're going round and round.  I know: a young lamb must
+have gone over the cliff, and be bleating on one of the ledges because
+it cannot get up.  Poor little wretch!  They'll pick its eyes out.  I'll
+go and see.  Better get a crossbow first.  Might get a shot at one of
+the ravens.--Bother! it's such a way to go and fetch it; and if I did,
+I'll be bound to say it would want a new string, and it would take ever
+so long to get ready.  Bother! it's hot, and I shan't go.  Perhaps there
+isn't a lamb there, after all.  Fancy."
+
+He rested his head upon his hand, and watched the far-off ravens,
+becoming more and more convinced that a lamb had gone over.
+
+"Then why don't they go at it?" he muttered.  "Perhaps it's a sheep, and
+they're afraid to attack.  Must be something there, or they wouldn't
+keep on flying to and fro like that.  Well; bother!  I don't care.
+Sheep and lambs ought to know better."
+
+He tried to take his thoughts back to the castle and its defensive
+powers, if the Edens, strengthened by the gang of mercenaries, should
+attack them, but it was too hard work to think of the imaginary, when
+the real was before him in the shape of a pair of great black ravens,
+flying round and round, and showing plainly against the great grey
+crags, threatening from moment to moment to attack something down below.
+
+"Here, I must go and see what there is to make them fly about like
+that," said the lad to himself, at last, his curiosity getting the
+better of his laziness; and, springing up, he began to descend the
+slope, making a circuit, so as to reach the high cliff, away from the
+precipice, and ascend where he could do so, unseen by the birds.
+
+But before he was half-way down, he caught sight of the two men coming
+in his direction rapidly; and as soon as they caught sight of him, they
+began to gesticulate, beckoning, waving their caps, and generally
+indicating that he was to hurry to their side.
+
+"Oh, you idle beauties!" muttered Ralph.  "I should like to give you a
+lesson.  Spoiled by father's indulgence, you do just as you like.  I'm
+to run to you, am I?  Come here, you lazy dogs!"
+
+He waved his hand to them in turn, but instead of coming on, they
+stopped short, and pointed back toward the highest part of the cliff.
+
+"Come here!" roared Ralph, though he knew that they were quite out of
+hearing.  "You won't come, won't you?  Oh, don't I wish I was behind you
+with my riding-boots on!  I'd give you such a kicking, or use the spurs.
+Come here!" he roared.  "I want to send one of them for a crossbow.
+Well, I don't like doing it, my fine fellows, but if you won't move, I
+must.  One of you will have to go, though, and walk all the farther.
+That's it.  I'm right," he continued to himself, as he saw the men keep
+on pointing upwards.  "Why, what's the matter with them?  Dancing about
+like that, and slapping their legs.  Stop a moment: went up the side gap
+to chip out stones for Minnie.  Why--yes--no--oh! hang the ravens!
+they've hit upon a vein of rich lead, and we shall be as rich as the
+Edens."
+
+Ralph set off at a trot down the slope, and this seemed to have an
+effect upon the two men, who now began to run, with the result that they
+were bound to meet at the bottom of the hollow between the two
+eminences.
+
+"Come on, Master Ralph!" roared Nick Garth, as they came within hearing.
+
+"What is it?  Found lead?"
+
+"Lead, sir, no, better than that.  There's a raven's nest over the other
+side yonder."
+
+"Bah!  What of that?" cried the lad breathlessly.  "Here, Ram, go back
+to the castle, and get me a good crossbow and some bolts."
+
+"Going to shoot 'em, master?" cried Nick excitedly.  "Well done, you!"
+
+"If I can hit them," said the lad.  "What have they found there--a
+lamb?"
+
+"Lamb?" cried Nick.  "Hor, hor, hoh!  You are a rum one, sir.  Lamb, eh?
+I call un a wolf cub."
+
+"Wolf cub?  Oh!" cried Ralph excitedly; and the disappointment about the
+lead was forgotten, the crossbow too.
+
+"Come on, sir, this way.  Right atop, and you'll be able to look down on
+un just above the big birds' nest.  He was after the young birds."
+
+"Then that accounts for the ravens flying about so."
+
+"Yes, sir, that's it.  We was getting close to the stone quarry, when
+Ram, he says: `What's them there birds scrawking about like that there
+for?' he says."
+
+"Summut arter the young uns," I says: "and we went to where we could
+look, and there was a young wolf cub, getting slowly down.  Let's fetch
+the young squire," I says; "and we come after you, for I thought you'd
+like to have the killing on him."
+
+"Yes, of course, Nick; but I have no bow.  I can't reach him with my
+sword, can I?"
+
+"Tchah! you'd want a lot o' pikes tied together, and then you wouldn't
+do it.  I'll show you.  There's plenty of big bits o' stone up yonder,
+and you can drop 'em on his head, and send him down into the water."
+
+"Yes," cried Ralph breathlessly, as he climbed the steep ascent; "but I
+should like to catch him alive, and keep him in a cage."
+
+"Would you, sir?  Well, that wouldn't be amiss.  Sir Morton would like
+to see him, and you could tease him.  Down in one o' the dungeons would
+be the place, till you got tired on him, and you could kill him then."
+
+"Yes, but to think of his being on the cliff here!"
+
+"Ay, it do seem a game," said the man, chuckling, and showing some ugly
+yellow teeth.
+
+As they reached about half-way up, they caught sight of one of the
+ravens, shooting high above the top of the cliff, and instead of darting
+away at their approach, it only made a circle round, and then descended
+like an arrow.
+
+"Tackling on him," cried Ram Jennings.
+
+"Ay, and there goes the other," cried Nick.  "Come on, master, or
+they'll finish him off before you can get there.  Real wild, they birds
+is, because he's meddling with their booblins.  'Bout half-fledged,
+that's what they be."
+
+"Make haste, then," cried Ralph; and as they hurried on as fast as the
+steep ascent would allow, they saw the ravens rise and stoop, again and
+again.  Then only one reappeared, and a few moments later, neither.
+
+"We shall be too late," cried Ralph excitedly.  "They must have killed
+him, and are now tearing his eyes out."
+
+"And sarve him right," cried Nick savagely.  "What does he do on our
+cliff, a-maddling wi' our birds?"
+
+"But it would be such a pity not to take him alive, Nick," panted Ralph
+breathlessly.
+
+"How were you going to catch him alive?" growled the man.  "Wouldn't
+catch us going down to fight un, and you wouldn't like to crawl down
+there."
+
+"Get a rope with a loop, noose him, and drag him up," cried Ralph.
+
+"Eh?  Hear him, Ram?  Who'd ha' thought of that?  Comes o' larning, that
+does, and going away to school.  You'd never ha' thought on it, lad."
+
+"Nay, I shouldn't ha' thought o' that," said Ram heavily; "but I've been
+thinking o' somethin' else."
+
+"What?" said Ralph, as they were mounting the last fifty feet of the
+steep slope.
+
+"As like enough he's nipped they two birds, and we'd best look out, or
+he'll come sudden-like over the edge there, and run for it."
+
+"Forward, then, quick!" cried Ralph; and pressing on, he threw himself
+on his breast, and crawled the last few feet, so as to thrust his head
+over the edge and gaze down, to see the so-called wolf's cub sheathe his
+sword, and prepare to get the young ravens out of their nesting recess
+in the face of the cliff.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER SEVEN.
+
+THE YOUNG ENEMIES.
+
+Eden recovered his presence of mind on the instant, and looking coolly
+up at Nick Garth, who had shouted at him so insolently, he replied
+haughtily: "What is it to you, sir?  Be off!"
+
+Then, entirely ignoring Ralph, who was looking down, breathless with
+rage and exertion, he carefully withdrew the egg from the nest, in spite
+of the pecking of the young ravens, and transferred it to the lining of
+his cap.
+
+After this he took off his kerchief, and began to twist it up tightly to
+make an apology for a line with which to tie together the young ravens'
+legs.
+
+The two men on either side of Ralph looked at him, as if wondering what
+he would say.
+
+"Now, then, it's of no use to peck: out you come, my fine fellows.
+Quiet, or I'll wring your necks."
+
+As Mark spoke, his right hand was in the nest, feeling about so as to
+get four legs together in his grasp, but this took some little time, and
+a great deal of fluttering and squealing accompanied the act.  But as he
+worked, Mark thought hard, and of something else beside ravens.  How was
+he to get out of this unpleasant fix, being as he was quite at his
+enemy's mercy?  But all the same, with assumed nonchalance, he drew out
+the fluttering ravens, loosened his hold of the shrub with his left
+hand, and trusted to his powers of retaining his balance, in spite of
+the birds' struggles, while in the coolest way possible he transferred
+the legs from his right hand to his left, and proceeded to tie them
+tightly.
+
+"There you are," he said.  "I think that's safe."
+
+Then, to Ralph's astonishment, the lad began to hum over his song again
+about the ravens as, completely ignoring those above, he took hold of
+the bush again, and leaned forward to gaze down into the dizzy depths as
+if in search of an easy path, but really to try and make out, in his
+despair, what would be his chance of escape if he suddenly rose to his
+feet and boldly jumped outward.  Would he clear all the trees and come
+down into the river?  And if the last, would it be deep enough to save
+him from injury at the bottom?
+
+Where he had crossed was only ankle deep, but there was a broad, still
+patch, close up under the cliff, for he had noticed it as he came; but
+whether he could reach it in a bold leap, and whether it would be deep
+enough to save him from harm, he could not tell; but he was afraid that
+if he missed it he would be broken upon the pieces of rock which had
+fallen from above.
+
+That way of escape was too desperate, and the more repellent from the
+fact that the beech-trees below prevented him from seeing what awaited
+him.
+
+He busied himself in pretending to examine the knot he had made about
+the birds' legs, and then, raising his sword-belt, he passed one young
+raven inside, leaving the other out, so that they hung from his back,
+not in a very comfortable position for them, but where they would not be
+hurt.  All the time though the lad was scanning the rocky face, first to
+right then to left, to seek for a way by which he could climb down,
+escape upwards being impossible; and he had quickly come to the
+conclusion that if unmolested he could manage, by taking his time, to
+get down in safety.
+
+He had just decided this when Ralph, who had remained perfectly silent,
+exclaimed abruptly, "Now then, come up."
+
+Mark took not the slightest notice, and the order was repeated.
+
+"Hear what the young master says?" growled Nick.  "Come up!"
+
+"Are you speaking to me, fellow?" cried Mark angrily.  "Be off, I tell
+you, before I come up and chastise you."
+
+"Going to stand this, Master Ralph?" growled the man.  "Shall I heave a
+bit o' stone down upon him, and knock him off?"
+
+For answer, Ralph drew back out of sight, and the two men followed at a
+sign, leaving Mark alone, seated upon his perilous perch; but directly
+after Ralph's head reappeared, and Nick's close beside it, when Mark
+realised--rightly--that the other man had been sent on some mission--
+what, he could not tell, but in all probability to fetch more help, so
+as to be sure of taking him.
+
+"Now," said Ralph sternly, "are you coming up to surrender?"
+
+"What!" said Mark sharply; "why am I to surrender to you?"
+
+"For trespass and robbery.  This is my father's land, and those are our
+birds."
+
+Mark laughed scornfully to hide his annoyance, for conscience pricked
+hard.
+
+"Your land, indeed!" he cried.  "Wild moorland, open to anybody; and as
+to the birds, are all the crows yours too?"
+
+Ralph did not condescend to reply, but lay there looking down at the
+young representative of his father's rival.
+
+"I wish you good day, Master Owner of the land, and lord of the birds of
+the air," said Mark mockingly.  "If you had asked me civilly, I might
+perhaps have given you a young raven.  As it is, I shall not."
+
+"What are you going to do?" said Ralph sharply.  "Wait and see," was the
+mocking reply.  "Shan't I heave this stone down on his head, Master
+Ralph?" said Nick in a low tone; but the words came plainly to Mark's
+ear, and sent a cold chill of horror thrilling through his nerves; but
+he felt better the next moment, and then anger took the place of dread,
+for Ralph said sharply, "Put the stone down, sirrah!  You know I want to
+take the wolf's cub alive."
+
+"Wolf's cub!" said Mark to himself.  "Never mind; I may meet him some
+day when it is not three to one, and then he shall find that the wolf's
+cub can bite."
+
+Then, conscious that his every movement was watched, he cautiously rose
+to his feet, made an effort to ignore the presence of lookers-on, and
+began to climb sideways along the ledge, by the route he had come.
+Still he had no intention of going up, knowing full well that he would
+only be giving himself up to insult, and perhaps serious injury, taken
+at a disadvantage, as he felt that he must be; but calmly, and in the
+most sure-footed way, sidled along, with the ledge getting more and more
+narrow, but the hand-hold better.
+
+In this way he passed the spot where he had lowered himself down, and
+reached a slight angle, by which he expected, from long experience in
+cliff-climbing, to be able to descend to the next.
+
+He was quite right, and it proved to be easier than he had expected; but
+a looker-on would have shuddered to see the way in which the lad clung
+to the rough stones, where the slightest slip would have sent him down
+headlong for at least three hundred feet before he touched anywhere, and
+then bounded off again, a mere mass of shapeless flesh.
+
+Mark knew of his danger, but it did not trouble him, for his brain was
+too much occupied by the presence of young Darley; and as he descended
+he felt a slight flush of pride in doing what he was certain his young
+enemy dare not attempt.
+
+In a moment or two he was standing safely--that is, so long as he held
+on tightly with his fingers in the crack above--upon the next ledge, a
+few inches wide, and his intention had been to go on in the same
+direction, so as to be farther from his watchers; but he was not long in
+finding that this was impossible, and he had to go back till he was well
+beneath Ralph Darley, and saw that he must go farther still before he
+attempted to descend to the next rest for his feet.
+
+"It will take a long time to get down like this," he thought; "and
+perhaps he'll send below to meet me at the bottom.  Perhaps that is what
+he has already done.  But never mind; I shall have done as I liked, and
+not obeyed his insolent orders.  Let him see, too, that I'm quite at
+home on the rocks, and can do as I like.  Wonder whether I shall get
+Master Rayburn's egg down safely!  Not if they throw a stone down upon
+my head.--Now for it."
+
+He had reached another comparatively easy place for descending from the
+course of blocks on which he stood, when he suddenly found himself
+embarrassed, not by the egg, but by the young birds, which nearly upset
+his equilibrium by beginning all at once to struggle and flap vigorously
+with their half-fledged wings.
+
+The lad's first impulse, as he clung to the ledge, was to tear the birds
+from his belt and throw them down; but his spirit revolted from the
+cruelty of the proceeding, and his vanity helped to keep the trophies of
+his daring where they were.
+
+"It would look as if I was afraid," he said to himself; and lowering one
+foot, he felt for a safe projection, found one, and his other foot
+joined the first.  A few seconds later his hands were holding the ledge
+on which he had just been standing, but his chin was level with them,
+and his feet were feeling for the next ledge below, but feeling in vain.
+
+He was disappointed, for experience had taught him that this course of
+stones would be about the same thickness as the others, and yet he could
+find no crack, not even one big enough to insert his toes.
+
+But he was quite right; the range of stones in that stratum was just
+about the same thickness as the others, but the crack between them and
+the next in the series, the merest line, over which his feet slipped
+again and again, giving him the impression that they were passing over
+solid stone; and the birds chose this awkward moment to renew their
+struggling and screaming.
+
+"You miserable little wretches," he muttered; "be quiet!  Well, it might
+be worse.  I should have been in a sad pickle if the old birds had
+chosen this moment to attack me."
+
+He hung in the same position, with his chin resting on the ledge, as
+well as his hands, till the birds were quiet again, and then wondering
+whether Ralph Darley was still watching, he slowly let his muscles
+relax, and his body subside, till he hung at full stretch, seeking
+steadily the while for foot-hold, but finding none, and forced now to
+look down between his chest and the rock, to see how far the next ledge
+might be.
+
+To his disgust, it was quite two feet lower, and it was forced upon him
+that unless he could climb back to the ledge upon which his hands were
+clasped, he must let himself drop to the resting-place below.
+
+It was no time for hesitation, and condensing his energies upon what he
+knew to be a difficult task, he drew himself up by strong muscular
+contraction till his chin once more rested between his hands, and then
+grasped the bitter fact that to get up and stand upon the ledge was
+impossible; it was too narrow, and he could find no foot-hold to help.
+
+Accepting the position, he let himself sink again to the full length of
+his arms, hung motionless for a few moments, and then, keeping himself
+perfectly rigid, allowed his fingers to glide over the stone, and
+dropped the two feet to the ledge below, perfectly upright and firm.  In
+all probability he would have found hand-hold the next moment, but,
+scared anew by the rush through the air, the young ravens began to flap
+their wings violently, and that was sufficient to disturb the lad's
+equilibrium.  He made a desperate effort to recover it, but one foot
+gave way, and he fell, scraping the edge.
+
+Another desperate effort, and he clung to the ledge for a brief moment
+or two, and then a yell arose from above, as he went down a few feet and
+felt what seemed a violent blow against his side.  The next instant his
+hands had closed upon the tough stem of a stunted yew, and he was
+hanging there, hitched in the little branches, saved from falling
+farther, but unable to move from the fear of tearing the shrub from its
+root-hold in a crack of the cliff, where there was not a trace of
+anything else to which he could cling.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER EIGHT.
+
+HOW RALPH SECURED THE WOLF'S CUB.
+
+The perspiration broke out in great drops upon Mark Eden's face; and for
+some minutes he hung there, expecting moment by moment that each was his
+last, for he knew that he could do nothing, and that he must not stir
+hand or foot.
+
+And now he began to realise how mad his attempt had been.  Better far
+that he had resigned himself to circumstances, and climbed back to the
+top.  But even then he felt he could not have done this.  It would have
+been like humbling himself to an enemy of his house, and a flush of
+pride came into his pallid cheeks as he felt that he had boldly played
+his part.  Then a sense of misery and despair crept over him as he
+thought of home, of his father and sister, and their sorrow when they
+knew of his fate.
+
+All that passed off, and a flush of anger and indignation made his
+temples throb, for he distinctly heard Nick Garth say,--
+
+"Why not?  Heave it down yourself, then, and put him out of his misery."
+
+What else was said he could not make out; voices were in hurried
+converse evidently a short distance back from the edge of the cliff, and
+then Mark recognised Ralph's tones, as he said huskily,--
+
+"Can you hold on?"
+
+A bitter defiant taunt came to Mark's lips, and he cried,--
+
+"Your doing, coward!  Are you satisfied with your work?"
+
+There was no answer, but the hurried murmur came over the edge of the
+cliff again, followed by what sounded like angry commands, and then all
+was silent for a few moments.
+
+"Don't move," cried Ralph then.  "I've sent for help.  They've gone for
+ropes.  One will be here directly.  I sent for it before.  Can you hold
+on?"
+
+Mark made no reply, for no words would come.  Hope had sprung up at the
+possibility of escape, for life seemed then to be very sweet, but there
+was a bitterness to dull the bright thought, for the lad felt that it
+was the hated enemy of his house who was trying to help.
+
+Then a dull feeling of apathy, as if he had been half stunned, came over
+him as he hung there in a terribly cramped position, with his face
+pressed against the wall.
+
+And now, as if his hearing had become sharpened, the murmur of the
+rushing river came up quite loudly, and the wind seemed to be gathering
+force, while all this was, as it were, preparatory to his falling
+headlong down.  Then he must have lost his senses for some little time,
+for the next thing he heard was a voice crying out, in tones full of
+despair,--
+
+"Too short, too short, Ram!"
+
+"Ay, so it be.  Good ten foot."
+
+"Could I help him if you lowered me down?"
+
+"Lower you down?  Are you mad?  I couldn't hold you; and you'd break
+your neck."
+
+Mark heard every word now, for his senses had suddenly recovered their
+tone and something more.
+
+Then what seemed to be another long space of time elapsed, and Ralph
+shouted to him,--
+
+"This rope is too short, but there'll be another here soon."
+
+Mark could make no reply, and he hung there, listening to the murmur of
+voices once more.  Then the rush of the river sounded like the distant
+boom of thunder.  There was a loud _cizz_, _cizz_, going on somewhere on
+the cliff face from a cricket, and the birds were singing more loudly
+than he ever remembered to have heard them before.
+
+Once more his senses must have left him and come back, for he heard the
+voice above louder than ever, followed by Ralph shouting,--
+
+"Can you tie the rope round you?"
+
+Mark could not answer for some little time; then his lips parted, and he
+gasped out the one word,--
+
+"No."
+
+A sharp rustling followed, as of a rope being rapidly drawn up.  Then it
+was lowered again; and as Mark strained his eyes round into the left
+corners to get a glimpse, he saw a loop swinging to and fro, and it
+struck him again and again; but those who lowered it, in the hope of
+noosing the lad and drawing him up, soon found that the bush and the
+sufferer's position precluded this.
+
+"Can you push your arms through the loop, and hang on?" cried Ralph now.
+
+"No," was the discouraging reply, for Mark fully realised the fact that
+if he loosened his desperate hold for a moment he must fall.
+
+"Haul up!" shouted Ralph.  "Quick!"
+
+The rope rattled and scraped again; and then, as Mark hung there,
+half-insensible, he heard what sounded like quarrelling.
+
+"You shan't go, Master Ralph.  Who's to meet Sir Morton if you get a
+fall trying to save a thing like that?"
+
+Even in his half-insensible state Mark felt a quiver run through him;
+and then he lay listening again, as if to hear what was taking place
+about some one else.
+
+"Silence!" came to his ear.  "How dare you, sir!  Now, all of you lower
+me down."
+
+There was a rustling and scraping directly after, which seemed to last a
+long time, before something brushed against the listener, and he
+quivered, for he felt that he was going.  Then there was a panting
+noise, which came up, as it were, out of the darkness, and he was
+clutched tightly, hot breath came upon his cheek, and a hoarse voice
+yelled in his ear,--
+
+"Got him!  Haul up steadily!" and directly after, the voice became a
+whisper, which said,--
+
+"Pray God the rope may not break."
+
+Mark was conscious now of being scraped against the rock, and brushed by
+twigs, for what seemed to be a very long time, before he was roughly
+seized by more hands, and dragged heavily over the cliff edge, to be
+dropped upon the short grass, as a voice he had heard before cried
+harshly,--
+
+"You've done it now, Master Ralph, and got your wolf cub after all."
+
+"Yes," panted Ralph hoarsely, as Mark felt as if a cloud had suddenly
+rolled away from his sight, and he saw clearly that half-a-dozen men
+were surrounding him, and Ralph Darley, his greatest enemy, was kneeling
+at his side, saying softly,--
+
+"Yes, I've got the wolf cub after all;" and then the two lads' eyes met,
+and gazed deeply into each other's in a curious stare.
+
+That stare had the same effect on both lads--that of making them feel
+uncomfortable.
+
+Mark Eden, as he recovered from the shock of being so near a terrible
+ending to his young life, felt that, surrounded as he was by enemies, he
+ought to spring to his feet, draw his sword, and defend himself to the
+last; while Ralph Darley knew that, according to all old family
+traditions, he ought to order his men to seize a hand and foot each,
+give his young enemy two or three swings, and launch him headlong off
+the mighty cliff, and then stand and laugh at the capers he would cut in
+his fall.
+
+For people had been very savage in their revenges out in that wild part
+of England, shut away from the civilisation of the time by moor and
+mountain.  Ralph knew, too, that though they were better then than in
+the early days of the Wars of the Roses, they were still brutal enough,
+and that he would gain the applause and respect of his men by giving
+them the order.  But Mark Eden had not drawn his sword to begin cutting
+and thrusting; and instead of leaving the lad to hang till he fell, he,
+Ralph Darley, had, in opposition to his father's men, risked his own
+life to save that of his enemy--going down over a hundred feet, swinging
+at the end of a couple of ropes badly tied together.
+
+"Seems very stupid," the two lads thought.
+
+"What does he mean by coming here, and getting into such a horrible
+position--an idiot!" said Ralph to himself.
+
+"How dare he, an insolent Darley, come down by a rope and save my life!"
+said Mark to himself.
+
+Then there was an awkward pause, with the two lads scowling, and
+avoiding each other's gaze, and the men nudging one another, and winking
+knowingly.  Nick Garth whispering behind his hand to Ram Jennings, that
+the young cocks would set up their hackles directly, whip out their
+spurs, and there would be a fight; and, in expectation of this, the men,
+six in number, now spread themselves into an arc, whose chord was the
+edge of the cliff, thus enclosing the pair so as to check any design on
+the part of the enemy to make a rush and escape.
+
+Mark, who did not feel so breathless and numb now, sat up on the grass,
+and resumed his old role of ignoring his enemies, putting his hands
+behind him, to feel for the ravens hung from his sword-belt, taking them
+out from their awkward position, to find that they were limp and
+literally crushed.  The reason for this was that when Ralph, as he
+swung, seized him, he had to do this from behind, clasping him round the
+chest, just under the arms, and then, as the rope was hauled, flinging
+his legs about him to help to hold, with the consequence that they
+formed a sort of sandwich, he and Mark being the slices of bread, and
+the young ravens the meat.
+
+"Hah!" said Mark softly, as if to himself; "you two will never dig out
+any young lambs' eyes.  Feed the fishes instead;" and, rising to his
+feet, he untied his kerchief from about the dead birds' legs, and gave
+each a swing, sending it on its first and last flight, out from the
+cliff edge, away into the gulf.
+
+"Now's your time, Master Ralph," whispered Nick, "Whip out your sword,
+and show him how you can fight."
+
+Ralph turned upon the man with an angry glance, and Nick shrank back
+into his old position with a sheepish grin, which, in conjunction with
+his cross eyes, did not improve his personal appearance.
+
+Without so much as glancing at his enemies, Mark now took off his cap
+and smiled, for the egg he had so carefully placed in the lining was
+intact.
+
+"Well done!" he said aloud.  "That's for Master Rayburn at the cottage.
+Here, one of you fellows, take that to him, and say I sent it.  I dare
+say he'll give you a coin for your trouble."
+
+Ram Jennings made an awkward shoot forward, and seized the egg.
+
+"Don't break it, clumsy," cried Mark; and then with a quick motion, he
+threw his cap on the grass, took a step or two back toward the edge of
+the cliff, and, quick as lightning, drew his sword.
+
+"There," he cried, with a scornful look at Ralph; "seven of you to one.
+Come on."
+
+A low growl from the men greeted this display, but Ralph did not stir,
+and Mark stood for a moment or two _en garde_.  Then with a bitter laugh
+he continued: "I suppose I must surrender.  You don't draw.  Take my
+sword.  My arm's wrenched, and I can't use it."
+
+As he spoke he threw his sword at Ralph's feet; his enemy picked it up
+by the slight blade, and the men closed in.
+
+This movement sent a flash of anger from their young master's eyes.
+
+"Back," he cried hoarsely.  Then taking a step or two toward Mark, and
+still holding the sword by the blade, he presented the hilt to his
+enemy.  "Take your sword, sir," he said haughtily.  "The Darleys are
+gentlemen, not cowards, to take advantage of one who is down.  That is
+the nearest way back to Black Tor," he continued, pointing.
+
+For a few moments Mark stood gazing at his enemy, with his face flushing
+to his temples; then turning haggard and pale, as a flood of mingled
+sensations rushed through him; shame, mortification, pride, anger
+against self, seemed to choke all utterance, and he could not even stir.
+He felt that he wanted to be brave and manly, and apologise for his
+words--to thank the gallant lad before him for saving his life--to make
+him see that he was a gentleman--to strike him and make him fight--to do
+something brave--despicable--to do he did not know what--before he
+accepted this permission to go, but he could for the moment do nothing--
+say nothing.
+
+At last, with a hoarse gasp, he literally snatched at the sword, and
+glared at his enemy with a menacing look, as if he were about to thrust
+at him; and Ralph's hand darted to his own hilt, but with an angry
+gesture, he let it fall, and stood firm.
+
+Then a cry, mingled of rage and shame, escaped from Mark; and he thrust
+his sword back into its sheath, and pushing Nick aside, as the man stood
+in his way, he hurried down the hill.
+
+"Yah-h-ah!" growled Nick savagely, "you aren't going to let him off like
+that, master?"
+
+Mark heard the words, and turned round.
+
+"How dare you speak to me like that!" cried Ralph, glad of some one on
+whom to vent the anger he felt.
+
+"Because Sir Morton, if he'd been here, would have had that young Eden
+tied neck and heels, and pitched into one of the cells.  Because you're
+a coward, sir.  There!"
+
+"Ah-h-ah!" growled the other men in chorus, as they glared at the lad.
+
+"Then take a coward's blow," cried Ralph; and he struck the man with all
+his might across the face, using the back of his hand.
+
+There was another growl from the men, but no one spoke, and Mark Eden
+turned again, and strode down the hill, while the men untied and coiled
+up the ropes, and slowly followed their young master down the slope, and
+then up once more toward the Castle, Nick Garth shaking his head a good
+deal, and looking puzzled, and a great deal interested in the blood
+which he kept smudging off, first with one hand, and then with the
+other, from his face.
+
+"Here," he cried at last, as Ralph disappeared through the gateway,
+"what's best to stop this here?  I can't go with it all tied up."
+
+"Bucket o' water from the well," said Ram Jennings, grinning.  "Say,
+Nick, he aren't such a coward, arter all."
+
+"No," growled Nick, after a double wipe; "and, for such a little 'un, he
+can hit hard."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER NINE.
+
+ANOTHER TURN OF FORTUNE'S WHEEL.
+
+Master Rayburn received the raven's addled egg, and gave Ram Jennings a
+groat for his trouble, and for telling him all about how it was
+obtained, and what followed, keeping the man, and questioning him a good
+deal, as he smiled and frowned over the task he began at once, that of
+chipping a good-sized hole in one side of the egg, and extracting its
+contents in a little wooden bowl of clean water.
+
+At last, after a great deal of sniffing and shuffling about, the man
+said, "Done with me, Master Rayburn?"
+
+"Yes," said the old man sharply.  "Unless you can tell me any more.  But
+why?"
+
+"Well, master, I'm pretty hard about the smell, and it falls to me to
+clean out the pigsties; and when they've been left a month or two in the
+summer, and got pretty ripe, they aren't so nice as bean-fields in
+bloom, or the young missus's roses in her bit o' garden; but pigsties
+aren't nothing to that there _egg_.  It's enough to pyson a black dog."
+
+"Be off with you, then," said the old man, with a dry chuckle; and as
+soon as he was alone, he threw the foul water away.  "Yes," he muttered,
+"it does smell; but that's a splendid egg, and not stained a bit."
+
+"Hah!" he ejaculated a few minutes later.  "I'd have given something to
+be there.  Brave lads.  True English, to the backbone; but with their
+young minds warped and spoiled by the traditions of this miserable feud.
+Why, it must have been grand," mused the old man, shaking his grey
+locks.  "How I should have liked to see and hear it all!  What a fight
+to master the inborn hatred!  On both sides the evil contending with the
+good; and, according to that man's telling, that boy Mark did not show
+up well.  I don't know, though!  He could not help it.  He had to fight
+the black blood in his veins that has been handed down for generations.
+So young Ralph saved his life, made him prisoner, and set him at liberty
+like a true honest gentleman; and the other had to battle with his
+dislike and bitterness at receiving a favour from his enemy's hands.
+
+"Good Heavens!" he cried aloud.  "Enemy's!  What contemptible worms we
+are, to dare to nurse up such a feeling from father to son, generation
+after generation!  Why, with them it is an hereditary disease.  But who
+knows?  Those two lads may grow up to be friends, and kill the old feud.
+They cannot help respecting each other after such an encounter as that.
+I'll try and get hold of young Darley, and then of Mark; and perhaps I
+may be able to--Bah! you weak-minded, meddlesome old driveller!" he
+cried impetuously.  "You would muddle, and spoil all, when perhaps a
+Higher Hand is at work, as it always is, to make everything tend toward
+the best.
+
+"But I should like to be present, by accident, the next time those two
+lads meet."
+
+The meeting took place before many days had passed.
+
+In the interim Ralph Darley had told his father all that had happened,
+and Sir Morton had frowned, and looked pleased, and frowned again.
+
+"You think I did wrong father," said the lad.
+
+"No, my boy; I think you behaved splendidly; but you see what a
+miserable race those Edens are.  You do good to one of them, a boy of
+your own age, and he is ready to turn and rend you."
+
+"But I did not go on purpose to do good to him, father.  I meant to
+catch him, tie him hand and foot, and bring him here to do what you
+liked with him."
+
+"Never mind: you acted bravely; and he like a roused wolf's cub, as Nick
+Garth called him."
+
+"Felt humbled," said Ralph thoughtfully.
+
+"Yes, my boy.  Well, it's all over; but don't go risking your life again
+for your enemies.  We don't want to quarrel with them unless they force
+it on, and I'm afraid they are going to, for I believe Eden has enlisted
+that gang of ruffians in his service.  I can't hear that they were seen
+to go away."
+
+Mark Eden told his father too, about the incident, and Sir Edward looked
+very grave.
+
+"As the lad was a Darley, matters are different," he said at last, "and
+I don't like your conduct over the matter, Mark.  To begin with--well,
+to go all through the business, you did wrong."
+
+"Yes, father," said the lad bitterly.
+
+"It was not right for you, a young scholar, and a gentleman, to go upon
+their land and invite a quarrel."
+
+"But I wanted the young ravens, father."
+
+"Yes.  And they want my lead-mine; and if young Darley comes to try and
+take it, I hope you'll break his neck."
+
+"Yes, father."
+
+"But you did not come out well, my boy," said Sir Edward irritably.
+"The young cub has some good in him, and he behaved splendidly."
+
+"Yes, father; that made me feel so mad against him, and all the time I
+was feeling as if I would have given anything to shake hands, for he was
+very brave."
+
+"Well, it would have been, if he had not been a Darley."
+
+"And, of course, I could not shake hands and say thank you to a boy like
+him."
+
+"Shake hands--an Eden with a Darley!  Impossible, my boy, impossible.
+There, it's all over, and you must never give them the opportunity of
+insulting you again.  That family has done us endless injury."
+
+"And we've done them a deal, too, father."
+
+"Yes, my boy, as much as ever we could.  I mean in the old days; for I'm
+beginning to think that it's best to let them go their way, if they let
+us go ours."
+
+"Yes, father."
+
+"I wish they lived on the other side of the county, instead of so near.
+But there, promise me that you will not run foul of any of the savages
+again."
+
+"Yes, father, I promise you," said the lad quietly.
+
+"By the way, Mark, you say young Darley had half-a-dozen ruffianly
+fellows with him, and they wanted to stone you, and then throw you off
+the cliff?"
+
+"Yes, father."
+
+"Do you think any of them were part of the rough crew who came here with
+that red-faced captain?"
+
+"I think not, father."
+
+"I'm afraid they went to Sir Morton Darley; so we must be watchful.  Let
+that other trouble drop now, and be careful for the future.  Don't worry
+me now; Rugg wants to see me about the mining accounts.  Keep out of
+mischief, and don't let me hear any more about young Darley."
+
+Mark promised, and went out with the intention of going down the river
+to see old Master Rayburn, and ask him whether he had received the egg.
+But before he had gone far, the memories of the whole business seemed so
+distasteful, and he felt so much annoyed with himself, that he turned
+back.
+
+"He'd make me tell him all about it, and I feel as if I couldn't,"
+muttered the lad.  "It tastes more and more bitter every time I think
+about it, and if Master Rayburn began to ask me questions, he'd get it
+all out of me, for he has such a way of doing it.  I don't believe any
+one could tell him a lie without being found out.  Of course I shouldn't
+tell him one.  No, I won't go.  He'd say that I behaved badly, and I
+don't want to be told, for though I wouldn't own it, I know it better
+than any one could tell me.  Hang the Darleys!  I wish there wasn't one
+on the face of the earth."
+
+So, instead of going to old Master Rayburn's cottage, Mark walked back
+to the Black Tor, and after making up his mind to go down into the
+lead-mine, and chip off bits of spar, he went and talked to his sister,
+and told her, naturally enough, all that had passed.
+
+Mary Eden, who was about a year older, and very like him in feature,
+shuddered a good deal over parts of his narration, and looked tearful
+and pained at the end.
+
+"What's the matter?" he said, rather roughly; "why, you're going to
+cry!"
+
+"I can't help it, Mark," she said sadly.
+
+"Why: what makes you look like that?" said the lad irritably.
+
+"Because--because--" she faltered.
+
+"Well, because--because--" he cried mockingly.
+
+"Because what?"
+
+"Don't be angry with me, dear.  My brother Mark seems as if he behaved
+like a Darley, and that young Darley like my brother Mark."
+
+"Oh!" cried the lad, jumping up in a rage; and he rushed off, in spite
+of an appealing cry from Mary, and went down into the mine after all,
+where he met Dummy Rugg, old Dan's son, and went for a ramble in the
+very lowest and grimmest parts, feeling as if to get away from the light
+of day would do him good, for his sister's words had struck very deeply
+into his heart.
+
+It was a gloomy place, that mine, and opened out into strange cavernous
+places, eaten away by water, or by strange crackings and subsidences of
+the earth, in the far distant ages when the boiling springs of the
+volcanic regions were depositing the beds of tufa, here of immense
+thickness, springs which are still in evidence, but no longer to pour
+out waters that scald, but of a gentle lukewarm or tepid temperature,
+which go on depositing their suspended stone to this day, though in a
+feeble, sluggish manner.
+
+Dan Rugg was Sir Edward's chief man over the mine.  Not a gentleman
+superintendent, but a genuine miner, who gave orders, and then helped to
+carry them out.  He had the credit of knowing more about mines than any
+man in the midland counties, knowledge gathered by passing quite half
+his life underground like a mole.
+
+Dummy was his only child, so-called on account of his being a
+particularly silent, stupid-looking boy.  But old Dan said he was not
+such a fool as he looked, and Dan was right.
+
+Dummy hailed his young master's coming with quiet satisfaction, for Mark
+was almost the only being to whom he ever said much; and as soon as he
+saw him come to where he was at work, he walked with him to a chest, and
+took out a flint and steel and a good supply of home-made candles,
+without stopping to ask questions; and then lighting one, he handed it
+to Mark, and led off into the part of the mine where the men were not at
+work.
+
+"Aren't you going to take a candle, Dummy?" said Mark.
+
+"No, master; I can manage."
+
+"I believe you can see in the dark, like a rat or an owl.  Can you?"
+
+"Not very well, Master Mark; but I can see a bit.  Got used to it, I
+s'pose."
+
+"Well, why are you going down there?" asked Mark.
+
+"'Cause I thought you'd like to see the place I found while you were at
+school."
+
+"Ah!  Is it worth seeing?"
+
+"Dunno.  It's big."
+
+"Been dug out?"
+
+"Nay.  It's a big split as goes up ever so far, and goes down ever so
+far.  Chucked bits down; and they were precious long 'fore they hit
+bottom.  There's a place over the other side too, and I clum round to
+it, and it goes in and in, farther than I could stop to go.  Thought I'd
+wait till you came home."
+
+"That's right, Dummy.  We will not go to-day; but start early some
+morning, and take a basket and bottle with us."
+
+"Ay, that's the way.  Water's warm in there, I think."
+
+By degrees, from old acquaintance and real liking for the dull heavy
+lad, who looked up to him as a kind of prince, Mark dropped into telling
+his adventures over the ravens, while they trudged along the black
+passages, with Dummy leading, Mark still carrying the candle, and the
+lad's huge long shadow going first of all.
+
+The miner's son listened without a word, drinking in the broken
+disconnected narrative, as if not a word ought to be lost, and when it
+was ended, breaking out with: "Wish I'd been there."
+
+"I wish you had, Dummy.  But if you had been, what would you have done?"
+
+"I d'know, Master Mark.  I aren't good out in the daylight; but I can
+get along on the cliffs.  I'd ha' come down to you.  I should just like
+to ketch any one heaving stones down upon you.  I wonder that young
+Darley didn't kill you, though, when he'd cotched you.  We should ha'
+killed him, shouldn't us, sir?"
+
+"Don't know, Dummy," said the lad shortly.  "Let's talk about something
+else."
+
+Dummy was silent; and they went on and on till Mark spoke again.
+
+"Well," he said, "found any good bits of spar for Miss Mary?"
+
+"Lots, sir.  One big bit with two points like a shovel handle.  Clear as
+glass."
+
+There was another silence, and then Mark spoke again.
+
+"What's going on?"
+
+"Witches, master."
+
+"Eh?  What?"
+
+"Things comes in the night, and takes lambs, and fowls, and geese."
+
+"You mean thieves."
+
+"Nay, not like thieves, master.  Old Mother Deggins saw 'em the other
+night, and they fluttered and made a noise--great black witches, in long
+petticoats and brooms.  It was a noise like thunder, and a light like
+lightnin', she says, and it knocked her down night afore last; and she
+won't live in the cottage no longer, but come next to ours."
+
+"Somebody tried to frighten her."
+
+"P'r'aps.  Frightened two of our men too.  They was coming back from
+Gatewell over the hills; and they see a light up by Ergles, where there
+aren't no lights, and they crep' up to see what it was, and looked down
+and see a fire, with a lot of old witches in long gowns leaning over it,
+and boiling something in a pot; and they think it's babies."
+
+"Why do they think that?"
+
+"I d'know, master.  Because they thought so, I think.  Then, as they
+were looking, all at once there was a ter'ble squirty noise, and a rush
+like wings; and there was no fire, and nothing to see.  Glad I warn't
+there.  Wouldn't go across the moor by Ergles for anything."
+
+"But you're not afraid to come along here in the dark."
+
+"'Fraid, Master Mark?  No: why should I be?  Nothing to hurt you here."
+
+"You're a queer fellow, Dummy," said Mark.
+
+"Yes, master.  That's what father says.  I s'pose it's through being so
+much in the mine."
+
+"I suppose so.  But you don't mind?"
+
+"Mind, Master Mark?  I like it.  Wish you was at home more, though.--I
+say--"
+
+"Well?"
+
+"If ever you go to fight the Darleys, take me, Master Mark."
+
+"I shall not go to fight the Darleys, Dummy.  They may come to fight us,
+and if they do, you shall come and help."
+
+"Hah!" ejaculated the rough-looking boy.  "I'm pretty strong now.  If
+they come and meddle with us, do you know what I should like to do,
+Master Mark."
+
+"No: hammer them, I suppose."
+
+"Nay; I should like to drive 'em all down to the place I'm going to show
+you."
+
+"Well, where is it?"
+
+"Oh, ever so far yet.  'N'our away."
+
+Mark whistled in surprise.
+
+"Not tired, are you, sir?"
+
+"Tired?  No; but I didn't think you could go so far."
+
+"Oh yes, you can, sir, if you don't mind crawling a bit now and then.
+You can go miles and miles where the stone's split apart.  I think it's
+all cracks under the hills."
+
+"On you go, then; but don't you want a candle?"
+
+"No, sir; I can see best like this, with you holding the light behind."
+
+Mark relapsed into silence, and his guide remained silent too, and went
+on and on, along passages formed by the busy miners of the past, in
+following the lode of lead, and along ways that were nature's work.
+
+At last, fully an hour after Dummy had announced how far they had to go,
+he stopped short, took a candle, lit it, and looked smilingly at Mark,
+who gazed round the natural cavern in which they were, and then turned
+to his guide.
+
+"Well," he said, "is this it?  Not much of a place.  I thought you said
+it went farther."
+
+"So it does, Master Mark.  Shut your eyes while you count a hundred."
+
+Mark obeyed, and counted his hundred aloud, opened his eyes again, and
+he was alone.
+
+"Here!  Where are you?" he cried; and he looked about the place, up and
+down, but to all appearances, he was in a _cul de sac_, whose walls were
+dotted with the fossil stems of _pentacrinites_, over which stalagmitic
+petrifaction had gradually formed, looking as if dirty water had run
+over the walls in places, and hardened in the course of time to stone.
+
+"Here, Dummy!  Haven't run back, have you?" shouted Mark, as it occurred
+to him that should the boy have played him a trick, he would have no
+little difficulty in getting back to the part where the men were at
+work.
+
+But there was no occasion for so loud a cry; the words had hardly passed
+his lips when a hand holding a candle suddenly appeared against the wall
+in front, and upon stepping to it, he found that the sheet of stalagmite
+there, instead of touching the wall, was a foot away, leaving room for
+any one to creep up a steep slope for thirty or forty feet, and continue
+the way through a long crevice, whose sides looked as if they might have
+separated only a few hours before.
+
+"This is the way," said Dummy, and he led on for a quarter of an hour
+longer, with a peculiar rushing noise growing louder, till it became a
+heavy dull roar, as the narrow crack through which they had passed
+suddenly opened out into a vast cavity which, below the ledge on which
+they stood, ended in gloom, and whose roof was lost in the same
+blackness; but the echoes of the falling water below told them that it
+must be far enough above their heads.
+
+"What a horrible hole!" cried Mark.
+
+"Yes; big," said Dummy.  "Look: I climbed along there.  It's easy; and
+then you can go right on, above where the water comes in.  It's warm in
+here."
+
+"Yes, warm enough."
+
+"Shall we go any farther?"
+
+"No, not to-day.  Let's stop and look.  Shall I throw down my candle?"
+
+"No, Master Mark: it's no good.  Goes out too soon.  I'll light a
+match."
+
+He took an old-fashioned brimstone match from his breast, lit both its
+pointed ends, waited till the sulphur was fluttering its blue flame, and
+the splint was getting well alight and blackening, and then he reached
+out and let it fall, to go burning brightly down and down, as if into a
+huge well.  Then it went out, and they seemed for the moment to be in
+darkness.
+
+"I don't think it's very, very deep," said Dummy quietly; "but it's all
+water over yonder.  Seen enough, Master Mark!"
+
+"Yes, for one day.  Let's go back now."
+
+Dummy topped the long wicks with his natural snuffers, to wit, his
+finger and thumb, and led the way back, after Mark had taken a final
+glance at the vast chasm.
+
+"So you found this place out, Dummy?"
+
+"Yes, Master Mark.  I'm always looking for new holes when I've nothing
+to do and the men aren't at work."
+
+"It's of no use: there's no lead."
+
+"No: aren't any ore.  All spar and stones like this."
+
+"Well, we must bring hammers and find some good pieces next time we
+come."
+
+"And go on along by the water, Master Mark?"
+
+"If you like.  Want to find how far it goes?"
+
+"Yes: I want to find how far it goes, master.  Perhaps it opens
+somewhere.  I often think we must come out somewhere on the other side."
+
+"That would be queer," said Mark thoughtfully; "but I don't think my
+father would be pleased.  Seem like making a way for the Darleys to come
+in and attack us."
+
+Dummy stopped short, and turned to stare open-mouthed at his young
+chief.
+
+"What a head you've got, Master Mark," he said.  "I never thought of
+that."
+
+"Didn't you?  Well, you see now: we don't want to find another way in."
+
+"Yes, we do, if there is one, Master Mark, and stop it up."
+
+Very little more was said as they went back, Mark becoming thoughtful,
+and too tired to care about speaking.  But that night he lay in bed
+awake for some time, thinking about the visit to the cavernous mine, and
+how it honeycombed the mountainous place: then about Dummy's witches,
+and the fire and caldron, at the mouth of the hole by Ergles, a mighty
+limestone ridge about three miles away.  Then after a laugh at the easy
+way in which the superstitious country people were alarmed, he fell
+asleep, to begin a troublous dream, which was mixed up in a strangely
+confused way with the great chasm in the mine, down which he had worked
+his way to get at the ravens' nest: and then he started into
+wakefulness, as he was falling down and down, hundreds upon hundreds of
+feet, to find his face wet with perspiration, and that he had been lying
+upon his back.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TEN.
+
+IN A WASP'S NEST.
+
+Days had passed, and strange reports were flying about the sparsely
+inhabited neighbourhood.  Fresh people had seen the witches in their
+long gowns, and it was rumoured that if any one dared to make the
+venture, they might be found crouching over their fire any dark, stormy
+night on the slope of Ergles, where nobody ever went, for it was a
+desolate waste, where a goat might have starved.
+
+The tales grew like snowballs, as they passed from mouth to mouth, but
+for the most part they were very unsubstantial in all points save one,
+and that possessed substance; not only lambs, but sheep, had
+disappeared, and in the case of a miner and his wife, who lived some
+distance off, and who had been away for a week to a wedding beyond the
+mountains, they returned to their solitary cottage to find that it had
+been entered in their absence, and completely stripped of everything
+movable, even to the bed, while the very cabbages in the garden had been
+torn up and carried away.
+
+Mark had the news from the man himself, and he carried it to his father
+and sister, as he had carried Dummy Rugg's rumour about the witches and
+their fire, which went out so suddenly on being seen.
+
+"Humph!" said Sir Edward, smiling; "that looks as if the witches liked
+vegetables with their lamb and mutton.  Stripped the cottage, and took
+the meal-tub too?"
+
+"Everything, father," said Mark.
+
+"Then it's time the men made a search, my boy," said Sir Edward; "we
+must have a robber about.  There is the whole explanation of the old
+women's tales.  Well, they will have to bestir themselves, and catch the
+thief."
+
+It was on that same morning that the news reached Cliff Castle, where
+similar stories had floated about witches and warlocks having taken
+possession of the shivering hills, where the slatey rocks were always
+falling, and forming what the country people called screes, which, at a
+distance, when wet and shiny, looked in the sunshine like cascades
+descending from on high.
+
+"If it comes to any of our sheep being taken, we shall have to take to a
+hunt, Ralph," Sir Morton had said.  "The people like to have a witch or
+two to curdle their blood, but I'm not going to find them in sheep."
+
+It was a glorious morning, and the lad went into the courtyard with his
+sister to have a look at her new fad, as Nick Garth called it, that is
+to say, the well-plastered pool with its surrounding of rock-work, in
+which various plants were beginning to flourish and reflect themselves
+in the crystal water with which the little pond was filled.
+
+"Capital!" cried Ralph; "but you ought to have a few fish in it.  They'd
+look well."
+
+"That is just what I wanted you to say, sir," cried Minnie, clapping her
+hands; "and if you hadn't been such a solemn, serious brother, you would
+have taken your rod and line, and caught me a few."
+
+"Well, I will," said the lad eagerly; "and some for a fry as well.  The
+little ones will be best for you, and I'll take a tin can for them, as
+well as a creel."
+
+An hour later, with a plentiful supply of caddis, caterpillars, and
+other tempting bait, and rod in hand, Ralph descended to the side of the
+stream.  He was not long in following suit with old Master Rayburn as to
+his hose; and then stepping into the water, he began to wade upstream,
+where it was shallow, going on to the bank where it grew deep.
+
+But the day was too bright and the water too clear for his task.  The
+fish saw him, and darted away, and when his keen eyes followed them to
+their lair, they refused to be tempted out by any bait he threw.
+
+"Just my luck when I come fishing," muttered Ralph, as he waded slowly
+on, picking his way among the stones.  "There's always something wrong;
+either it's too hot, or it's too cold, or there's too much water, or
+there isn't enough, or the wind's somewhere in the wrong quarter, or I
+haven't got the right bait; and so sure as I was to meet old Master
+Rayburn, picking flowers on the bank, he'd say: `Ah, you should have
+come yesterday, or last week, and then you'd have caught a fish at every
+throw.'
+
+"Stupid work, fishing," he said, half-aloud, when he had waded as far as
+he could without getting wet, for the water had suddenly deepened and
+curved round out of sight, all calm and still beneath the boughs shading
+it on either side.  "Seems very easy, though, when you watch old
+Rayburn.  He always knows where to throw."
+
+For the moment, he was ready to give up, but feeling that his sister
+would be disappointed if he went back empty-handed, he waded out, and
+taking a short cut across the horseshoe formed by the stream, he reached
+it again beyond the deeps, where it was possible to wade once more; and
+before entering the bubbling waters, he stood looking upward, thinking
+how beautiful it all was, with the flashing water gurgling and swirling
+round the great stones which dotted the bed.  Every here and there the
+sides were glowing with patches of the deep golden, yellow globe-flower;
+a little farther on, there was a deeper spot with a patch of the great
+glistening leaves of the water-lily, not yet in bloom; and as he stepped
+down into the water, there was a flutter from a bird seated on a dead
+twig, and a flash of azure light gleamed over the river, as the
+disturbed kingfisher darted upstream, to be watched till it disappeared.
+
+Flies danced up and down above the water, and every now and then one
+dropped on the surface, with its wings closed, and sailed downward like
+a tiny boat.  Bees swept by with a humming, slumberous sound; and among
+the sedges at the sides, where the golden irises displayed their lovely
+blossoms, the thin-bodied dragon-flies, steel-blue or green, darted on
+transparent wing, pairs every now and then encountering fiercely with a
+faint rustling of wings, and battling for a few seconds, when one would
+dart away with the other in pursuit.
+
+Ralph waded on, catching nothing; but the beauties of the place
+increased, and satisfied him so that he began to forget his mission, and
+paused now to listen to the soft coo of the wood-pigeon in the grove, to
+the quick sharp _tah_! of the jackdaws sailing about high up, where they
+nested in the bare face of the creviced cliffs.  Then on and on again,
+in sunshine or in shade, for quite a couple of hours, fishing in a
+desultory way, but with not the slightest result.  Then his luck turned.
+
+He had been driven ashore several times by the deep water, but always
+returned to the bed of the river where it shallowed, for it was easier
+going than forcing his way amidst the stones, bushes, and trees at the
+side; and now, as he was wading up toward where the water came over a
+ridge in a cascade, a little shoal of half-a-dozen fish darted upward,
+and he followed them, with the water growing more and more shallow, till
+his pulses beat with satisfaction, for a little investigation showed him
+that he would be able to drive the slippery prey right into a broad
+stretch where the water was but an inch or two deep, and dotted
+everywhere with shoals that were nearly dry.
+
+Fishing was out of the question in a place like that, so twisting his
+line round his rod, he used the latter as a walking-staff, and followed
+till the prey he sought were compelled to flap themselves along upon
+their sides; two trout on finding themselves in such straits leaping
+right on to one of the half-dried pebbly shoals.  Here Ralph pounced
+upon one after the other, and transferred them to his creel, after first
+taking out his shoes and hose, which had been reclining there, at rest
+from their ordinary avocation of protecting his feet.
+
+"Queer fishing," muttered the lad; "but I've caught them.  Now for you."
+
+This to the rest of the shoal, which he chased so perseveringly that he
+caught four more by driving them into the shallowest water, the two
+largest succeeding by desperate rushes in getting through the
+treacherous part, and disappearing in the deeps toward the cascade.
+
+"All too big to go in the little can," thought Ralph.  "Never mind; they
+will make a fry.  Perhaps I can catch some smaller ones the same way."
+
+He tied his shoes together by the strings, and fastened them to the
+strap of his creel, tucked his hose through his belt, and went ashore
+again, to make his way beyond the little cascade which fell musically
+over the rocks; and as he was going on by the dammed-up deeps, there was
+suddenly a rush among the sedges and rushes, followed by a splash, the
+lad catching sight of a long, wet, brown body, as the animal made a
+plunge and disappeared in deep water.
+
+The next moment his eyes rested upon the remains of a feast, in the
+shape of a fine trout, half-eaten, evidently quite freshly caught.
+
+"Better fisherman than I am," said Ralph to himself, as he searched the
+surface of the water to see if the otter he had disturbed would rise.
+But the cunning animal had reached its hole in the bank, and was not
+likely to return to its banquet: so Ralph went on beyond the deeps to
+where the river ran shallow again beneath the overhanging trees, just
+catching a glimpse at times of the great cliffs, whose tops often
+resembled the ruins of neglected towers, so regularly were they laid in
+fissured blocks.
+
+Encouraged by his success, though conscious of the fact that it was the
+work of a poacher more than an angler, Ralph was not long in finding a
+suitable place for driving a few more fish.  Fate favoured him in this,
+and in their being just of a suitable size for the little pool, and he
+had just secured one about six inches long, and was filling his little
+can with water, when he was startled by hearing a half-stifled bark
+uttered, as if by a dog whose muzzle was being held.
+
+He looked sharply round, and suddenly woke to the fact that, for how
+long he could not tell, while he had been stalking the trout, he had
+been stalked in turn.
+
+For a man suddenly appeared among the bushes on the right, looked across
+the river, and shouted, "Come on, now."
+
+Three more appeared on the other side, one of whom leaped at once into
+the river, while simultaneously a couple of dogs were let loose, and
+dashed into the shallow water.
+
+"Don't let him go back, lads," shouted the first man.  "Run him up: he
+can't get away."
+
+Ralph was equal to the occasion.  In a sharp glance round, while
+snapping his rod in two where the butt was lashed to the thinner part,
+he saw that his retreat was cut off down the river, and that his only
+chance of escape was to go forward, right and left being sheer wall,
+twenty feet on one side, two hundred, at least, on the other.  He
+grasped, too, the fact that the men about to attack him were evidently
+lead-miners, and the thought flashed upon him that he had inadvertently
+come higher till, after a fashion, he was occupying Mark Eden's
+position, trespassing upon an enemy's ground.
+
+These thoughts were lightning-like, as he swung his rod-butt round, and
+brought it down heavily upon a big mongrel dog that splashed through the
+shallows, knocked it right over, to lie yelping and whining as it tore
+up water and sand, the second dog contenting itself with yapping,
+snarling, and making little charges, till a lucky blow caught it upon
+the leg, and sent it howling back.
+
+This was sufficient for the moment, and Ralph began to retreat, with the
+men following him.
+
+"There," shouted the one who seemed to be the leader.  "It's of no use,
+so you may give in.  We know you, so come out, fish and all.  You
+haven't no right up here."
+
+Ralph made no reply, but flushing with anger and annoyance, he hurried
+on over the shallows, with the men now in full pursuit, shouting, too,
+at the dogs, and urging them to renew their attack.
+
+"What an idiot I have been!" muttered the lad, as he splashed on,
+wishing that he was on open ground, so that he could run; but wishing
+was in vain.  He was unarmed, too, save for the stout ash-butt of his
+spliced rod, and he knew that it would be impossible to defend himself
+with that for long against four strong men, who were apparently only too
+eager to get hold of the heir of the rival house, and drag him before
+their lord.  For that they were Sir Edward Eden's men the lad had not a
+doubt.
+
+But Ralph had little time for thought; action was the thing, and he
+splashed on, glancing from right to left to find a spot where he could
+land and take to his heels--an impossibility there, for he soon saw that
+his only chance was to climb, and that chance was small.
+
+Then, as the men followed some forty yards behind, he saw the light of
+hope.  Not far ahead, the water looked black and still, as it glided
+through a narrow defile, shut in by the rocks.  That meant deep water;
+but if he could reach that, he would have to swim, and the men probably
+would not dare to follow.
+
+Already the shallows were coming to an end, the water reaching to his
+knees; and it was here that, encouraged and bullied into making a fresh
+attack, the dogs overtook him once more, and half swimming, half making
+leaps, they came at him, the bigger avoiding a blow, and seizing him by
+the left, fortunately without hurt, the animal's teeth meeting only in
+the padding of the short breeches of the period; but it held on,
+growling, and shaking its head violently, while its companion, after a
+deal of barking, dashed in on the right.
+
+This time Ralph's aim was surer and quicker, the dog receiving a sharp
+cut across the ear from the butt of the rod, and going down at once, to
+begin howling, and swimming in a circle.
+
+Rid thus of one enemy, the lad proceeded to get rid of the second by a
+very simple plan.  Lowering his left hand, he got hold of the strap
+which formed the dog's collar, and in spite of its struggles and
+worryings, went on as fast as he could go--slowly enough, all the same--
+to where the water deepened; and as it reached his thigh, he bent his
+knees, with the natural result that as the dog held tenaciously to its
+mouthful of cloth and padding, its head was beneath the water.
+
+A few seconds were sufficient to make it quit its hold, and come up
+choking and barking; but in obedience to the urging on of one of the
+men, to pluckily renew the attack.
+
+A sharp crack from the butt knocked all the remaining courage out of its
+head, and it turned, howling, to swim back toward its masters.
+
+"Here, it's no good, young Darley," yelled one of the men.  "You may
+give up now.  We've got you fast."
+
+"And it'll be the worst for you, if you don't.  We have got you now."
+
+"Hold me tight, then," muttered the lad, with a triumphant feeling at
+his chances of escape beginning to make him glow.
+
+"You mustn't go there," shouted another.  "It's woundy deep, and you'll
+get sucked down."
+
+"Come and be sucked down after me," muttered Ralph, as the dogs began
+barking again furiously, but refused to follow and attack, keeping close
+to the men, who were all now in the river, wading slowly, the walls
+having grown too precipitous for them to keep on the sides.
+
+Ralph's progress was slow enough too, for the water had deepened till it
+was above his waist, and the next minute was nearly to his armpits,
+while the river having narrowed now to half its width, the stream though
+deep came faster, and grew harder to stem.
+
+"D'you hear, youngster!" roared the leader.  "You'll be drownded."
+
+"Better that than be caught and dragged up to the Black Tor for that
+wretched boor, Mark Eden, to triumph over me," thought Ralph; and he
+pushed boldly on, forced his way a dozen yards, and then made a step, to
+find no bottom, and going down over his head.
+
+"Told you so," rang in his ears, as he struck out and rose, to find
+himself being borne back; but a few strokes took him to the right side,
+where he snatched at some overhanging ferns rooted in the perpendicular
+wall of rock, checked himself for a few moments, and looked back, to see
+the four men, nearly breast-deep, a dozen yards behind, waiting for him
+to be swept down to their grasp.
+
+"There, give up!" cried another, "for you're drownded.  You don't know
+the waters here, like we do.  Some o' that goes right down into the
+mine."
+
+To the astonishment of the men, who did not dare to venture farther, the
+lad did not surrender, but looked sharply about to try and fully grasp
+his position and his chances of escape.  Ahead the water certainly
+appeared deeper, for it glided on towards him, looking black, oily, and
+marked with sinuous lines.  There was no ripple to indicate a shallow,
+and he could feel, from the pressure against him, that it would be
+impossible to stem it in swimming; while most ominous of all, right in
+the centre, a little way ahead, there was a spot where the water was a
+little depressed.  It kept circling round every now and then, forming a
+funnel-shaped opening about a foot across, showing plainly enough that
+the men were right, and that a portion of the stream passed down there
+into some hole in the rock, to form one of the subterranean courses of
+which there were several in the district, as he knew both where rivulets
+disappeared, and also suddenly gushed out into the light of day.
+
+Ralph grasped then at once that it would be impossible to escape by
+swimming against such a stream; that if he could have done so, there was
+the horrible risk of being sucked down into some awful chasm to instant
+death; that he could not climb up the wall of rock where he hung on
+then; and that, if he let go, he would be borne along in a few moments
+to the men's hands; and then, that he would be bound, and dragged away a
+prisoner, to his shame, and all through trying to get those unfortunate
+fish.
+
+"It's of no use," he muttered despairingly, as he looked above him
+again, and, as he did so, saw that the men were laughing at his
+predicament, for, as Touchstone the clown told the shepherd, he was "in
+a parlous case."
+
+But hope is a fine thing, and gives us rays of light even in the darkest
+places.  Just when Ralph felt most despondent, it occurred to him that
+there was another way out of the difficulty, and he proceeded to put it
+in force by looking straight ahead, along the wall of rock, which ran
+down into the water, and there, just beyond the tuft by which he held
+on, and certainly within reach, was one of the perpendicular cracks
+which divided the stone into blocks.  In an instant he had stretched out
+his left hand, forced it in there, drawn himself along till he could get
+the other hand in, and was safe so far; and to his great joy found, by a
+little searching, that he could find foot-hold, for the horizontal crack
+ran some four feet below the surface, and afforded him sufficient
+standing room, if he could only find something to hold on by above.
+
+For the moment he was safe, but his object was to get along the wall,
+till he could find a place where he could climb the rocky side of the
+river; and once clear of the water, he felt that it would go hard if he
+could not find some way to the top, the more easily from the fact that
+above the steep piece of wall down into the water the trees grew so
+abundantly that a climber would for a certainty find plenty of help.
+
+The men remained motionless in the water, watching in the full
+expectation of seeing the lad swept down to them; but he held fast, and
+once more reaching forward, he strained outward till he caught a tuft of
+grass, crept on along the submerged ledge to that, and from there gained
+a large patch of tough broom.  Then came two or three easy movements
+onward, bringing the fugitive abreast of the sink, which was larger than
+it had appeared from below, and Ralph shuddered as he felt that any one
+who approached the vortex would for a certainty be dragged down.
+
+For a few moments he clung there, the nervous thoughts of what might be
+if he slipped and were caught in the whirlpool being sufficient to half
+paralyse him; then turning angry at his feeling of cowardice, he reached
+boldly out again, found fresh hand-hold, and did the same again and
+again, till he was a dozen yards beyond the sink-hole, and had to stop
+and think.  For the wall was smoother than ever; the stream ran
+stronger; the distance between the two sides being less, it looked
+deeper; and the next place where he could find hand-hold was apparently
+too far to reach.
+
+Still, it was his only chance, and taking fast hold with his right, and
+somehow thinking the while of Mark's passage along the surface of the
+High Cliff, he reached out farther and farther, pressing his breast
+against the rock, edging his feet along, and then stopping at his
+fullest stretch, to find the little root of ivy he aimed at grasping
+still six or seven inches away.
+
+The dead silence preserved by the men below was broken by the barking of
+one of the dogs.  Then all was still again, and Ralph felt that his only
+chance was to steady himself for a moment with his feet, loosen his hold
+with his right hand, and let himself glide along the face of the rock
+forward till his left touched the ivy, and then hold on.
+
+If he missed catching hold--?
+
+"I mustn't think of such a thing," he muttered; and he at once put his
+plan into action, letting himself glide forward.
+
+As a scholar, fresh from a big school, he ought to have been more
+mathematically correct, and known that in describing the arc of a circle
+his left hand would go lower; but he did not stop to think.  The
+consequence was that as his fingers glided over the rough stone, they
+passed a few inches beneath the tough stem he sought to grasp, and once
+in motion, he could not stop himself.  He clutched at the stone with his
+right hand, and his nails scratched over it, as he vainly strove to find
+a prominence or crevice to check him; but all in vain; the pressure of
+the running water on the lower part of his body helped to destroy his
+balance, and with a faint cry, he went headlong into the gliding stream,
+the men simultaneously giving vent to a yell, half of horror, half of
+satisfaction.
+
+"The sink-hole!  Shall I be sucked down?" was the thought that flashed
+across the lad's brain, like a lurid light, as he went under; then he
+struck out vigorously for the side, and as he rose to the surface saw
+that he was being drawn toward the hole where it gaped horribly, and
+closed, and gaped again, a few yards away.
+
+If any boy who reads this cannot swim, let him feel that he is sinning
+against himself, and neglecting a great duty, till he can plunge without
+a trace of nervousness into deep water, and make his way upon the
+surface easily and well.  Fortunately for Ralph Darley, he was quite at
+home in the water, and the strong firm strokes he took were sufficient
+to carry him well in toward the side, so that he passed the little
+whirlpool where its force was weakest; and as the men below closed
+together, and waded a couple of steps to meet him, they had the
+mortification of seeing him clinging to the wall of rock, half-a-dozen
+yards above them, and then creeping forward again, step by step, till he
+reached the point from which he had been swept, and held on there once
+more.
+
+Here, as they watched him curiously, they saw that he remained
+motionless, as if thinking what to do next, as was the case; and coming
+to the conclusion that he must manage somehow to grasp that tuft of ivy,
+he tried again, with the dread of the consequences the less from the
+experience he had gone through.
+
+Coming to the conclusion that the only way was to raise himself upon his
+toes at the last moment, and jerk himself forward, he drew in a deep
+breath, reached out to the utmost, but raised his left hand more, then
+loosened his grasp with his right, and when he thought the moment had
+come, gave a slight bound.
+
+That did it.  He caught at the ivy, his fingers closed upon it tightly,
+and he tried hard to keep his feet upon the ledge below water.  But this
+effort failed, his balance was gone, his feet glided from the ledge, and
+he swung round, holding on to the ivy, which seemed to be giving way at
+its roots.
+
+But as Ralph fell, his hand slipped quite a foot down the ivy, and the
+water took a good deal of his weight, so that, though the strain upon
+the feeble growth was great, it remained firm enough to hold him; and he
+hung half in, half out of the water for some time, afraid to stir, but
+all the time energetically using his eyes, to seek for a way out of his
+perilous position.
+
+He was not long in coming to a decision.  Above the ivy there was one of
+the cracks, and he saw that if he could reach that, he could climb to
+the one above, and from there gain the roots of a gnarled hawthorn,
+whose seed had been dropped in a fissure by a bird generations back, the
+dryness of the position and want of root-food keeping the tree stunted
+and dwarfed.  Once up there, another ten or twelve feet would take him
+to the top of the lower wall, and then he felt that it would go hard if
+he could not climb and hide, or escape up the cliff; so he set to at
+once to try.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER ELEVEN.
+
+RALPH GETS TIT FOR TAT.
+
+Ralph Darley's first step was to get his right hand beside his left, and
+his feet once more upon the ledge, but the ivy gave way a little more at
+this movement, and he paused.  But not for long.  Another danger was at
+hand.
+
+Moved by the boldness of the lad's efforts to escape, and in dread lest
+he might be successful, the leader of the four men, after a short
+consultation with the others, who tried to dissuade him, began to wade
+cautiously forward till the water grew too deep for him, and then
+creeping sidewise, he climbed on to the smooth wall, and began to
+imitate the course taken by Ralph; but before he had gone many yards,
+one of his companions shouted:
+
+"You'll go down, and be swep' away, and sucked in."
+
+This checked him and made him hesitate, but rousing his courage again,
+he once more began to edge along the shelf below the surface, and this
+spurred the fugitive on to make another effort.
+
+This time he caught at the ivy, which gave way a little more, but still
+held, and by moving cautiously, Ralph managed to get his feet upon the
+ledge.  The next minute he had found another prominence below water,
+raised his foot to it, and caught at a rough bit of the stone above the
+ivy, stood firm, drew himself a little higher, and by a quick scramble,
+got a foot now on the ivy stem and his hands in the crack above, just as
+the growth yielded to his foot, dropped into the stream, and was swept
+away, leaving the lad hanging by his cramped fingers.
+
+But though the ivy was gone, the crevice in which it had grown remained,
+and in another few seconds Ralph's toes were in it, and the weight off
+his hands.
+
+He rested, and looked down-stream, to see that the man was steadily
+approaching, but the lad felt safe now.  The ivy was gone, and the enemy
+could not possibly get farther along the ledge than the spot from whence
+he had slipped.
+
+Cheered by this, Ralph began to climb again, finding the task easier,
+and the next minute he had hold of the tough stem of the hawthorn; and
+heedless of the thorns, dragged himself up into it, stood upright,
+reached another good, strong hand-hold, and then stepped right up on to
+a broad shelf of grass-grown limestone.  The men uttered a fierce shout,
+and their leader, seeing now that his task was hopeless, began to retire
+and join his companions.
+
+Ralph watched him for a few moments, and then began to climb again,
+finding this part of the slope easy, for great pieces of stone were
+piled up, and made fast by the bushes which grew amongst them, hiding
+the fugitive from the sight of those below, and raising his hopes as he
+found how easily he could get up.  Twice over he heard shouts and their
+echoes from the opposite side, but he was too busy to heed them, and
+soon felt confident enough to sit down in a niche, half-way up the
+cliff, and rest for a few minutes.
+
+"Horribly wet," he said to himself; "fishing-rod broken and lost,
+fish-can gone, and--ah!  I did not expect that," for he found that
+shoes, hose, and creel were safe.  "Glad I shall take the fish home
+after all."
+
+He listened: all was still.  Then he peered down, but he could see
+nothing save the bushes and trees on the other side; even the river was
+invisible from where he sat; and getting his breath now after his
+exertions, he turned, and began to look upward.
+
+Ralph was born somewhere about three miles from where he sat, but he had
+inadvertently wandered into a part that was perfectly unfamiliar to him,
+the feud between the two families having resulted in its being
+considered dangerous for either side to intrude within the portion of
+the rugged mountainous land belonging to the other.
+
+Still, the lad had some notion of the bearings of the cliff hills from
+seeing them at a distance, and he rapidly came to a conclusion as to
+which would be the best course for him to take to avoid the occupants of
+the Black Tor; but when any one is flurried he is liable to make
+mistakes, and much more likely when deep in a tangle of pathless wood,
+and listening for the steps of those who are seeking to make him a
+prisoner.
+
+According to Ralph's calculations, the narrow gap which led eastward to
+the edge of the huge hollow in which the narrow, roughly conical mass of
+limestone rose crowned with the Eden Castle, lay away to his left; and
+as he had in climbing kept on bearing to the right, he was perfectly
+certain that he had passed right over the men in the river.  He felt,
+therefore, that he had nothing to do but keep steadily on in the same
+course, always mounting higher at every opportunity of doing so unseen,
+until close to the top, when he could keep along the edge unseen till
+well on his way homeward, and then take to the open downs above.
+
+The silence below was encouraging, and in spite of being compelled often
+to creep beneath the bushes, and here and there descend to avoid some
+perpendicular piece of rock, he got on, so that he grew more and more
+satisfied that he had escaped, and had nothing to do but persevere, and
+be well out of what had promised to be a very awkward predicament.  His
+clothes clung to his back, and his legs were terribly scratched, while
+one of his feet was bleeding; but that was a trifle which he hardly
+regarded.
+
+Just before him was a steeper bit than usual, and he hesitated about
+trying to climb it; but the way up or down seemed to promise no better,
+so taking advantage of the dense cover afforded by the trees, he
+steadily attacked the awkward precipice, the dwarf trees helped him with
+their gnarled trunks, and he mastered the ascent, found himself higher
+up than he had expected, crawled a step or two farther, and arrived the
+next minute at the brink of a deep chasm, while to the left, not a
+couple of hundred yards away, rose the castle-crowned Black Tor.
+
+He shrank back the next instant, and a feeling of confusion came over
+him.  He could hardly understand how it was, but directly after it was
+forced upon his understanding that he had been quite wrong in his
+bearings; that when he began to climb, the Black Tor lay to his right
+instead of his left, and that, instead of going into safety, he had been
+making straight for the most dangerous place.
+
+To go on was impossible, for the cliff beneath him was overhanging; to
+go to the left was equally vain; and to descend or return was in all
+probability to walk right into the arms of his pursuers.
+
+Once more he cautiously advanced his head between the bushes to look
+out, but the prospect was not encouraging.  There, fifty or sixty feet
+away, was the fellow cliff to that upon which he lay, split apart by
+some terrible convulsion of nature; and once there he could have made
+for home, but there was no way of passing the opening save by descending
+right to the river's bank, and he felt pretty certain that he could not
+do this without being seen.
+
+Still it was the only course, and his choice was open to him--to lie in
+hiding till the darkness came, many hours later, or boldly descend.
+
+To lie there in the shadow with his wet clothes clinging to him was not
+a pleasant prospect, but it seemed the only one feasible under the
+circumstances; and he concluded that this was what he would do, wishing
+the while that he dared go and lie right out in the sunshine.
+
+He had hardly thought this, when a hot thrill ran through him, for from
+somewhere below there came the sharp bark of a dog, and a voice rose
+cheering the animal on, and then shouted: "Close in, all of you: he's up
+here somewhere.  Dog's got his scent."
+
+Then voices answered with hails from different parts, and Ralph's next
+movement was to crawl forward again to the very edge of the precipice,
+look over, and seek for a place where he might perhaps descend.
+
+But again he saw that it was utterly hopeless, and nerved now by his
+despair, he began to descend through the fringe of scrub oak and beech,
+close to the chasm, so as to get down to the river, where he meant to
+plunge in, and cross by wading or swimming to the other side.
+
+But there is no hiding from the scent of a dog.  Ralph had not gone down
+half-a-dozen yards before the dog gave tongue again, and kept on
+barking, coming nearer and nearer, and more rapidly as the scent grew
+hotter: while before another dozen yards were passed the lad had to
+seize the first block of stone he could lift, and turn at bay, for the
+dog had sighted him and rushed forward, as if to leap at his throat.
+
+There is many a dog, though--perhaps taught by experience--that will
+face a staff, but shrink in the most timid manner from a stone; and it
+was so here.  At the first threatening movement made by Ralph, the dog
+stopped short, barking furiously, and the lad glanced downward once
+more.  But to proceed meant to turn his back upon his four-footed enemy,
+which would have seized him directly.
+
+There was nothing then to be done but face it, and he prepared to hurl
+his missile, but, to the lad's despair, the second dog, which had been
+silent, now rushed up, and he had to keep them both off as he stood at
+bay, the new-comer being more viciously aggressive than the first.
+
+"I can't help it: I must make a dash for freedom," thought Ralph; and,
+raising his stone higher, he hurled it at the bigger dog, which avoided
+it by bounding aside.  Then turning, he dashed downward, right into the
+arms of a man.
+
+There was a sharp struggle, and the latter was getting worsted, being
+lower down, and having to bear the shock of Ralph's weight in the bound,
+but the next moment unexpectedly the lad felt himself seized from
+behind, two more men came panting up, and, utterly mastered, he found
+himself upon his back, with one enemy seated upon his chest, another
+holding his arms outspread, and the others his legs, thoroughly
+spread-eagled upon the sloping rock.
+
+"Got you now," said the leader of the little party.  "You, Tom, we can
+manage him.--Get out, will you, dogs!--Here, take them with you.  Run to
+the mine hut, and get some rope to tie him.  Be as smart as you can.
+The master'll give us something decent for a job like this."
+
+The man addressed called the dogs to him, and was unwillingly obeyed,
+but a few stones thrown by the rest overcame the animals' objections,
+and they trotted off, leaving the prisoner relapsed into a sulky
+silence; his captors chatted pleasantly together about his fate,
+banteringly telling him that for certain he would be hung over the
+castle wall.
+
+Ralph paid no heed to what was said, and after a time the men grew tired
+of their banter, and began to wonder among themselves whether their
+companion would say anything to those whom he might meet.
+
+"He'll like enough be doing it," said the leader.  "I tilled him to
+fetch a rope, and if he does anything else, he'll hear of it from me.
+What we wants is to take our prisoner up proper to the master, and get
+our reward."
+
+Then they began muttering in a low voice among themselves, taking care
+that their prisoner should not hear, as he lay upon his back, staring
+straight up at the blue sky, and thinking of how soon it had come upon
+him to be suffering Mark Eden's reverse.
+
+At last a hail came from below, and the man panted breathlessly up to
+them, throwing down a coil of thin rope, with which, after turning him
+over upon his face, the men, in spite of his struggles, tightly and
+cruelly tied their prisoner's arms behind him, and then his ankles and
+knees.  They were about to lift him up, when there was a sharp barking
+heard again.
+
+"Here, you, Tom," cried the leader, who had been most savage in dragging
+the knots as tightly as possible, "I told you to take those dogs back."
+
+"Well, so I did.  I didn't bring 'em."
+
+"They've come all the same," cried the other.  "Well, it don't matter
+now.  Perhaps Buzz wants a taste of these here naked legs."
+
+The dog barked close at hand now.
+
+"Here, you, jump up, before he has you," cried the leader brutally; and
+then he stared wonderingly, for there was a sharp rustling amongst the
+bushes, and the dog sprang out to them, closely followed by Mark Eden,
+who cried in wonder:
+
+"Why, hallo: then this is what Buzz meant!  Whom have you got there?"
+
+The men drew back, and Mark stooped, as the dog barked violently, turned
+the prisoner over, and once more the two enemies were gazing curiously
+in each other's eyes.
+
+Ralph did not flinch, but a dull feeling of despair ran through him as
+he saw Mark Eden's face light up, his eyes flashing, and a smile of
+triumph playing about his lips.
+
+Mark did not speak for a time.  Then he turned his back upon the
+prisoner.
+
+"Do you know who this is?" he said to the men.
+
+"Oh yes, Master Mark, we know him.  Don't you?  It's young Darley, from
+below there.  We was having a bit of a ramble 'fore going down in the
+mine, and we'd got the dogs, to see if there was any chance of a rabbit
+pie for supper; but they didn't find one; they found his nabbs here
+instead.  We had to hold the dogs' muzzles to keep 'em quiet till he'd
+got by."
+
+"What was he doing?"
+
+"Wading, and ketching our trout.  We let him go right up to the deep
+water, down below where the narrows are, and we thought we'd trapped
+him; but somehow he managed to scramble up the side and get up here, so
+we set the dogs on, and they run him down.  Look here, Master Mark; he'd
+got all these trout.  Fine 'uns too."
+
+The man opened Ralph's creel, and held it out for Mark to see, the lad
+nodding at the sight.
+
+"Know'd where the good uns was."
+
+"And what were you going to do with him?" said Mark quietly.
+
+"We had to ketch him first," said the man, with a savagely stupid grin.
+"And he give us a lot o' trouble, and we thought best thing to do was to
+tie a stone to his neck and pitch him in one of the holes.  But Tom,
+here, said the master wouldn't like it, and seeing he was a Darley,
+might like to make a sample of him, or keep him down in the mine to
+work.  So we tied him tight, and was going to swing him between us, and
+carry him up to the gateway for the master to see.  Then you come."
+
+Mark made no sign of either satisfaction or anger, but stood thinking
+for a minute or so, before turning again to where Ralph lay gazing
+straight up to the sky, waiting for whatever fate might be his, and
+setting his teeth hard in the firm determination to die sooner than ask
+for mercy from the cruel young savage who stood before him with what
+seemed to be a malicious grin upon his face.
+
+And as he lay, Ralph thought of his school life, and all that had passed
+there, and how strange it was that in the wild part of Midland England
+there, amongst the mountains of the Peak, people could still be so
+savage as to be able to follow their own wills to as great an extent as
+did the barons and feudal chiefs of a couple of hundred years before.
+
+Such thoughts as these had never come to him till after he had left home
+for school, to find his level.  Earlier in his boyhood his father had
+appeared to him to be chief or king of the district, with a neighbour
+who was a rival chief or king.  He knew that King James ruled the land;
+but that was England, away from the Peak.  There, Sir Morton Darley,
+knight, was head of all, and the laws of England did not seem to apply
+anywhere there.  Then he had gradually grown more enlightened, and never
+more so than at the present moment, as he lay bound on the mossy stones,
+feeling that unless his father came with a strong enough force to rescue
+him, his fate might even be death.  And the result?  Would the law
+punish the Edens for the deed?  He felt that they would go free.  They
+were to a pretty good extent outlaws, and the deed would never be known
+beyond their district.  The moors and mountains shut them in.  But Sir
+Morton, Ralph felt, would never sit down quietly.  He would for certain
+attack and try to punish the Edens, and the feud would grow more deadly
+than ever.
+
+Thoughts like these ran through his brain as he lay there, till the
+silence was broken by Mark Eden, whose face plainly told of the supreme
+pleasure he felt in seeing his young enemy humbled thus before him.
+
+"Well," he said at last, "are you not going to beg to be set at
+liberty?"
+
+Ralph looked at him defiantly.
+
+"No," he said.
+
+"Want to be taken up to the Tor, and hung from the tower as a scarecrow
+to keep away all the other thieves?"
+
+"What is it to you?" replied Ralph bitterly.
+
+"You came and took our trout," said Mark, with a sneer; and he raised
+his foot as if tempted to plant it upon the prisoner's chest.
+
+"Yes, I came and caught some trout: but I looked upon the river as free
+to me, as you thought our cliff was free to you."
+
+"Hah!" cried Mark triumphantly; "I knew you would begin to beg for your
+life."
+
+"I have not begged," said Ralph coldly.  "You spoke to me and I
+answered."
+
+"Ropes hurt?" said Mark, after a pause, during which he could find
+nothing else to say.
+
+Ralph smiled.
+
+"Look for yourself," he said.  "They don't quite cut to the bone."
+
+"Our mine lads are strong," said Mark proudly.  "Strong enough to beat
+your wretched set of servants if ever they dare come up here."
+
+"So brave and strong that you are glad to hire a gang of ruffianly
+soldiers to help you," said Ralph scornfully.
+
+"What?  Those fellows in rags and rust?  Pooh!  We would not have them."
+
+Ralph opened his eyes a little wider.
+
+"The Edens want no paid help of that kind.  We're strong enough to come
+and take your place whenever we like; but as you won't be there, it will
+not matter to you."
+
+"No," said Ralph, who was sick with pain, and faint from the throbbing
+caused by his bonds.
+
+"But it would be a pity for my father to have you hung as a scarecrow,"
+said Mark mockingly.  "I don't like to see such things about.  What do
+you say to going down to work always in our lead-mine?"
+
+"Nothing," said Ralph coldly.
+
+"Better to live in the dark there, on bread and water, than to be
+killed."
+
+Ralph made no reply, but gazed fixedly in the speaker's eyes.
+
+"Better beg for your life, boy," said Mark, placing his foot now on the
+prisoner's chest.
+
+"What! of you?" cried Ralph.
+
+"Yes: I might make you my lackey, to wait upon me.  That is what the
+Darleys should do for the Edens."
+
+"You coward!" said Ralph, with his pale face flushing now.
+
+"What!" cried Mark.  "Oh yes, call names like a girl.  Come: beg for
+your life."
+
+Ralph's answer was a fierce and scornful look, which told of what he
+would do if his hands were free.  Then for a few moments he struggled,
+and Mark laughed.
+
+"No good," he said; "our men can tie knots fast enough to hold a
+Darley."
+
+The men, who stood at a little distance, laughed together in their
+satisfaction as they eagerly waited to see what was to come.  Mark did
+not keep them long in suspense, for his hand went to the hilt of his
+sword, which he half drew.
+
+"Now," he said, "beg for your life, Darley."
+
+"Coward!" cried Ralph, in a hoarse whisper.
+
+"Very well," said Mark.  "I gave you the chance.  You were caught by our
+men stealing on our land, and you ought to have begged.  The Darleys
+always were beggars and thieves; but you will not.  I gave you the
+opportunity."
+
+He thrust the sword back in its sheath, and let his right hand fall to
+his side, where a strong knife-like dagger hung by a short chain from
+his belt, and whipped it out of its case.
+
+"Does for a hunting-knife," he said, with a curious laugh.  "My father
+has killed many a stag with it.  Now, are you going to beg for your
+life?"
+
+There was no reply, and the men took a step or two forward.
+
+"Go back!" cried Mark fiercely; and the men obeyed.
+
+Mark bent over the prisoner, with the mocking laugh intensifying.
+
+"Too much of a coward to beg for your life," he said: "well, I'm too
+much of a coward to make you see it taken.  There!"
+
+With a quick movement, he turned Ralph over upon his face, thrust the
+point of the dagger beneath the line where the cut would tell best, and
+the prisoner's wrists were free; another quick cut divided the rope
+which drew his elbows together, and then the knees and ankles followed,
+the strained hemp easily parting at the touch of the keen blade, and
+Ralph Darley was free.
+
+"Why, Master Mark," cried the chief man of the party in astonishment,
+"what you doing of?"
+
+"Can't you see, idiot?" cried Mark, with a fierce snap.
+
+"But what's the good of our ketching and tying on him?" cried the man
+addressed as Tom, in an ill-used tone.
+
+"Say another word, you brute, and I'll have you tied as you tied him,"
+cried Mark fiercely.
+
+"Well, I dunno what Sir Eddard'll say when he knows."
+
+"What he says he'll say to me," cried Mark.  "You fellows ought to be in
+the mine by now.  Go back to your work."
+
+The youth stood pointing down the steep slope, and an angry murmur of
+opposition arose; but the men began to move off, only to be called back
+just as Ralph rose painfully to his feet.
+
+"Come here," cried Mark.  "Pick up those pieces of rope."
+
+"Who's going to take them back to the mine?" said the leader, in an
+ill-used tone.  "What's Dan Rugg going to say?  Noo rope too."
+
+"Tell him I cut it," said Mark imperiously.  "You take it back."
+
+The man picked up the pieces, and Tom quietly took up the creel from
+where it lay, half hidden by a tuft of fern fronds, to begin moving off
+with the trout.  But Mark let him get a few steps away before following
+with a rush and a kick which sent the man on his face.  Then, as he
+struggled up, angry and threatening, the lad snatched the creel from his
+hands.
+
+"The Edens are not thieves," he said fiercely--"only when they want a
+few young ravens," he added, turning with a mocking laugh to Ralph; and
+once more the two lads stood gazing in each other's eyes for a few
+moments, the rustling made by the departing men and the murmur of their
+voices rising from below.
+
+Then, imitating Ralph's action of the last time they met, he pointed
+down to the river, and said, with a mocking laugh:
+
+"It's my turn now.  The Darleys are not the only ones who know how to
+treat a fallen enemy.  Your creel, sir; and you are welcome to our
+trout."
+
+Ralph took the basket without a word, and without taking his eyes from
+Mark's, while it seemed as if each lad was fighting hard not to be the
+first to let his glance sink before the other's.
+
+Then Ralph raised the lid of the creel, and began to take out the fish,
+but hesitated, and laid them back.  To have thrown them on the ground
+seemed to him contemptible and mean.
+
+"Now go," said Mark.  "You and I are straight, sir.  Next time we meet I
+hope you will wear your sword."
+
+Ralph hesitated, and remained standing in the same place; his eyes
+looking as if he wanted to speak, but no words would come; and at last
+he turned and took a step to go, but his numbed feet and ankles gave way
+beneath him, and he tottered, and would have fallen, had not Mark
+involuntarily sprung forward and caught him in his arms.
+
+Ralph laughed painfully.
+
+"Let me sit down on the enemy's ground for a few minutes," he said.
+"Your men have left me no use in my limbs."
+
+Mark gently let him down; and, faint with pain, the cold sweat breaking
+out in great drops all over his brow, Ralph said feebly, smiling the
+while:
+
+"Not straight yet, Master Eden.  I am in your debt now."
+
+Then a deathly feeling of sickness came over him; trees, rocks, and
+sunny sky were dim, and glided before his eyes till all was darkness,
+for how long he could not tell.
+
+When he opened his eyes again the sickly feeling still troubled him, but
+he could not understand why.  It was like awakening from some troubled
+dream, and full consciousness came back slowly.  Then, by degrees, he
+grasped the fact that his head was resting on a tuft of heath, and
+bracken fronds shaded him from the sun.  His wrists throbbed with
+sharp-shooting pains, which ran right up beyond his elbows.  There were
+pains, too, about his knees and ankles, and there was something else
+which he could not make out, till he looked towards his feet, to see
+that some one was seated a little below him on the sharp slope, with
+back half-turned to him, and his bare legs across his lap, chafing the
+ankles gently, first one and then the other, over and over again.
+
+Ralph was quite conscious now, but he did not speak.  He lay back there,
+making no movement, no sign; but a curiously dark look came into his
+eyes, and his lips quivered a little, grew firm again, and were softened
+by a smile, while a strange glowing sensation set in about his heart.
+
+Five minutes must have elapsed before Mark Eden turned his head, started
+as he saw that Ralph's eyes were watching him, and his quiet intent gaze
+gave place to a frown; his face became scarlet, and he hastily placed
+his patient's legs upon the ground.
+
+"How long have you been watching me?" he said hotly.
+
+"Only a minute or so.  Did I faint?"
+
+"I suppose so," said Mark roughly.  "Just like a great girl."
+
+"Yes: very weak of me," said Ralph quietly.
+
+"Yes, very," said Mark.  "The brutes tied you too tightly.  Try if you
+can walk now.  Get down by the river, and bathe them a bit."
+
+He stood up and thrust his hands behind him, looking at his young enemy
+scornfully; but the scarlet flush was in his face still, and would make
+him look as if he were ashamed of what he had been caught doing.
+
+Ralph sat up, and struggled painfully to his feet, turning hot and faint
+again; but he made a brave effort to be firm, and took a step or two and
+then stopped, Mark making no effort to assist him.  Then stifling a cry
+of pain, he took another step or two and tottered, when Mark caught his
+arm.
+
+"You're shamming," he cried angrily.
+
+Ralph's brow wrinkled, and he looked down at his bare legs and feet,
+raising one a little, painfully, to draw attention to the terribly
+swollen state of his ankles and knees.
+
+"Shamming!" he said quietly.  "Am I?  Well, they are not."
+
+Ralph held out first one leg, and then the other, before seating himself
+again, drawing his hose from his belt, and trying to draw them on; but
+at the end of a minute the pain from his swollen wrists forced him to
+give up the task, and he slowly replaced the hose in his belt.
+
+Twice over, unseen by Ralph, his companion made a gesture as if to
+advance and help him, but he mastered the inclination; and after a
+while, Ralph sat perfectly still, waiting for the giddy feeling from
+which he suffered to go off.  And at last, feeling a little better, he
+rose to his feet, bowed distantly, and began to descend the steep slope;
+but in a few minutes he was clinging to a tree, helpless once more, and
+he started, as Mark suddenly said, roughly:
+
+"Here; you don't know our cliff: let me show you--"
+
+Ralph was under the impression that he had left Mark Eden quite behind,
+and his surprise was the greater when he found that his enemy was
+offering him his arm, and ended by helping him down the remainder of the
+way to the river, where the injured lad gladly seated himself at the
+edge upon a stone, which enabled him to lave both feet at once in the
+clear cool current, to the great comfort and relief of his swollen
+ankles.
+
+After a time he was able to use his feet, resume his hose and shoes, and
+rise to start back; but it was awkward to part without some word of
+thanks, and these were very difficult to say to one who stood by all the
+time, watching every action, with a mocking smile upon his lips.
+
+But the words had to be said, and making an effort Ralph turned to
+speak.  But before a sound had left his lips, Mark burst out with:
+
+"Going now?  Very well.  Wait till we meet again.  That way, sir.  I
+dare say you know that you can cross the river there?"
+
+Ralph bowed coldly, and took a few steps toward the shallows, before
+stopping short.
+
+"I must go and thank him for what he has done," he said to himself; and
+he turned to walk back, but Mark was not visible.
+
+"Master Mark Eden," he cried; but there was no reply, and he cried
+again, shouting as loud as he could, but there was still no response.
+And, sick at heart with pain and vexation, Ralph once more stumbled
+awkwardly along by the river, amongst stone, bramble, and fern, trying
+to make out where the deep chasm was down into which he had looked, but
+it was completely hidden by the trees; and, reaching the shallows, he
+slowly crossed to go homeward on the more open side, which was a far
+less difficult task, though it necessitated crossing the river again.
+
+But as the lad disappeared among the trees, Mark Eden rose from where he
+had been hidden behind a pile of fallen blocks, to make his way into the
+chasm, and then upward to the castle on the Black Tor, frowning very
+fiercely, and feeling a good deal dissatisfied with himself, though
+brightening up a little as he began thinking of what was to happen the
+next time he and Ralph Darley met.
+
+"One couldn't do anything," he said roughly, "till that old business had
+been put straight."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWELVE.
+
+BARING THE WHITE BLADE.
+
+Ralph Darley's disposition led him to determine to say nothing about
+what had passed, but his lame legs forced him to confess how it was his
+ankles were so bad, and Sir Morton was furious.  He was ready to declare
+war on a small scale against his neighbour, and carry fire and sword
+into his camp.  But Ralph's legs were better the next day; and when the
+whole history of the two encounters had been gone over, he thought
+better of the affair, to the extent of determining to wait till his son
+was quite well again; and when he was quite well, there were other
+things to dwell upon.
+
+For one, Nick Garth, who had been across to one of the villages beyond
+the moor, came back with his head bleeding, and stripped to breeches and
+shirt.
+
+His account of his trouble was that he was coming home in the dark,
+keeping one eye upon a flickering light some distance away up the
+mountain-side.  Sometimes it was visible, at others all was black; and
+he was wondering whether it had anything to do with the witches' fire of
+which he had heard tell, when all at once he found himself surrounded by
+seven or eight wild-looking figures, either in long gowns or cloaks, who
+seized him; and upon his resisting wildly, they knocked him down, took
+the best of his clothes away, emptied his pockets, and departed,
+carrying off a large basket he was taking home, a basket containing two
+chickens, two ducklings, and a big pat of butter, the present of a
+married sister beyond the moors.
+
+The next day news reached the Black Tor that the witches had been seen
+again by two different miners, and in each case the tale was the same.
+
+The witches were crowding together in a huddled way, in their long
+cloaks, over a fire.  A caldron was hung from three sticks, joined
+together at the top, and one of the men declared that they must have
+been busy over some unhallowed work.
+
+"Why do you say that, man?" asked Mark.
+
+"Because they were chanting some horrible thing together."
+
+"You heard that?"
+
+"Ay, Master Mark, I heered it."
+
+"A song?"
+
+"Song, Master Mark?  Save us, no!  A song makes your eyes water if it's
+about solemn things, or it makes you laugh if it's comic; but this made
+the marrow in my bones turn hard as taller, for it went through me; and
+as I watched them, they all got up and joined hands, and began to walk
+slowly round the great pot over the fire, and the light shone on their
+horrible faces and long ragged gowns.  I wanted to run away, but my legs
+was all of a tremble.  I'd ha' give anything to run, but they legs
+wouldn't go, and there I stood, watching 'em as they danced round the
+fire a little faster, and a little faster, till they were racing about,
+singing and screeching.  And then all at once they stopped and shouted
+`Wow?' all together, and burst into the most horrid shrecking laughter
+you ever heered, and the light went out.  That seemed to set my legs
+going, master, and I turned to get away as fast as ever I could go, when
+I heered some kind o' wild bird whistle over the mountain-side, and
+another answered it close to me: and before I knew where I was, the
+great bird fluttered its wings over me, and I caught my foot in a tuft
+of heather, and fell."
+
+"Well, and what then?" asked Mark.
+
+"Nothing, sir, only that I ran all the way home to my cottage yonder,
+and you ask my wife, and she'll tell you I hadn't a dry thread on me
+when I got in.  Now, sir, what do you say?"
+
+"All nonsense!" replied Mark bluntly, and he walked away.
+
+Another few days passed.  Mark had been very quiet and thoughtful at
+home, reading, or making believe to read, and spending a good deal of
+time in the mine with Dummy Rugg, who twice over proposed that they
+should go on exploring the grotto-like place he had discovered; but to
+his surprise, his young master put it off, and the quiet, silent fellow
+waited.  He, though, had more tales to tell of the way in which things
+disappeared from cottages.  Pigs, sheep, poultry went in the most
+unaccountable way, and the witches who met sometimes on the mountain
+slope had the credit of spiriting them away.
+
+"Then why don't the people who lose things follow the witches up, and
+see if they have taken them?"
+
+"Follow 'em up, sir?" said Dummy, opening his eyes very widely.  "They
+wouldn't dare."
+
+Then came a day when, feeling dull and bitter and as if he were not
+enjoying himself at home, as he did the last time he was there, Mark
+mounted one of the stout cob ponies kept for his and his sister's use,
+and went for a good long round, one which was prolonged so that it was
+getting toward evening, and the sun was peering over the shoulder of one
+of the western hills, when, throwing the rein on his cob's neck, and
+leaving it to pick its own way among the stones of the moorland, he
+entered a narrow, waste-looking dale, about four miles from the Tor.
+
+He felt more dull and low-spirited than when he started in the morning,
+probably from want of a good meal, for he had had nothing since
+breakfast, save a hunch of very cake-like bread and a bowl of milk at a
+cottage farm right up in the Peak, where he had rested his pony while it
+had a good feed of oats.
+
+The dale looked desolation itself, in spite of the gilding of the
+setting sun.  Stone lay everywhere: not the limestone of his own hills
+and cliffs, but grim, black-looking millstone-grit, which here and there
+formed craggy, forbidding outlines; and this did not increase his
+satisfaction with his ride, when he took up the rein and began to urge
+the cob on, to get through the gloomy place.
+
+But the cob knew better than his master what was best, and refused to
+risk breaking its legs among the stones with which the moor was strewn.
+
+"Ugh! you lazy fat brute," cried Mark; "one might just as well walk,
+and--Who's that?"
+
+He shaded his eyes from the sun, and looked long and carefully at a
+figure a few hundred yards ahead till his heart began to beat fast, for
+he felt sure that it was Ralph Darley.  Ten minutes after, he began to
+be convinced, and coming to a clearer place where there was a pretence
+of a bit of green sward, the cob broke into a canter of its own will,
+which brought its rider a good deal nearer to the figure trudging in the
+same direction.  Then the cob dropped into a walk again, picking its way
+among great blocks of stone; and Mark was certain now that it was Ralph
+Darley, with creel on back, and rod over his shoulder, evidently
+returning from one of the higher streams after a day's fishing.
+
+Mark's heart beat a little faster, and he nipped his cob's sides; but
+the patient animal would not alter its steady walk, which was at about
+the same rate as the fisher's, and consequently Mark had to sit and
+watch his enemy's back, as, unconscious of his presence, Ralph trudged
+on homeward, with one arm across his back to ease up the creel, which
+was fairly heavy with the delicate burden of grayling it contained, the
+result of a very successful day.
+
+"He has his sword on this time," said Mark to himself, "and I've got
+mine."
+
+The lad touched the hilt, to make sure it had not been jerked out of the
+scabbard during his ride.
+
+"Just a bit farther on yonder," he muttered, gazing at the steep slope
+of a limestone hill to his right, and a mile distant, "there are some
+nice level bits of turf.  I can overtake him then, and we can have a bit
+of a talk together."
+
+The cob walked steadily on, avoiding awkward places better than his
+master could have guided him, and suddenly stopped short at a rocky
+pool, where a little spring of water gushed from the foot of a steep
+slope, and lowered its head to drink.
+
+"You don't want water now," said Mark angrily; and he tightened the
+rein, but his cob had a mouth like leather; and caring nothing for the
+bit, bore upon it heavily, stretched out his neck, and had a long deep
+drink.
+
+"I wish I had spurs on," muttered Mark; "I'd give you a couple of such
+digs, my fine fellow."
+
+Then he sat thinking.
+
+"Good job I haven't got any on.  I should trip, for certain, when we
+were at it."
+
+Then the cob raised its dripping mouth, which it had kept with lips very
+close together, to act as a strainer to keep out tadpoles,
+water-beetles, leeches, or any other unpleasant creatures that might be
+in the water, took two or three steps back and aside, and then, noticing
+that there was a goodly patch of rich juicy herbage close by the spring,
+it lowered its head once more, uttered a snort as it blew the grass
+heavily, to drive off any flies that might be nestling among the
+strands, and began to crop, crop at the rich feed.
+
+"Oh come, I'm not going to stand that," cried Mark, dragging at the
+pony's head.  "You're so full of oats now that you can hardly move, and
+he'll be looking back directly, and thinking I'm afraid to come on."
+
+The cob's head was up: so was its obstinate nature.  It evidently
+considered it would be a sin to leave such a delicious salad, so
+tempting and juicy, and suitable after a peck or two of dry, husky oats;
+and, thoroughly determined not to pass the herbage by, it set its fore
+feet straight out a good distance apart, and strained at the reins till,
+as Mark pulled and pressed his feet against the stirrups, it seemed
+probable that there would be a break.
+
+"Oh, you brute!" cried the lad angrily; "you ugly, coarse, obstinate
+brute!  Pony!  You're not a pony, I feel sure; you're only a miserable
+mule, and your father was some long-eared, thick-skinned, thin-tailed,
+muddle-headed, old jackass.  Look here!  I'll take out my sword, and
+prick you with the point."
+
+The cob evidently did not believe it, and kept on the strain of the bit,
+till the lad took a rein in each hand, and began to saw the steel from
+side to side, making it rattle against the animal's teeth.
+
+This seemed to have a pleasant effect on the hard mouth, and produced
+the result of the cob nodding its head a little; and just then, to
+Mark's great disgust, Ralph turned his head and looked back.
+
+"There!  I expected as much.  Now go on, you beast, or I'll kill you."
+
+The pony snorted with satisfaction, for in his excitement, the rider had
+slackened the reins a little.  Down went the animal's muzzle; there was
+another puff to blow away the insects, and it began to crop again, with
+that pleasant sound heard when grazing animals are amongst rich herbage.
+
+Then followed a fresh struggle, and the pony won, taking not the
+slightest notice of the insulting remarks made by its rider about its
+descent, appearance, and habits.
+
+But at last, perhaps because it had had its own way, more probably
+because it was not hungry, and just when the rider was thinking of
+getting down to walk, and sending Dummy Rugg to find the animal next
+day, it raised its head, ground up a little grass between its teeth and
+then began to follow Ralph once more, as he trudged on without turning
+his head again.
+
+Still, try as he would, Mark could not get the animal to break into a
+canter; in fact, the way was impossible; and when the sun had sunk down
+below the western hill, which cast a great purple shadow, to begin
+rising slowly higher and higher against the mountain on his left, he and
+Ralph were still at about the same distance apart.
+
+"I can't halloa to him to stop," muttered Mark angrily; "I don't want to
+seem to know him, but to overtake him, and appear surprised, and then
+break into a quarrel hotly and at once.  Oh! it's enough to drive anyone
+mad.  You brute!  I'll never try to ride you again."
+
+Rather hard, this, upon the patient beast which had carried him for many
+miles that day, and was carefully abstaining now from cantering
+recklessly amongst dangerous stones, and giving its master a heavy fall.
+But boys will be unreasonable sometimes, almost as unreasonable as some
+men.
+
+Finding at last that drumming the cob's sides was of no use, jerking the
+bit of not the slightest avail, and that whacks with the sheathed sword
+only produced whisks of the tail, Mark subsided into a sulky silence,
+and rode at a walk, watching the enemy's back as he trudged steadily on.
+
+The vale grew more gloomy on the right side, the steep limestone hill
+being all in shadow, and the rough blocks looked like grotesque
+creatures peering out from among the blackening bushes; and as he rode
+on, the lad could not help thinking that by night the place might easily
+scare ignorant, untutored, superstitious people, who saw, or fancied
+they saw, strange lights here and there.
+
+"And in the sunshine it is as bright as the other hill," thought Mark,
+as he glanced at the left side of the dale; "not very bright, though.
+It's a desolate place at the best of times;" and once more he glanced up
+the steep slope on his right.
+
+"Wonder why they call it Ergles," he mused.  "Let's see; it's up there
+where the cave with the hot spring is.  Not a bit farther on."
+
+He was still a long distance from home, and knowing that before long
+Ralph Darley would turn off to the left, he again made an effort to urge
+on the cob, but in vain.
+
+"And he'll go home thinking I'm afraid," muttered the lad; "but first
+time I meet him, and he isn't a miserable, wretched, contemptible
+cripple, I'll show him I'm not."
+
+"Then you shall show him now," the cob seemed to say, for it broke into
+a smart canter, but only because the bottom of the dale was here free
+from stones, and in a very short time Ralph was overtaken.
+
+"Here, hi! fellow! clear the road," shouted Mark; and he essayed to
+stop.  But now, the way being good, the cob was anxious to get on and
+reach its stable, passing Ralph quickly enough, and enraging its rider
+more and more.
+
+"Oh, you brute, you brute!" he muttered.  "Now he can't help thinking
+I'm afraid of him.  If I only had a whip."
+
+For the moment Mark felt disposed to turn in the saddle, and make some
+insulting gesture at the lad behind--one that would make him, if he had
+any courage within, come running rapidly in pursuit.  But the act would
+have seemed too weak and boyish, when he wanted to be manly; and he
+refrained, contenting himself with dragging hard at the rein, till a
+hundred yards farther the ground grew stony again, and the pony dropped
+into a walk, and picked its way in and out more slowly than ever.
+
+This had the result that Mark desired, for a glance back showed him that
+Ralph was coming on fast, and in a few minutes he had overtaken him,
+just as he sprang off his pony and faced round.
+
+"Oh, it is you," said Mark haughtily.
+
+"Yes," said Ralph, meeting his eyes boldly.
+
+"I thought it was.  Well, you are not lame now?"
+
+"No."
+
+"And I see you have a sword."
+
+"Yes, I have my sword."
+
+"Then as we are equal now, and if you are not afraid, we may as well
+have a little conversation with them."
+
+"Fight?" said Ralph quietly.  "Why?"
+
+"Ha-ha!" laughed Mark, with his face flushing.  "Why?  Because we are
+gentlemen, I suppose; because we have been taught to use our swords; at
+least I have; and it's the worse for you if you have not."
+
+"But I have," said Ralph firmly, his own cheeks beginning to look hot;
+"but I don't see that this is a reason why we two should fight."
+
+"Then I'll give you another," cried Mark; "because you are a Darley, and
+I am an Eden, and we cannot meet without drawing swords.  Your people
+were always a set of cut-throats, murderers, robbers, and thieves."
+
+"It's a lie," cried Ralph hotly.  "My people were always gentlemen.  It
+was your people who always insulted ours, as you are insulting me now,
+and did a few minutes ago, when you passed me going quietly on my way."
+
+"That's enough," said Mark sharply.  "Out of the way, beast," and he
+drew his sword and struck the cob sharply on the flank, sending it
+trotting onward at the risk of breaking its knees.
+
+"This is your doing," said Ralph quietly, as he threw down his rod, and
+passed the strap of his creel over his head, to swing it after.
+
+"Bah! don't talk," cried Mark hotly.  "This place will do.  It is as
+fair for you as for me."
+
+He made a gesture with his sword toward a tolerably level spot, and
+Ralph bowed his head.
+
+"Then draw," cried Mark, throwing down his cap.
+
+Ralph followed his example, and the next moment his own bright blade
+leaped from its sheath, and without further preliminary, they crossed
+their trusty blades, which emitted a harsh grating noise as they played
+up and down, flashing in the paling evening light, each awaiting the
+other's attack.
+
+Mark, in the fear that his enemy would doubt his prowess, began the
+attack; and in defending himself from his adversary's thrusts Ralph soon
+showed him that he had learned the use of his thin rapier from a master
+the equal of his own teacher, thus making the hot-headed youth more
+cautious, and ready to turn aside the thrusts which followed when he
+ceased his own.
+
+They fenced equally well, and for a few minutes no harm was done.  Then
+all at once, in response to a quick thrust, a spot appeared high up
+above the russet leather boot which came half-way up Mark's thigh, and
+Ralph leaped back with a strange feeling of compunction attacking him
+that he could not understand.
+
+"Nothing," cried Mark angrily; "a scratch," as he pressed his teeth upon
+his nether lip; and they crossed swords once more, with the wounded lad
+commencing the attack with as much vigour as before.  And now, forgetful
+of everything but the desire to lay one another _hors de combat_, they
+thrust and parried for the next minute, till Ralph uttered a faint cry,
+as his adversary's sword passed through his doublet, between his right
+arm and ribs, a sharp pang warning him that the blade had pierced
+something more than the velvet he wore.
+
+Mark dropped the point of his blade, for at that moment a whistle rang
+out, and he looked inquiringly in the direction from which it had come,
+leaving himself quite open to any treacherous attack had it been
+intended.
+
+But none was meant, Ralph standing with his left hand pressing his side,
+just below the armpit, as another whistle was heard from a fresh
+direction.  Others followed, and the adversaries looked sharply at each
+other.
+
+"Not birds," said Ralph quickly.
+
+"Don't look like it," said Mark bitterly, as he drew his breath with a
+hissing noise, as if in pain.
+
+"We're surrounded," cried Ralph excitedly, as they saw six or seven men
+appearing from different directions, and evidently all making the spot
+where the lads now stood the centre for which they aimed.
+
+"You coward!" cried Mark bitterly--"a trap--your father's men.  _En
+garde_!" he shouted.  "You shall pay for this!"
+
+"My father's men?" cried Ralph angrily, as he ignored the other's
+preparations for a fresh attack.  "You're mad; can't you see they're
+those scoundrels who came to us--Captain Purlrose and his men.  Look,
+there he is--up yonder by that hole."
+
+"What do they mean, then?" cried Mark, dropping the point of his weapon.
+
+"Mischief to us," cried Ralph.
+
+"Or me," said Mark suspiciously.
+
+"To us, I tell you," cried Ralph.--"You won't give in?"
+
+"No; will you?"
+
+"Not if you'll stand by me."
+
+"And I will," cried Mark excitedly.
+
+"But you are wounded."
+
+"So are you."
+
+"I don't feel it now."
+
+"No more do I.  Hurrah, then; let them come on!"
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTEEN.
+
+FIGHTING LONG ODDS.
+
+But the men did not come on, and the two lads, now breathing hard from
+their exertions, had time to think as well as recover their breath, for
+the men, after carefully approaching singly from different directions,
+so as to surround the combatants, now halted as if by one consent a good
+fifty yards away, each looking upward from time to time at the burly
+cloaked figure high above them, and now standing upon a big block of
+stone, making signals by waving his arms and pointing.
+
+In answer to one of these signals, the men all took off the long cloaks
+they wore; and in a moment the thought flashed through Mark Eden's brain
+that these men must have been seen seated round their fire, somewhere
+above, and hence had arisen the rumours of witches on the mountain
+slope, the cloaks being their long gowns.
+
+And now, as the men stood fast, in spite of several signs from above,
+Ralph suddenly said:
+
+"Perhaps they've only come to see us fight, and are waiting for us to
+begin again."
+
+"Not they," cried Mark excitedly.  "I know: they mean to take us
+prisoners, and keep us till we're ransomed."
+
+"Perhaps.  That is why we have heard of so many robberies," said Ralph,
+whose hot anger against his enemy was fast cooling down.
+
+"Yes, that's it.  The dogs!" cried Mark.  "I know there's a big cave up
+there that you go in through a narrow crack.  I saw it once.  They
+couldn't get my father to have them up at the Tor, and so they've taken
+possession of the cavern and turned robbers.  Well, my father will soon
+rout them out of there."
+
+"If yours don't, mine will," replied Ralph.  "But they don't seem
+disposed to interfere.  Are they stopping to see us fight?"
+
+"If they are," cried Mark hotly, "they'll have to wait a long time.  I'm
+not going to make a raree-show of myself to please them."
+
+"Nor I neither," cried Ralph.  "But," he added hastily, "you know I'm
+not afraid?"
+
+"Say you know that I'm not afraid either, and I'll say the same."
+
+"Oh, I'll say that," replied Ralph, "because I know it."
+
+"That's right, then," said Mark; "and we can finish having it out
+another time."
+
+"Of course.  I say, though, your leg's bleeding a good deal."
+
+"Oh, never mind that.  So's your arm."
+
+"Can't be deep," said Ralph, "because it only smarts a bit.  I say, look
+there!  That's Captain Purlrose upon the stone, and he's making signals
+again."
+
+The wide ring of men saw the signs made by the burly figure above, and
+they all wrapped their cloaks round their left arms, and then drew their
+swords.
+
+"Then they do mean to fight," cried Mark excitedly.
+
+"Yes, but they don't come on.  I say: you're not going to let them take
+you prisoner, are you?"
+
+"I'm not going to run away," said Mark sturdily.
+
+"But they are six to one," said Ralph.
+
+"Yes, if you stand still and look on.  If you won't let them take you,
+they'll only be three to one."
+
+"I'm going to make a dash for it," said Ralph, setting his teeth hard,
+for his wound smarted a good deal, and there was a peculiar warm feeling
+as of something trickling down his sleeve.
+
+"What, run away?"
+
+"Who said I was going to run away?" cried Ralph.  "Look here: in war two
+kings who hate one another often join together against an enemy."
+
+"Of course," said Mark.
+
+"I hate you and all your family, but we don't want any one else to set
+up here, near our homes, do we?"
+
+"No," said Mark sharply.
+
+"Then I'll stand by you like a trump," cried Ralph; "if you'll stand by
+me now.  It's long odds, but we've got right on our side."
+
+"Shake hands on it then," cried Mark--"No, we can't do that, because
+it's like making friends, when we're enemies and hate one another."
+
+"No, we can't shake hands," said Ralph warmly, "but we can make our
+swords kiss hilts, and that's joining together for the fight."
+
+"Agreed," cried Mark; and the lace steel shells of their rapiers clinked
+together, making the men, who were watching them intently, exchange
+glances.  "I say," said Mark hastily, "wasn't that a mistake?"
+
+"What?"
+
+"Joining like that.  It's making our swords friends."
+
+"Only till this skirmish is over," said Ralph.
+
+"Oh yes; of course.  We can make the blades kiss then.  Here, what's
+that Captain what-you-may-call-him doing, waving his arms like that?"
+
+"Means for them to come on and attack.  He's savage because they don't,"
+said Ralph.
+
+"Yes, that's it.  I believe they're afraid of getting more holes in
+their jerkins."
+
+"Ha-ha!" laughed Ralph; "and they have no room, I suppose.  Look here,
+let's have a dash for it."
+
+"What! run away?  That I won't, from them, so long as I've got a sword."
+
+"Run away!  No!" cried Ralph, who was bubbling over with excitement, the
+slight wound he had received acting as a spur to his natural desire to
+punish some one for his pain.  "Can't you see that if we make a dash at
+them on one side, we shall only have two to fight for a bit till the
+others can come up; and we might wound the first two if we're quick,
+before their companions could attack."
+
+"Well said, general," cried Mark excitedly.  "That's right.  Let's look
+sharp then, for my leg hurts as if it was getting stiff."
+
+"Never mind your leg.  Hallo! hark!"
+
+"Why don't you come on yourself, then?" shouted one of the men, in
+answer to a good deal of gesticulation from the captain.  "Take care you
+don't get a hole in your skin."
+
+"Hurrah!" cried Mark; "they are afraid.  Ready?"
+
+"Yes; come on!" cried Ralph; and the two lads made a rush at the men who
+stood in their homeward way, astonishing them so that they turned and
+ran before the attacking party had gone half-a-dozen paces.
+
+But a yell of execration rose from the others, as they now made a rush
+after the lads, who became pursuers and pursued as well.
+
+A savage yell, too, came from high up the mountain slope, the captain
+being joined by the rest of his gang, and standing shouting and waving
+his hands furiously.
+
+The position now was this: Two men were running, with the lads some
+five-and-twenty yards behind, and gaining on them fast.  Two men were
+fifty yards away, to right and left; and two more were right behind,
+sixty or seventy yards, in full pursuit.
+
+"Forward!" shouted Mark.  "No mercy, Darley; run your fellow through,
+and then turn and spit that fellow on your right."
+
+The two men in front heard the words, and redoubled their efforts, but
+they were heavy, middle-aged scoundrels, and plodded clumsily over the
+stone-strewed ground; while, forgetting their wounds in the excitement,
+Mark and Ralph bounded along, leaping blocks that stood in their way,
+and gaining so fast upon their flying enemies, that in a few minutes
+they were close up: and the retreating pair, in response to the yells of
+their companions, and in despair, turned at bay, when Mark, who was
+first, leaped straight at his man, turning the fellow's rusty sword
+aside, and came upon the lower part of his chest with his knees, like a
+stone from a catapult.
+
+Down went the man, with his sword flying out of his hand, and Mark
+nearly fell a couple of yards beyond him, but, active as a fallow deer,
+he saved himself by a couple of leaps, as his feet touched the ground;
+and he turned, to see Ralph's man down and motionless, as his companion
+leaped to his side, and faced round to meet the next two, who, urged on
+by the shouts from the hill, charged at them, carried on by their legs,
+almost involuntarily, their spirit having little to do with it.
+
+The next minute swords were clashing, there were a few quick parries and
+thrusts, and one man dropped his weapon, as Ralph's sword passed through
+his shoulder, almost simultaneously with a sharp clang, caused by the
+shell of Mark's weapon striking against that of his adversary, whose
+blade broke short off at the hilt.  Then, without a moment's hesitation,
+the lad struck sidewise at the fellow with his fist, catching him in the
+ear, and he staggered sidewise, _hors de combat_.
+
+"Now for the others," cried Ralph wildly, his blood up, and ready for
+anything; and they were about to dash at them, when, to their utter
+astonishment, the last two turned and ran up the slope toward their
+captain and the rest of the party, who were coming to their aid.
+
+"No, no, stop, stop!" yelled Mark, half choking the while with a hoarse
+hysterical laugh.  "Oh, what a game!  Here, look; that fellow's getting
+his sword."
+
+Without another word, the pair dashed at the disarmed man, who had risen
+and picked up his weapon, but he turned and fled.
+
+"Who'd have thought of that?" cried Mark wildly.  "Shall we turn and
+attack the others as they come on?"
+
+"No," said Ralph, recovering his coolness; "let's trot on now.  It's
+madness to try it again."
+
+"Well, I suppose it would be pushing it too far.  They can't say we're
+cowards if we retreat now."
+
+"No; but we can say they are," cried Ralph.  "Why, what a set of curs,
+to be beaten by us."
+
+"Yes, and they can't fight a bit.  I could parry their thrusts with a
+stick.  But here; I can't lose my pony.  Where is he?"
+
+"And I can't lose my rod and creel," cried Ralph.  "There's your pony
+yonder ahead."
+
+"And your fish are right back there.  I'll come with you to fetch them."
+
+"No, no; let them have 'em.  We must retreat now.  Two, four, six,
+eight-nine of them now; and I don't think those fellows who are down are
+much hurt.  Come along."
+
+For Captain Purlrose was now descending the slope, and his men were
+approaching menacingly, spurred on by a shower of oaths, threats, and
+abuse from their leader.
+
+"Well, I suppose we must; but my blood's up now," said Mark, "and I hate
+running from such a set of curs."
+
+"So do I," said Ralph; "it's like being beaten, when we won.  I say,
+were you hurt?"
+
+"Only where you jobbed that sword of yours into my leg.  Phew! it's
+getting stiffer every moment.  I shan't be able to walk directly.  Were
+you?"
+
+"What, hurt?  No, only where you scratched me."
+
+"It was pretty deep, then, for your sleeve's soaked.  Here, let me tie
+my handkerchief round it."
+
+"No, no," said Ralph; "they'll overtake us.  Let's make a run for it
+now."
+
+"Shall we?" said Mark unwillingly.
+
+"Yes, we must.  I can't use my arm any more."
+
+"Well, I don't think I can run much farther."
+
+"You must," cried Ralph, sharply as he looked over his shoulder.  "We're
+not fit to fight."
+
+He thrust his sound arm through Mark's, and they ran on pretty swiftly
+for a hundred yards or so, with the enemy in full pursuit, and then Mark
+stopped suddenly.
+
+"Can't go--any farther," he said.  "My leg's awful."
+
+Ralph looked round, to find that the men had given up the pursuit, and
+were going back.
+
+"Can we catch your pony?" he said.
+
+"I think so.  He's grazing yonder."
+
+"Would he let me catch him?"
+
+"No," said Mark.  "He'd be off directly.  There, I think I can hobble on
+now for a bit.  What! are they coming again?"
+
+"No; only watching us," said Ralph rather faintly.  "Would you mind
+tying that tightly round my arm?"
+
+For answer, Mark seized the handkerchief Ralph held out, and knotted it
+last round his companion's arm.
+
+"Now let me do something to your leg."
+
+"No; it doesn't bleed now," said Mark.  "Let's get on.  If they see us
+crippled, they'll come on again, and if they do I'm good for nothing.
+It doesn't bleed; it only feels of no use.  There, let's get on.  Are
+they watching us?"
+
+"No, I think not.  It's getting so dark there.  I say; I can see they're
+lifting one of the men to carry him."
+
+"Wish some one would carry me," groaned Mark.
+
+"I don't think I can," said Ralph.  "Perhaps I could, though, if you
+could hold on."
+
+"Bah!" cried Mark sharply.  "Likely.  Come on, and I'll coax that beast
+of a pony.  If I can only get hold of him, I'll make him carry us both."
+
+They pressed on in silence, Mark using his sword as a walking-stick with
+one hand, and compelled to accept his enemy's arm, till they came up to
+where the cob was grazing.
+
+It let them come close up before raising its head, and then, after
+contemplating them for a bit, twitching his ears, as Mark uttered a
+series of blandishments, and ended by tossing its head, and spinning
+round, as upon a pivot, to trot off.  It failed in this, however, for
+Ralph thrust his foot through the trailing rein, and brought the animal
+up short.
+
+"Well done!" cried Mark.  "There, jump on, and then pull me across like
+a sack."
+
+"Nonsense!  Get on yourself.  I'll help you."
+
+"I shan't, it's my pony.  You're wounded, so get on."
+
+"After you," said Ralph, and, after a little more bandying of words,
+Mark felt so sick with pain that he had either to lie down on the earth
+or mount.
+
+He did the latter, after several groans, for his leg was very stiff and
+painful.
+
+"There's a coward for you," he said.  "Now jump up behind."
+
+"There is no need," said Ralph.  "I can walk."
+
+"That's not fair."
+
+"Never mind.--Get on with you."
+
+This last to the pony, who walked quietly along with his burden in the
+pleasant evening light.
+
+For some minutes now neither of the lads spoke, being too much engrossed
+by pain and the strangeness of their position.
+
+"I say," said Mark at last, "you'd better come up to the Tor, and drop
+me, and I'll lend you the pony to carry your wounded arm home."
+
+"No," said Ralph quietly.  "I shall come a bit farther, and then strike
+off.  You can get safe home now."
+
+"Yes, I suppose so; but you ought to have the pony, or one of our men,
+to see you safe."
+
+"He'd finish me off," said Ralph grimly, and Mark was silent.
+
+"I say," he said at last; "I shan't say we fought."
+
+"Why?" asked Ralph, in surprise.
+
+"Because it's like bragging so, to talk of two fights.  I shall say the
+robbers attacked us, and we beat them off; then they'll get the credit
+of our wounds."
+
+"But it will not be true."
+
+"I shan't say they wounded us," replied Mark.  "If my father likes to
+think they did it, I shall let him."
+
+"I shan't," said Ralph quietly.  "I shall tell my father everything."
+
+"Well, I suppose it will be best," said Mark.  "But, I say, that fight
+doesn't count, you know.  We must begin again where we can't be
+interrupted."
+
+"When your leg's better."
+
+"Yes, and your arm's all right."
+
+"Of course."
+
+"Queer thing being such enemies, Darley, isn't it?"
+
+"Very," said Ralph quietly.
+
+"But I suppose it comes natural, though, to our families."
+
+"I have always thought so," replied Ralph.
+
+"I say, I'm glad you're not a coward, though.  They say that all the
+Darleys have been cowards."
+
+"Yes; and all the Edens too."
+
+"It's a lie--an abominable lie," cried Mark hotly.  "Do you mean to say
+I'm a coward?"
+
+"How could I, after the way you helped me to fight those ruffians this
+evening?  I thought you very brave," said Ralph gravely.
+
+"Thank ye.  That's what I thought about you.  But I think it's a pity
+you are a Darley."
+
+"Don't say that.  I am very proud to be one, but I say--"
+
+"Yes?"
+
+"Don't you think, instead of paying compliments to one another, we ought
+to go and get our wounds properly seen to?"
+
+"Yes, it would be more sensible.  You'll turn off, and go round by the
+cliff?"
+
+"Yes, where the path comes up from the river," replied Ralph.
+
+"And we'll finish that fight as soon as ever we can," said Mark.
+
+"Very well.  I suppose we must see who's best man."
+
+"Of course.--Hallo! who's this?"
+
+A figure was dimly-seen coming up through the bushes, along the track
+just mentioned, and directly after, it became fully visible as Master
+Rayburn with his fish-creel on his back, and rod on shoulder; and they
+saw the old man stop short and cry:
+
+"Shade of good Queen Bess!  What's the meaning of this?"
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FOURTEEN.
+
+MASTER RAYBURN BEGINS TO THINK.
+
+Neither of the lads answered, for a feeling of confusion which troubled
+them.  They felt abashed at being seen in each other's company; but they
+had to stop, for the old man planted himself right in the middle of the
+narrow track, where it passed between two blocks of stone, and as soon
+as the cob reached him, it began to sniff at his breast and creel, and
+stood still.  "The wolf and the lamb together," said the old man drily,
+and in the most serious manner; "but which is wolf, and which is lamb?"
+Then, without waiting for a reply, he caught sight of something in the
+dimming light beneath the trees, and said; "What's this?  Surely, my
+dear lads, you two have not been fighting?  You have--and with swords."
+
+Mark's cheeks flushed, and his eyes fell for a moment before the old
+man's piercing eyes; but he recovered himself directly, before Ralph
+could speak, and said:
+
+"Yes, we've had a desperate fight coming home.  Set upon by about a
+dozen ruffians, and if it had not been for young Darley here--"
+
+"You did as much as I did, or more," cried Ralph.
+
+"Oh, never mind who did most.  We don't know.  Had enough to do without.
+But we whipped them, Master Rayburn, and made the beggars run."
+
+"Where was this?" cried the old man.
+
+"In the vale at the foot of Ergles.  They came down from the cave
+there."
+
+"Were they a set of disbanded soldiers--those who came up to Cliff
+Castle, Ralph?"
+
+"Yes, and to the Black Tor, too," cried Mark.
+
+"I thought as much," said the old man eagerly.  "Then this accounts for
+the witches seen on the mountain, and the thefts that have taken place."
+
+"Too late, Master Rayburn," cried Mark, laughing.  "We caught that fish
+first.--Didn't we, Darley?"
+
+"Yes; we said that was it," replied Ralph.
+
+"Then I am too late; and I had made up my mind to go out that way, after
+I had taken home my fish--after dark--and watch.  So you had to run for
+it?"
+
+"Well, I don't know about that," said Mark bluntly.  "We retreated at
+last, when they got too many for us, but we charged six of 'em.--Didn't
+we, Darley?"
+
+"Yes; and upset four, and the other two ran," said Ralph modestly.  "But
+we only had to fight two at a time, and of course that made it even."
+
+"Very," said the old man drily; and his eyes sparkled in the gloom at
+the frank way in which the two deadly enemies were relating their
+adventures.
+
+"Then some more came down from up above," continued Mark, "and two more
+got up again, and the odds seemed to be too great, and we retreated."
+
+"And very wisely too," said Master Rayburn.  "But let me look at your
+hurt, Mark, lad.--Tut-tut! soaked with blood.--Wound in the thigh."
+
+"Ah!  Don't touch it," shouted the lad.  "You hurt."
+
+"This must be seen to, my dear boy.  I'll come home with you and dress
+it."
+
+"Yes do, please.  It makes me wriggle like a worm on a hook; but he's
+hurt too."
+
+"Yes, I see.  Roughly-bandaged, but, tut-tut-tut--why, the sword thrust
+has gone through.  There is blood on both sides."
+
+"But it's only through the skin, I think," said Ralph.
+
+"Only through the skin, my lad!  It must be worse than that.  But the
+other side?  You paid them for this, I hope."
+
+"Oh yes, we gave them as much as we could, but we didn't kill any one."
+
+"But we saw them carrying one away," said Ralph.
+
+"Oh yes: so we did."
+
+"The villains!  And they wounded you both like this."
+
+Mark glanced at Ralph, and Ralph glanced at him.
+
+"No," said Ralph quietly; "they did not wound us."
+
+"Then how came these injuries?" said the old man anxiously.
+
+"Oh, never mind," cried Mark pettishly; "it doesn't matter.  We got
+'em--somehow."
+
+"How was it, Ralph Darley?" said the old man sternly.
+
+"He overtook me, and we quarrelled, and fought," said the lad quietly.
+
+"Ah!"
+
+"And just in the middle of it we found that these men had surrounded
+us."
+
+"Yes, yes, yes; don't make such a fuss about it, Master Rayburn," cried
+Mark hastily.  "And then we had to join and whip the beggars, and we did
+whip 'em at last; and my leg hurts horribly, and you stand there
+talking, instead of coming home to doctor it."
+
+"Yes," said the old man, looking at the lad curiously, and then at
+Ralph.  "Come along, boy.  You, Darley, you had better come up to the
+Black Tor, and be attended to there."
+
+"No, thank you, Master Rayburn; I must make haste back.  Come and see to
+my arm when you have done his."
+
+Ralph turned upon his heel as he spoke, and hurried away through the
+bushes; while, feeling puzzled, and yet pleased and hopeful, Master
+Rayburn gave the cob its head, and walked on and up the steep zigzag
+beside his young friend, carefully avoiding all allusion to the lads'
+duel, and discussing the possibility of an expedition to drive the
+marauders out of their stronghold.
+
+"I'm not a man of war, Mark," he said; "but I shall have to carry a pike
+instead of an eel-spear against these villains.  We shall none of us be
+safe."
+
+"Oh yes, we'll talk about that to-morrow," said Mark peevishly.  "This
+hurts horribly.  I say, don't say anything to my father about my
+fighting alongside that young Darley.  I was obliged to, you see."
+
+"Of course you were, my lad!  We must all make common cause against such
+an enemy.  No, I will not say anything unless you wish me to."
+
+"Thank ye.  Father mightn't like it, you see."
+
+"But you will tell him?"
+
+"No, I think not--I don't know--well, there, not to-night.  I'm giddy,
+and feel sick.  I didn't notice it so much when I was hot and all in the
+fight, but it's very painful now.  Would you mind putting your arm round
+me?  I feel as if I should fall off."
+
+"My poor brave boy!" said the old man gently, as he supported the
+wounded lad.  "There, only a little farther.  Ah!  Hoi!  Rugg!  Dummy
+Rugg!  Here, quick!"
+
+The lad, who was perched upon a block of stone half-way up the zigzag,
+evidently watching for his young master's return, sprang down and came
+running to them.
+
+"What's the matter?" he cried hoarsely.  "Don't say Master Mark's hurt!"
+
+"Hush!  Quiet, boy!" said Master Rayburn quickly.  "Help me to get him
+into his own room without frightening Miss Mary."
+
+"Yes; but what's the matter?" cried the boy.
+
+"Been attacked--fighting--slightly wounded."
+
+"But who done it?--I know.  It was them Darleys.  Which of 'em was it?"
+
+"Quiet, I tell you, boy!  Can't you see he has fainted?  Why do you want
+to know?"
+
+"To kill him," said the lad, through his teeth.
+
+"Humph! you young savage," muttered Master Rayburn; "then you will not
+know from me.  Lead the pony carefully, Dummy," he continued aloud.
+"Where is Sir Edward? where is your young mistress?"
+
+"Out in the garden, waiting for him to come home to supper.  Who hurt
+him?"
+
+"Will you mind the pony's head, or must I come and lead him?" cried the
+old man angrily.
+
+"Yes; but I want to help Master Mark," cried the lad.
+
+"Mind the pony, sir.  Ah! here is one of the men.  Here, you are
+stronger than I am.  Lift Master Mark up carefully, so as not to jar his
+leg.  Dummy, run in and get a chair."
+
+This was done, another of the serving men coming out to see what was the
+matter, and they lifted and bore in the half-fainting lad; while Master
+Rayburn disencumbered himself of his creel and rod, and prepared to
+follow, to turn chirurgeon instead of angler, when Dummy caught him by
+the sleeve.
+
+"You won't tell me who did it?" he said sharply.
+
+"No: it is no affair of yours, boy," said the old man; and he shook him
+off, and entered the gate.
+
+"Yes, it is," muttered Dummy; and he did what he had never done before--
+sprang after the old man, entered the hall, and caught him by the
+sleeve.
+
+"You here, sir!" cried Master Rayburn.  "What is it now?"
+
+"Is Master Mark going to die?"
+
+"Yes, when he grows to be an old man.  Not now.  Go away."
+
+"Yes, I'll go away," muttered Dummy, as he slunk out, and away through
+the gate.  "But I want to know who it was.  I know it was one of them
+Darleys, and I'm going to see; and if it was, I'll kill him."
+
+As he spoke, the lad stood for a few moments thinking of what he had
+better do, and ended by dashing down the steep zigzag path leading to
+the bottom of the rock, when he made his way through the gap, and began
+to run at a dog-trot in the direction taken by Ralph a quarter of an
+hour before.
+
+Ralph, on parting from Mark and Master Rayburn, walked away quite
+briskly till he was well out of sight, and then he stopped short to lean
+against a tree and rest for a while, for he felt deadly sick.  He laid
+his left hand upon his sleeve, and felt that it was very wet; but the
+bandage had stopped the bleeding, though not the pain, which was like
+the sensation of a hot iron being plunged into his flesh, accompanied by
+throbbings which at times seemed too painful to bear.
+
+But after a few minutes' rest he went on again, light in spirit, in
+spite of the bodily suffering; and the way seemed short when he was
+walking, for his mind was full of the recollections of the day.
+
+For that day had begun well.  The walk had been delightful in the
+pleasant cool breeze which blew from the hills, and promised a ripple on
+the water of the open river he was bound to fish, and he had not been
+deceived.  In fact the grayling had risen freely to the natural fly he
+had softly thrown, and his creel had grown heavier till well on in the
+afternoon, when he had started back with his load.
+
+Then came the _pad_, _pad_ of the pony's hoofs on the soft grass, with
+an occasional click when the shoe caught upon a stone.  Then he was
+overtaken by Mark, and the encounter followed, one which was more full
+of pleasure in its memories than pain, and the lad's lips curled in a
+smile as he went over everything which had passed till they parted.
+
+Somehow these thoughts would be pleasant, although mingled with them
+came others of their next meeting.  Every now and then, though, the
+lad's progress was hindered by the throbbing of his wound, and the
+giddy, faint sensation which followed; and twice over, when his forehead
+turned damp, he threw himself down amongst the ferns to lie for a few
+minutes on the cool moist earth, with the result each time that the
+sensation of swimming and sickness passed off.
+
+Then he rose again, and plodded on, getting nearer and nearer to home;
+but the darkness increased till it became hard work to avoid the stones
+which lay about, and his way beneath the trees near the river grew
+solemn and gloomy in the extreme.
+
+Once he started as he was listening to the croaking of the frogs down
+among the sedges and rushes, for a peculiar hoarse cry arose from close
+by; but he was country boy enough to know that it was the peculiar
+sonorous squawk of a heron, evidently a visitor to the river for the
+sake of the aforesaid frogs.
+
+A little farther on, after one of his rests, just as he was starting
+again, a low whoo-whoo-whoo! was uttered close to his ear, and answered
+from a little farther on, to be apparently echoed again from the trees
+high up on the side of the cliff.
+
+But after the first startled sensation, he walked on steadily enough,
+for the cry of the brown owl was quite familiar to him, and he knew that
+it was only uttered in all probability close to some patch of ivy, where
+small birds roosted, to startle them out, ready for the sharp dash of
+their enemy's claw, from whose four-way talon clutch there was no
+escape.
+
+"How cowardly I am to-night," he said to himself.  "Everything sounds
+different.  It's being tired, and feeling the pain of my wound.  Soon be
+home now."
+
+Then he began thinking of his father, and what he would say about the
+two encounters; and in imagination he saw his stern frowning face.
+
+But he was satisfied that Sir Morton would be glad to hear the news
+about Captain Purlrose and his men, and he began to think that there
+would be some talk of attacking the gang of thieves in their
+lurking-place; for, as Master Rayburn had said, they could not be
+allowed to harbour there.
+
+Ralph gave quite a jump now, for he heard a sharp rustling sound,
+followed by the rattle of a little stone, a short distance behind him,
+and he increased his pace, with his heart beating heavily.
+
+"Just as if some one was following me," he thought, "and stepped upon a
+stone, and sent it rolling."
+
+But he soon calmed down again, though he did not slacken his pace,
+keeping on as fast as his weakness and the darkness would allow, with
+the result that it was not more than half of his ordinary rate.
+
+Again he was startled by a sound behind, this time as if a piece of dead
+wood had cracked sharply, from the weight of some one following.
+
+This time it was nearer, and succeeded by a rustling, plainly enough
+caused by some one or something forcing a way through the bushes.  Some
+one or something?  The lad felt that it must be something.  If it had
+been some one, he would have spoken; but what thing could it be?
+
+He was in a dense part of his way now, with the sky quite hidden by the
+overhanging boughs, so that it was not possible to see more than a few
+feet behind or before him, and hence he looked back in vain; and though
+he listened intently there was no heavy snorting breath, such as he
+would probably have heard if it had been pony or cow.
+
+"It's some one tracking me," thought the lad at last, as again he heard,
+very near him now, the rustle of the leaves and the flying back of
+twigs.
+
+So impressed was he now, and satisfied that whoever followed might mean
+him harm, that he essayed to draw his sword as he hurried on; but the
+sheer agony caused to the stiffened wound made him drop his hand at
+once, and trust to getting out of the wood to where the ground was more
+open, and he could reach the cliff, for he felt that now he could not be
+many hundred yards from the way leading to the step-like path cut in the
+stone.
+
+Again there was a quick rustle, as if his pursuer had tried to diminish
+the distance, and a minute later this sounded so near that, convinced of
+his follower being one of the men who had attacked them that evening,
+Ralph suddenly faced round--just when the sensation was strong that some
+one was about to leap upon him and strike him down--and shouted aloud:
+
+"Keep back, whoever you are.  I am armed."
+
+"Ralph! that you?" came from a short distance in his rear.
+
+"Yes, yes, quick!" cried the lad faintly; and he staggered on now, to
+find himself a minute later in his father's arms.
+
+"Why, Ralph, boy, what does this mean?  I have half-a-dozen men out
+hunting for you."
+
+"I'll--I'll tell you presently," panted the lad, who was bathed in
+sweat.  "Draw your sword, and be on your guard.  Some one has been
+following me this last half-hour."
+
+"Who?"
+
+"I don't know.  Be on your guard."
+
+"Not fancy, is it, my boy?" said Sir Morton, rather doubtfully.
+
+There was a sharp rustling sound, and a foot kicked a stone, as its
+owner was evidently retreating fast.
+
+"Humph!  Then some one has been following you.--Hallo, there! stop!"
+
+"Hoi! hillo!" came from a distance in answer.
+
+"Quick!" said Sir Morton.  "This way, man.  Found--found!"
+
+The cliffs echoed the words, and Sir Morton took the lad's arm and
+pressed it firmly--fortunately the left.
+
+"I beg your pardon, Ralph.  I thought you were scared by the darkness of
+the wood.  Some one was after you; but it would be folly to try and
+catch him in this gloomy place.  Why, what's the matter, boy? you are
+reeling about.  Feel faint?"
+
+"Yes," panted the lad heavily.  "I have been fighting--wounded.  Help
+me, please."
+
+Sir Morton Darley passed his arm under his son's, and helped him quickly
+along; a whistle brought Nick Garth and another man to his side; and the
+former carried the lad right up the slope to the entrance of the castle,
+where a little rest and refreshment recovered the sufferer sufficiently
+to enable him to relate why he had brought back no fish, a task he had
+hardly ended, when Master Rayburn entered to dress his second patient's
+arm.
+
+"We must put an end to such alarms as this, Master Rayburn," said Sir
+Morton angrily.
+
+"Ay; and the sooner the better," cried that gentleman, as he carefully
+re-bandaged the lad's hurt.--"I wonder," he said to himself, "whether
+Ralph has told him how he obtained his wound?  Is this the beginning of
+the end?"
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FIFTEEN.
+
+WHAT SIR MORTON SAID.
+
+Master Rayburn, the old scholar, angler, and, in a small way,
+naturalist, had no pretensions to being either physician or surgeon; but
+there was neither within a day's journey, and in the course of a long
+career, he had found out that in ordinary cases nature herself is the
+great curer of ills.  He had noticed how animals, if suffering from
+injuries, would keep the place clean with their tongues, and curl up and
+rest till the wounds healed; that if they suffered from over-eating they
+would starve themselves till they grew better; that at certain times of
+the year they would, if carnivorous creatures, eat grass, or, if
+herbivorous, find a place where the rock-salt which lay amongst the
+gypsum was laid bare, and lick it; and that even the birds looked out
+for lime at egg-laying time to form shell, and swallowed plenty of tiny
+stones to help their digestion.
+
+He was his own doctor when he was unwell, which, with his healthy,
+abstemious, open-air life, was not often; and by degrees the people for
+miles round found out that he made decoctions of herbs--camomile and
+dandelion, foxglove, rue, and agrimony, which had virtues of their own.
+He it was who cured Dan Rugg of that affection which made the joints of
+his toes and fingers grow stiff, by making him sit for an hour a day,
+holding hands and feet in the warm water which gushed out of one part of
+the cliff to run into the river, and coated sticks and stones with a
+hard stony shell, not unlike the fur found in an old tin kettle.
+
+He knew that if a man broke a leg, arm, or rib, and the bones were laid
+carefully in their places, and bandaged so that they could not move,
+nature would make bony matter ooze from the broken ends and gradually
+harden, forming a knob, perhaps, at the joining, but making the place
+grow up stronger than ever; and it took no great amount of gumption to
+grasp the fact that what was good for a cut finger was equally good for
+arm, head, leg, or thigh; that is to say, to wash the bleeding wound
+clean, lay the cut edges together, and sew and bandage them so that they
+kept in place.  With a healthy person, nature did all the rest, and
+Master Rayburn laughed good-humouredly to himself as he found that he
+got all the credit.
+
+"Nature doesn't mind," he used to say to one or other of the lads.
+"There's no vanity there, my boys; but I'm not half so clever as they
+think."
+
+But let that be as it may, Master Rayburn mended Dummy Rugg when he fell
+from top to bottom of the steep slope leading down into the lead-mine,
+getting thereby very much broken, the worst injury being a crack in his
+skull.  He "cobbled up," as he called it, a number of other injuries
+which happened to the men by pieces of rock falling upon them, slips of
+the steel picks, chops from axes, and cuts from scythes and
+reaping-hooks, the misfortunes of the men who toiled in the woods and
+fields.
+
+If a regular physician or surgeon had come there, the people would have
+laughed at him, so great was their faith in Master Rayburn, who did his
+best for the people, and never asked for payment.  In fact, his patients
+never thought of offering it to him in money, but they were not
+ungrateful, all the same.  Indeed, he used to protest against the
+numbers of presents he was always receiving, the women bringing him pats
+of butter, little mugs of cream, and the best of their apples and
+potatoes; and their husbands never killed a pig without taking something
+to Master Rayburn for the kind actions which he had performed.
+
+It fell out then, as quite a matter of course, that he went on treating
+Ralph Darley for the little hole in his arm, beneath the shoulder joint,
+and that he also dressed and bandaged Mark Eden's thigh, so that the
+injuries went on healing rapidly.
+
+It was known, too, at the Cliff Castle and the Black Tor that he was
+treating both, but the Edens never mentioned the Darleys, nor the
+Darleys the Edens, the amateur surgeon saying nothing at either place;
+and the wounds got better day by day.
+
+"I wish I could heal the old sore as easily," the old man said to
+himself; "but that wants a bigger doctor than I."
+
+Master Rayburn believed in the old saw, that a still tongue maketh a
+wise head, and he waited.
+
+But in the meantime Ralph had told his father everything about his
+encounter, and waited afterwards to hear what his father said.  In due
+time he did say something, but it was not to the effect that Mark Eden
+had behaved very gallantly in helping his son, and _vice versa_, that
+his son had shown a fine spirit in forgetting family enmity, and
+fighting against a common enemy.  He only frowned, and said, "Humph!"
+
+He said something more, though upon another occasion, when, in obedience
+to Master Rayburn's orders, Ralph was keeping quiet at home, and sitting
+in his father's room, reading, and thinking about Mark Eden,
+determining, too, that he would ask Master Rayburn how the lad was the
+next time he came, for though family pride and old teachings had kept
+him quiet, he had hoped that his doctor would volunteer the information
+which had not come.
+
+Sir Morton was poring over an old tome which dealt with alchemy and the
+transmutation of metals, in which the learned writer gravely gave his
+opinion about baser metals being turned into gold, all of which Sir
+Morton Darley thought would be very satisfactory, as he could not
+succeed in finding a profitable lead-mine on his estate, and had not
+been any more successful than his forefathers in taking possession of
+that belonging to the Edens.
+
+He had just come to the way of thinking that he would begin to buy
+ordinary lead and turn it into gold, when Ralph said suddenly:
+
+"I say, father, why do we want to be at enmity with the Edens?"
+
+Sir Morton looked up at his son, and then down at his book, as if
+expecting to find an answer to the question there.  Then he coughed to
+clear his voice, cleared it, and coughed again, which was perfectly
+unnecessary.  But still the answer did not come.  Finally, he replied:
+
+"Well, you see, my boy, we always have been at enmity with them."
+
+"Yes, I know, ever since my great, great, ever so great, grandfather's
+time."
+
+"Exactly Ralph.  That's it, my boy."
+
+"But what was the beginning of it?"
+
+"The beginning of it--er--the--er--commencement of it--er--the family
+feud.  Well--er--it was something in the way of oppression, as I have
+told you before.  A great injury inflicted by the Edens upon the
+Darleys.  But it will not do your arm any good to be fidgeting about
+that.  I want it to heal.  That can be healed; but our family feud never
+can."
+
+"Why not, father?"
+
+"Why not?  Oh, because it is contrary to nature, boy.  What a question,
+when you are suffering now from the way in which the deadly hatred of
+the Edens comes out!  Are you not wounded by a scion of the vile house?"
+
+"Yes, father; but then young Eden is suffering too in the same way, and
+I think he got the worst of it."
+
+"I'm glad of it, Ralph.  I think you behaved very bravely."
+
+"What; in fighting the robbers?"
+
+"I did not mean that.  I meant in defending yourself," said Sir Morton
+austerely.  "There, that will do: I want to go on studying this book."
+
+But Ralph was fidgety from the state of his wound, and went on again.
+
+"Couldn't the old trouble be settled by law?"
+
+"Pooh, boy!  As I have told you before, the law does not reach here
+among these mountainous wilds.  I am the law here.  I could settle the
+matter; but that man Eden would never agree to what I said."
+
+"And I suppose, father, that you would never agree to what he considered
+was the proper law."
+
+"Certainly not, Ralph," said Sir Morton impatiently.  "But why are you
+going on like this?"
+
+"Because I was thinking again how easy it would be if you and Sir Edward
+Eden were to join and attack that Captain Purlrose and his men.  You
+would be able to drive the gang out of the neighbourhood."
+
+"I shall be able to drive this fellow out of the district, my boy,
+without the help of the Edens, who ought to be driven out too, for they
+are very little better than Captain Purlrose and his men.  Stop, sir;
+what are you going to do?"
+
+"Go out, father.  It's so dull sitting here."
+
+"You had better stay in: the sun is hot, and you have been rather
+feverish.  I want you to grow quite well."
+
+"So do I, father," said the lad, smiling.
+
+"Then do what Master Rayburn advised you.  Keep perfectly quiet."
+
+"But it is such weary work doing nothing, father.  I'm sure I should get
+better if I were out in the fresh air.  Ah, there is Minnie;" for just
+then his sister came to the open window, and looked in.
+
+"Why don't you come out and sit in the shade here, Ralph?" she said.
+"Come and read with me."
+
+Ralph glanced at his father, who shrugged his shoulders and nodded, as
+much as to say, "Well, be off;" and the lad went out into the
+castle-yard, and then on to the little terrace where the new basin and
+fountain were looking bright and attractive, though still wanting in the
+fish Ralph was to have procured.
+
+Brother and sister sat down in a shady nook, and watched the glint of
+the river through the trees far below, looked over the lovely prospect
+of hill and dale; and finally Minnie's eyes rested upon the shoulder of
+the great shaley hill at whose foot the encounter with the disbanded
+soldiers had taken place.
+
+"When is father going to lead the men to drive out those dreadful
+people?" said the girl at last.
+
+"I don't know: soon, I hope.  When I'm better."
+
+"Well, you are better, Ralph."
+
+"That's what I told father.  Only a bit sore.  I'm sick of being coddled
+up."
+
+"That's because you are a boy.  You are never happy unless you are in
+the open-air."
+
+"You would not be, if you were a boy," said Ralph sharply.
+
+"Well, I don't know that I am, even as a girl.  It's dreadful.  You
+know, father has given orders that I am not to go outside the walls.  No
+walks, no rides; and my poor pony looked so reproachfully at me.  Wants
+to go out as badly as I do.  Don't you think it's being too particular?"
+
+"Well, no, Min," said Ralph thoughtfully.  "While those men are about, I
+don't think you ought to go out alone."
+
+"Now, Ralph," said the girl, pouting, "you're as bad as father.  I
+declare you are not a bit like a nice, brave, merry boy now.  You used
+to be; but ever since you've been at that great school you have been
+growing more and more serious, till you are getting to be quite an old
+man."
+
+"And quite grey," said Ralph drily.
+
+"It only wants that," said the girl, with a merry laugh.  "I declare
+that old Master Rayburn has more fun in him than you."
+
+"Wouldn't say so if you had been wounded, and had him to pull the
+bandages about."
+
+"What nonsense! he said I was to come and see him as soon as ever I
+could."
+
+"And you can't go and see him.  He wouldn't advise you to go out while
+those ruffians are yonder."
+
+"No," replied the girl, smiling frankly.  "He said I must wait till the
+wasps' nest had been burned out, and I suppose he meant the cave where
+those men are.  Oh, I wish I were a man, and could go and fight the
+wretches.  They've been robbing and frightening people in all
+directions.  They even went last night and frightened old Mistress
+Garth, Nick's mother, and took away her bag of meal."
+
+"They did that!" cried Ralph angrily.  "How do you know?"
+
+"Nick told me, and he says he means to kill the captain first time they
+meet."
+
+"Nick says so?"
+
+"Yes; but I suppose it's only boasting.  I don't think he's very brave,
+is he?"
+
+"Don't know," said Ralph thoughtfully.  "But it's quite time something
+was done."
+
+"And it was so funny, Ralph," continued the girl; "he actually said to
+me that he didn't care a bit for his mother, for she has the worst
+temper of any one he knows, and is always scolding when he goes to see
+her; but he won't have any one interfere with her, and he'll kill that
+captain for stealing the meal-bag as sure as he's alive."
+
+"Well, it shows he's a good son," said Ralph quietly.  "But you see that
+it is not safe for you to go out."
+
+"Yes," said Minnie with a sigh; "but it seems very silly.  The other day
+one was obliged to stop in because of the Edens; now it's because of
+those men."
+
+"I suppose it's as bad for the Edens as it is for us," replied Ralph,
+who became now very thoughtful; and when, soon afterwards, Minnie looked
+up to see why he did not speak, she found that his head was resting
+against the stone, beside a crenelle, and that he was fast asleep.
+
+"Poor boy!" she said softly, "he is weak yet, and soon worn-out.  It was
+very brave of him to fight as he did--with Mark Eden, I mean--against
+the men who attacked them, and for both to be wounded.  I wonder what
+Mark Eden is like.  Ralph has met him three times, he says, but he only
+growls if I begin to ask him questions.  What a pity it is, when we
+might all be so friendly and nice.  How stupid it does seem of people to
+quarrel!"
+
+
+
+CHAPTER SIXTEEN.
+
+HOW MARK'S SISTER LOST HER WHIP.
+
+Fate seemed to be determined that the young people of the rival families
+should become intimate, in spite of all the stringent rules laid down by
+the heads; for Ralph was out one day, making a round, when it occurred
+to him that he would call upon Master Rayburn, to let him see how well
+the wound was healing up, and to say a few words of thanks to the old
+man for his kindness and attention.
+
+He found the object of his visit seated in a kind of grotto, shaded by a
+great sycamore, with his doublet off, hat on the floor, and beautifully
+white sleeves rolled up, busily at work, tying up some peculiar little
+combinations of wool, hair, and feathers, to the back of a hook; and as
+the lad approached, he held up the curious object by the piece of
+horsehair to which it was tied.
+
+"Well, patient," he said, "what do you think of that?"
+
+"Nothing at all," cried the lad.  "No fish would ever take that.  What
+do you call it?"
+
+"A bumble-bee, and the fish will take it, Mr Cleversides; but not if
+they see a big lubberly boy staring at them with his arm in a sling, or
+an old grey-headed man, either, Ralph.  There, don't frown.  It's very
+nice to be a big lubberly boy; much better than being a worn-out old
+man, with not much longer to live.  Ah, you laugh at my bumble-bee, and
+it certainly is not like one, but the best I can do, and I find it a
+great bait for a chevin, if used with guile.  Take these two, Ralph,
+boy, and early some sunny morning go down behind the trees, where they
+overhang the stream, and don't show so much as your nose, let alone your
+shadow, for it would send them flying.  Then gently throw your fly."
+
+[Note: a chevin is a chub.]
+
+"How can you," said Ralph quickly, "with the boughs overhanging the
+water?"
+
+"Good, lad! what I expected you to say; but there is where the guile
+comes in.  I don't want you to throw your fly into the water, but to let
+it drop on the leaves just above it, a few inches or a foot, and then
+shake the line tenderly, till the bee softly rolls off, and drops
+naturally from a leaf, hardly making a splash.  Then you'll find that
+there will be a dimple on the water, the smacking of two lips, and the
+chevin will have taken the bait.  Then it is your fault if it is not
+laid in your creel."
+
+"Thank you, Master Rayburn; I'll try.  I haven't had a fish since I was
+wounded."
+
+"No: it would have been bad work if you had gone whipping about, and
+irritating the two little holes in your arm.  Well, how is it?"
+
+"Oh, quite well now," said the lad, as he carefully hooked the bees in
+his cap, and twisted the hair to which they were attached under the
+band; "and I've come to say how thankful I am for all you have done for
+me, and--"
+
+"That's enough, my dear boy," cried the old man warmly; "look the rest.
+And now about those wild men of the mountains; have you heard how they
+are going on?"
+
+"A little; not much."
+
+"Ah, you don't know, or you would not talk about a little.  Why, Ralph,
+boy, the country round is full of complaints of their doings.  About a
+dozen great idle scoundrels are living up at Ergles in that cave, laying
+the people for miles round under contribution; picking the fat of the
+land, and committing outrage after outrage.  Only during the past week,
+I've had to bind up two broken heads, and strap up a broken shoulder,
+where the poor fellows had made a brave fight for it--one man against
+seven or eight."
+
+"You don't mean that!" cried Ralph flushing.
+
+"But I do, boy.  They are growing worse and worse, and making themselves
+a scourge to the country."
+
+"I did not know it was so bad."
+
+"No, I suppose not, sir; and here are you people living safely in your
+castles, with plenty of stout men about you, ready to arm and defend you
+behind your walls and gates.  But if the scoundrels came and robbed you,
+perhaps you would do something.  Don't you think you ought to begin?"
+
+"Yes, that I do," cried Ralph quickly.  "My father has been talking
+about it for some time."
+
+"Yes; and so has Sir Edward Eden been talking about it for some time;
+but neither of them does anything, and the wasps' nest thrives; all the
+best things in the country are carried up there--the wasps robbing the
+bees; and I, though I am a man of peace, say that it is the duty of you
+gentlemen to burn that wasps' nest out before anything worse is done,
+for the ruffians grow more bold and daring every day, feeling, I
+suppose, that they can do these things with impunity."
+
+"Father shall do something at once," cried the lad.
+
+"That's right," cried the old man, patting his late patient on the
+shoulder.  "I don't want blood shed, and I hardly think any of your
+people would come to much harm, for, like most scoundrels of their kind,
+I believe the enemy would prove miserable cowards."
+
+"They have proved to be so," cried Ralph warmly.  "Father must act now."
+
+"I'll tell you what he ought to do, boy," said the old man, grasping his
+visitor by the arm.  "Of course he need not make friends, but he ought
+to go or send to the Black Tor, and ask Sir Edward to head so many men,
+your father doing the same; and then they could march together, and rout
+out the scoundrels."
+
+"Yes, it would be easy enough then," said Ralph sadly; "but I know my
+father too well: he would not do that."
+
+"No," said the old man, "he would not do that."
+
+The tone in which this was said roused the lad's indignation.
+
+"Well," he said hotly, "do you think this Sir Edward Eden would come and
+ask my father to join him?"
+
+"No, boy, I do not," replied the old man, "for I said something of this
+kind to Mark Eden only yesterday, when I was fishing up that way, and he
+spoke just in the same way as you do."
+
+"You saw him yesterday?" said Ralph eagerly.  "How is he?"
+
+"What's that to do with you?" said the old man rather roughly.  "You
+don't want to know how your enemy is.  But all the same, his leg is
+nearly well.  He limps a little: that is all.  Going?"
+
+"Yes," said Ralph hurriedly; "I must be off now.  I am going on about a
+mile, and coming back this way.  Perhaps I shall see you then."
+
+"Going about a mile?  Not going to see old Mother Garth?"
+
+"Yes: to take her a present from my sister.  Nick told her about his
+mother being robbed."
+
+"And your sister wants to make it up to her.  Poor old woman! she is in
+great trouble, but she will not hear of leaving her cottage up there on
+the moor; and she says that next time the men come to rob her, they'll
+find she has two pots of boiling water ready for them."
+
+Ralph laughed, and went off, crossed the river at the shallows, and
+climbed the ascent to where the old woman lived in her rough stone cot,
+in its patch of garden; and as soon as he had given his present, with an
+addition from his own purse, and the fierce old lady had secured it in
+her pocket, she turned upon him angrily, upbraiding him and his for
+allowing such outrages to be committed.
+
+"But there," she cried, when quite out of breath, "it's of no use to
+speak: there are no men now, and no boys.  When I was young, they'd have
+routed out those wretches and hung them before they knew where they
+were.  But only let them come here again, and they shall know what
+boiling water is."
+
+"They'll be well punished before long," said Ralph, as soon as he could
+get in a word.
+
+"I don't believe it," cried the old woman.  "Don't tell me!  I want to
+know what my boy, Nick, is about for not making his master do something.
+It's shameful.  But I see how it is: I shall have to go and do it
+myself."
+
+Ralph was not sorry to get away from the ungracious old dame, who stood
+at her door, shouting messages to his father about his duty and her
+intentions, till the lad was out of sight, when he could not help seeing
+the comic side of the matter, and wondered, laughingly, what his father
+would say to her if she kept her word, and came up to the castle to ask
+him why he and her son, Nick, did not go and punish those wicked men for
+coming and stealing her bag of meal.
+
+"I should like to be there," said Ralph, half-aloud, as he tramped on:
+and then his thoughts took a serious turn again, and he began to ponder
+upon the possibilities of his father and their men attacking Captain
+Purlrose, and the chances of success.
+
+"It ought to be done," thought Ralph, as he began to climb the path
+leading to the shelf upon which Master Rayburn's cottage was built,
+half-a-mile farther on, "so as to take them by surprise when part of the
+men are away.  It can hardly be called cowardly with men like them.
+Then we could hide in the cavern, and wait till the rest came back, and
+take them prisoners too.  What's that?"
+
+He listened, and made out the sound of a horse galloping, wondering the
+while who it could be.  Then his interest increased, for the track was
+narrow and stony, and ran along like a shelf beside the cliff, with a
+steep descent to the river--altogether about as dangerous a place for a
+canter as any one could choose.  But he recalled immediately how
+sure-footed the ponies of the district were, and thought no more of it
+for a few moments.  Then his face flushed as he remembered how Mark Eden
+had galloped after him.  Would it be he, and if so, now they were going
+to meet again, would it be upon inimical terms, and with drawn swords?
+
+His heart began to beat faster, and the next minute it was beating
+faster still, for he caught sight, at a curve of the track, of the pony
+and its burden, not Mark Eden, but a lady; and then his heart seemed to
+stand still in his horror at seeing that she had lost control of the
+spirited little animal, which was tearing along as hard as he could go.
+
+The next minute it was nearly abreast of Ralph, who, without thinking of
+the consequences of such an act, leaped at the rein, caught it, and was
+dragged along some twenty yards, before, snorting and trembling, the
+little animal, which he knew as Mark Eden's, stopped short, and began to
+rear.
+
+"Quick!" shouted the lad.  "I can't hold him: try and slip off."
+
+His words were heard by the frightened rider, but there was little need
+to tell her to slip off, for the pony reared again, nearly upright, the
+rider glided from the saddle over the animal's haunches, and fell
+amongst the bushes by the track, while Ralph was dragged onward again.
+
+It all occurred in a few moments, the pony stopped, reared again, made
+another bound, dropped off the track, and, as Ralph loosed his hold,
+rolled over and over down the steep slope right into the river with a
+tremendous splash, which cooled it on the instant; and it regained its
+feet, scrambled actively ashore, gave itself a shake, and then began to
+graze, as if nothing was the matter.
+
+"Mark Eden's sister," thought Ralph, as he hurriedly climbed back to the
+track, where, looking wild and scared, Mary Eden had just regained her
+feet, and was standing trembling.
+
+"Are you hurt?" he cried aloud.
+
+"Yes, dreadfully.  No: I don't think so.  Only scratched," she replied,
+half-crying.  "I couldn't stop him.  He hasn't been out lately.  He ran
+away with me.  What shall I do?" she sobbed now.  "Mark will be so
+angry.  Is his pony much hurt?"
+
+"Oh, never mind the pony," cried Ralph, taking her hand.  "Here, let me
+help you to Master Rayburn's."
+
+"But I do mind about the pony," cried the girl angrily.  "It doesn't
+matter about me.  Do you think he has broken his knees, or his legs?"
+
+"It does not seem like it," said Ralph, smiling.  "Look, he is browsing
+on the thick grass down there."
+
+"Is--is my face much scratched?"
+
+"Hardly at all," said Ralph.
+
+"Then thank you so for stopping him; I was so frightened.  Ah, look!
+there's Master Rayburn."
+
+She clapped her hands with delight, as she caught sight of the old man,
+hatless, and with his white hair flying, running down the path.  Then
+turning, back to Ralph, she said, naively:
+
+"Please, who are you?  Oh, I know now.  I haven't seen you for two
+years, and--"
+
+She shrank away from him in a peculiarly cold and distant manner, and at
+that moment Master Rayburn panted up.
+
+"Much hurt, my dear?" he cried excitedly, as he caught the girl in his
+arms.
+
+"No, no, I think not," she said, beginning to sob anew.
+
+"Thank God! thank God!" cried the old man fervently.--"Hah!  My heart
+was in my mouth.  Why can't people be content to walk?  Come back home
+with me, my child.  Here, Ralph Darley, how was it?  Did you stop the
+brute?"
+
+"I tried to," said the lad quietly, "but I couldn't hold him long."
+
+"Long enough to save her, my lad," cried the old man, looking from one
+to the other in a peculiar way.--"How strange--how strange!" he
+muttered.
+
+Then aloud, in an abrupt way:
+
+"There, never mind the pony.  You be off home, sir.  I'll take care of
+this lady."
+
+Ralph coloured a little, and glanced at the girl, and as she met his
+eyes, she drew herself up stiffly.
+
+"Yes, sir," she said, "Master Rayburn will take care of me.  Thank you
+for stopping my pony."
+
+She bowed now, in the stately way of the period, clung closely to the
+old man, turning her back upon her rescuer, who unnecessarily bowed, and
+walked on up the steep path, wondering that the pony had not come down
+headlong before.
+
+Then he felt disposed to look back, but his angry indignation forbade
+that, and he hurried on as fast as he could on his way home, passing
+Master Rayburn's cottage, and then, a hundred yards farther on, coming
+suddenly upon a riding-whip, which had evidently been dropped.  The lad
+leaped at it to pick it up, but checked himself, and gave it a kick
+which sent it off the path down the slope toward the river.
+
+"I'm not going to pick up an Eden's whip," he said proudly.  "Just like
+her brother," he muttered, as he went on faster and faster, to avoid the
+temptation of running back to pick it up.  "They are a proud, evil
+race," as father said.  "What did I want to interfere for, and stop the
+pony?  It was looked upon as an insult, I suppose.  I don't like the
+Edens, and I never shall."
+
+Ralph's adventures for that day were not ended.  A quarter of a mile
+farther on he heard footsteps in front.  Some one was running, and at a
+turn of the track a lad came into sight, whom he recognised as Dummy
+Rugg, one of the mine lads.  The pair came closer quickly, and Ralph saw
+that he was recognised, and that the boy was scowling at him, passing
+him with rather an evil look, but stopping the next minute, and running
+back after him.  As soon as he heard the steps returning, Ralph faced
+round, his left hand seeking the sheath of his sword, to bring it round
+in case he should want to draw.  But the next minute he saw that the lad
+had no evil intent.
+
+"Look here," cried Dummy, "did you see a young lady on a pony?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"Was it going fast?"
+
+"As fast as it could go," said Ralph haughtily.
+
+"Not running away wi' her?"
+
+"Yes," said Ralph, rather enjoying the boy's anxiety, in his ruffled
+state.
+
+"I knowed it would: I knowed it would!" cried the boy wildly; "and she
+would have it out.  Here! gone right on?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"Ah!  And you never tried to stop it.  Oh, wait till I see you again!"
+
+Ralph did not feel in the humour to stop and explain to one who had
+threatened him so offensively, and he would have felt less so still if
+he had known that Dummy Rugg had followed him that night through the
+dark woods, till he met his father.
+
+"Let him find out for himself," he muttered.  "I have nothing to do with
+the Edens, and we can none of us ever be friends."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER SEVENTEEN.
+
+DUMMY TURNS STUNT.
+
+Dummy Rugg caught the pony, after seeing that his young mistress was
+unhurt at Master Rayburn's cottage; and, perfectly calm now, the girl
+insisted upon remounting, the old man opposing her, until Dummy gave him
+a curious look or two, and a nod of the head.
+
+"And there is no need whatever for you to go up home with me, Master
+Rayburn," she said.  "It is all uphill now, and the pony will not run
+away again."
+
+"Very well, Mistress Obstinacy," said the old man, smiling and patting
+her cheek, before helping her on the pony; "but I feel as if I ought to
+see you home safely."
+
+"There is no need, indeed," cried the girl.  "Goodbye, and thank you.
+I'm afraid I frightened you."
+
+"You did, my child, terribly.  More than you frightened yourself.  I was
+afraid that the little girl who used to ask for rides on _my_ foot would
+be killed."
+
+"But it was only a gallop, Master Rayburn," said the girl, leaning
+forward to receive the old man's kiss.  "Please, if you see Mark, don't
+say anything about it, or he will not lend me his pony again.--Now
+Dummy, let go the rein."
+
+"Come on!" growled the lad, leading the frisky little animal, and Master
+Rayburn chuckled a little, for the boy bent his head, rounded his
+shoulders, and paid not the slightest heed to the order he had received.
+
+"Do you hear, Dummy?  Let go."
+
+Dummy let go of the rein by passing his arm through, and thrust his hand
+into his pocket.
+
+"Do you hear me, sir?" cried the girl imperiously.  "Let go of that rein
+directly."
+
+"Have let go," grumbled the boy.
+
+"Go away from his head, and walk behind."
+
+"Run away agen if I do," said Dummy.
+
+"He will not," cried the girl angrily.  "I shall hold him in more
+tightly."
+
+"Haven't got strength enough."
+
+"I have, sir.  How dare you!  Let go."
+
+"Nay: Master Mark would hit me if I did, and Sir Edward'd half-kill me."
+
+"What nonsense, sir!  Let go directly."
+
+Dummy shook his big head, and trudged on by the pony.
+
+"Oh!" cried the girl, with the tears of vexation rising in her eyes.  "I
+will not be led, as if I were a little child.  Go behind, sir,
+directly."
+
+"Nay," growled Dummy.
+
+"Let go, sir, or I'll beat you with the whip.--Ah! where is it?"
+
+"Beat away," said Dummy.
+
+"I really will, sir, if you don't let go."
+
+Dummy laughed softly, and Mary Eden could not see his face, but she saw
+his shoulders shaking; and in her anger she leaned forward and tried to
+drag the rein from the lad's arm.
+
+"You'll have him off the path agen if you don't mind, Mistress Mary."
+
+"Where is my whip?  I've lost my whip," cried the girl.
+
+"Good job--for me," said the boy, with a little laugh.
+
+"If you don't let go of that rein, directly, sir, I'll make my brother
+beat you," cried Mary angrily.
+
+"You won't tell him he ran away," said the boy, without turning his
+head.
+
+"Then my father shall, sirrah!"
+
+"Won't tell him neither, mistress."
+
+"Then I'll tell him you were rude and impertinent to me, sirrah, and
+he'll have you horsewhipped for that."
+
+"Master Mark's sister couldn't tell a lie with her pretty little lips,"
+said the boy quietly, and never once looking round.  "Pony's too fresh,
+and I won't see my young mistress get into trouble again--so there!"
+
+Mary Eden flushed with annoyance, and tried to stamp her foot, but only
+shook the stirrup, and sat still for a few moments, before trying
+cajolery.
+
+"The pony's quite quiet now, Dummy," she said gently.  "Let him have his
+head again--there's a good boy."
+
+Dummy shook his own, and Mary bit her red lip, and made it scarlet.
+
+"But I shouldn't like to be seen led up home like this, Dummy," she said
+softly.  "It looks as if I can't ride."
+
+"Every one knows you can ride beautiful, mistress."
+
+"But please let go now."
+
+"Nay: won't."
+
+"I'll give you some money, Dummy."
+
+"Wouldn't for two donkey panniers full o' gold--there!" cried the lad.
+"Come on."
+
+This to the pony, and then the boy checked the cob.
+
+"That your whip, mistress?" he said, turning and wagging his head
+sidewise towards where, half-a-dozen yards down the steep slope, the
+whip lay, where Ralph had kicked it on to a clump of brambles.
+
+"Yes, yes; get it for me, please," cried the girl eagerly.
+
+Dummy drew his arm from the pony's rein, leaped off the shelf path, and
+lowered himself step by step toward the whip; and the girl, after
+waiting a few seconds, with her eyes flashing with satisfaction, shook
+the rein, kicked at her steed's ribs, and did all she could to urge it
+forward.
+
+"Go on--go on!" she whispered sharply.  Then, as this was of no avail,
+she began to saw the bit to and fro in its mouth, but only made the
+animal swing its head from side to side in response to each drag,
+keeping all four legs planted out firmly like a mule's, and obstinately
+refusing to move.
+
+"Oh, you wicked wretch!" cried the girl angrily; "go on--go on!"
+
+At the first efforts she made to force the pony on and leave him behind,
+Dummy turned sharply, and made a bound to catch at the rein; but as soon
+as he grasped the stubborn creature's mood--knowing its nature by
+heart--he chuckled softly, and went on down to where the whip lay,
+recovered it as deliberately as he could, and began to climb the slope
+again.
+
+"It aren't no good, Miss Mary," he said; "he won't go till I get back to
+his head."
+
+"Go on--go on, sir!" cried the girl angrily, as she saw her last chance
+of escape dying away; and then, hardly able to restrain the tears of
+vexation, for Dummy climbed back on to the track, went to his old place
+by the pony's head, and handed her the whip.
+
+Mary snatched it in an instant, and struck the pony a sharp blow, which,
+instead of making it leap forward, had the opposite effect; for it
+backed, and but for Dummy seizing the rein once more, its hind-legs
+would have gone over the edge.
+
+"Look at that, mistress," said the boy quietly; "see what you nearly
+did;" and, slipping his arm through once more, he walked on, cheek by
+jowl with the pony, which seemed on the most friendly terms with him,
+swinging its nose round and making little playful bites at his stout
+doublet.
+
+"Now, sir," cried Mary angrily, "I have my whip, and if you do not leave
+the pony's head directly, and come round to the back, I'll beat you."
+
+"Nay, not you," said the boy, without looking round.  "Why, if I did,
+the pony would only turn about and follow me."
+
+"He would not."
+
+"There, then, see," said the boy; and slipping out his arm, he turned
+and walked back, the pony pivoting round directly.  "Told you so," said
+Dummy, and he resumed his old place, with his arm through the rein.
+
+"You told him to turn round, sir."
+
+"Nay, never spoke to him, Miss Mary.--There, it aren't no good to be
+cross with me; I shan't leave you till you're safe home."
+
+The girl, flushed with passion, leaned forward, and struck the lad
+sharply over the shoulders three times.
+
+"There, sir," she cried; "what do you say to that?"
+
+"Thank ye," replied the boy coolly.  "Frighten away the flies."
+
+Whish-whish-whish, came the whip through the air.
+
+"Now then," cried Mary; "what do you say now?"
+
+"Hit harder, mistress," said the boy, with a chuckle; "that only
+tickles."
+
+"Oh!" cried Mary, in a burst of passion.  "I did like you, Dummy, but
+you're a nasty, ugly old thing;" and she subsided in her saddle, sobbing
+with vexation, while Dummy rounded his shoulders a little more, and
+plodded on in silence, with the pony's shoes tapping the stony path, as
+it playfully kept on making little bites at different parts of the boy's
+clothes.
+
+"'Taren't no use to be cross with me, mistress," said the boy at last.
+"Can't help it.  You don't know, and I do.  S'pose he runs off again,
+and Master Mark says to me, `Why didn't you lead her home?' what am I to
+say?"
+
+Mary sat gazing straight before her, and had to ride ignominiously back
+to the zigzags leading up to the top of the Black Tor, where she
+dismounted, and Dummy led the pony to its underground stable.
+
+"I shan't tell Master Mark," said the boy to the pony, as he took off
+bridle and saddle; "and you can't, Ugly; and she won't neither, so
+nobody'll never know."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER EIGHTEEN.
+
+MASTER RAYBURN ADVISES.
+
+Captain Purlrose and his merry men had found a place just to their
+liking, where they lived like pigs in a hole of the earth, and as
+voraciously.  He chuckled and crowed as they ate and drank, and waited
+till their stock of provisions began to grow low, and then started off
+upon a fresh expedition, to gather tribute, as he called it.  He did not
+expose himself to any risks, but kept his ascendancy over his men by
+sheer cunning and ability in making his plans, leading them to where
+they could come quite unexpectedly upon some lonely cottage or
+farmhouse, ill-use and frighten the occupants nearly to death, adding
+insult to injury by loading the spoil of provisions, or whatever it
+pleased them to take, on the farmer's horses, leading them away, and
+after unloading them at the cave, setting them adrift.
+
+The captain laughed at all threats, for he felt that no one would dare
+to follow him to his stronghold; and if an attack were made, he knew
+that he could easily beat it off.  The only two people near who were at
+all likely to trouble him were his old captain, Sir Morton Darley, and
+Sir Edward Eden.
+
+"And they'll talk about it, and and threats, and never come."
+
+He seemed to be right, for as report after report of raids being made,
+here and there in the neighbourhood of the two strongholds reached their
+owners, Sir Morton Darley would vow vengeance against the marauders, and
+then go back to his books; and Sir Edward Eden would utter a vow that he
+would hang Captain Purlrose from the machicolations over the gateway at
+the Black Tor, and then he would go into his mining accounts, and hear
+the reports of his foreman, Dan Rugg, about how many pigs there were in
+the sty--that is to say, pigs of lead in the stone crypt-like place
+where they were stored.
+
+And so time went on, both knights having to listen to a good many
+upbraidings from Master Rayburn, who visited and scolded them well for
+not combining and routing out the gang from their hole.
+
+"I wish you would not worry me, Rayburn," said Sir Morton one day, in
+Ralph's presence.  "I don't want to engage upon an expedition which must
+end in bloodshed.  I want to be at peace, with my books."
+
+"But don't you see that bloodshed is going on, and that these ruffians
+are making the place a desert?"
+
+"Yes," said Sir Morton, "it is very tiresome.  I almost wish I had taken
+them into my service."
+
+"And made matters worse, for they would not have rested till you had
+made war upon the Edens."
+
+"Yes," said Sir Morton, "I suppose it would have been so."
+
+"Why not get the men quietly together some night, father, and if I went
+round, I'm sure I could collect a dozen who would come and help--men
+whose places have been robbed."
+
+"That's right, Ralph; there are people as much as twenty miles away--
+twelve men?  Five-and-twenty, I'll be bound."
+
+"Well, I'll think about it," said Sir Morton; and when Master Rayburn
+walked home that day, Ralph bore him company part of the way, and
+chatted the matter over with him.
+
+"I'm getting ashamed of your father, Ralph, lad.  He has plenty of
+weapons of war, and he could arm a strong party, and yet he does
+nothing."
+
+"I wish he would," said the lad.  "I don't like the idea of fighting,
+but I should like to see those rascals taken."
+
+"But you will not until your father is stirred up by their coming and
+making an attack upon your place."
+
+"Oh, they would not dare to do that," cried Ralph.
+
+"What! why, they are growing more daring day by day; and mark my words,
+sooner or later they'll make a dash at the Castle, and plunder the
+place."
+
+"Oh!" ejaculated Ralph, as he thought of his sister.
+
+"I wish they would," cried the old man angrily, "for I am sick of seeing
+such a state of things in our beautiful vales.  No one is safe.  It was
+bad enough before, with the petty contemptible jealousies of your two
+families, and the fightings between your men.  But that was peace
+compared to what is going on now."
+
+"Don't talk like that, Master Rayburn," said Ralph warmly.  "I don't
+like you to allude to my father as you do."
+
+"I must speak the truth, boy," said the old man.  "You feel it now; but
+some day, when you are a man grown, and your old friend has gone to
+sleep, and is lying under the flowers and herbs and trees that he loved
+in life, you will often think of his words, and that he was right."
+
+Ralph was silent.
+
+"I am not a man of war, my boy, but a man of peace.  All the same,
+though, whenever either your father or young Mark Eden's arms his men to
+drive these ruffians out of our land, I am going to gird on my old
+sword, which is as bright and sharp as ever, to strike a blow for the
+women and children.  Yes, for pretty Minnie Darley, and Mary Eden too.
+For I love 'em both, boy, and have ever since they were bairns."
+
+Ralph went back home to Cliff Castle, thinking very deeply about the old
+man's words, and wishing--and planning in a vague way--that he and Mark
+Eden could be friendly enough to act in some way together without the
+help or knowledge of their fathers, and make an attack upon these men,
+so as to put an end to a state of things which kept all women-kind
+prisoners in their homes, and the men in a state of suspense as to when
+next they should be attacked and plundered of all they had.
+
+It was only natural that Master Rayburn should talk in an almost similar
+way to Mark Eden and his father, but only for Sir Edward to promise and
+not perform.  And one day the old man actually took Ralph's idea, and
+said suddenly to Mark:
+
+"Look here, young fellow, why don't you take the bit in your teeth,
+collect your men quietly, get Ralph Darley to do the same, and you boys
+go together and thrash those ruffians out, kill them, or take them
+prisoners.  Old as I am, I'll come and help."
+
+"Yes, why not?" cried Mark eagerly.  "No," he said directly; "the
+Darleys would not and could not join us even if I were willing; and I'm
+not."
+
+Old Master Rayburn's words went deeper into the breasts of the two lads
+than they knew.  Their natures were in those early days rather like
+tinder, and in his angry flint and steely way, the old man had struck a
+spark into each, which lay there latent, waiting to be blown into a hot
+glow; and who should perform that office but Captain Purlrose himself?
+
+It was in this way.  One bright morning, Sir Edward was examining a
+young partly-broken horse that had been reared in the pastures across
+the river, and expressed himself delighted with its appearance.
+
+"What do you say to it, Mark?" he cried.  "Not strong enough to carry
+me, but I should think it would suit Mary exactly."
+
+"Couldn't be better, father," said the lad, though he felt a little
+disappointed, for he half expected that his father would have given it
+to him.
+
+"Call her, then, and she shall try it.  And by the way, Mark, there is
+that other--that chestnut--which will do for you."
+
+The lad flushed with pleasure, for he had fully believed that his father
+intended the handsome, strongly made chestnut for his own use.  Mary
+Eden was fetched, came out, and tried the gentle, slightly-built
+palfrey, and the chestnut was brought too, proving everything that could
+be desired.
+
+"There!" said Sir Edward, after their paces had been tried in one of the
+meadows; "now you are both better mounted than any young people in the
+Midlands, so go and have a good round together, and get back well before
+dark.  Don't distress the horses, and go right away, and make a round to
+the west, so as not to go near Ergles.  Not that the scoundrels would
+dare to attack you."
+
+Ten minutes after, brother and sister were riding slowly along the track
+on the other side of the river, Mary enjoying the change after being
+shut up for some weeks; and in consequence, the round was extended to a
+greater distance than the pair had intended.  It was getting toward
+dark, and they were approaching one of the narrow ravines through which
+the river ran, one which hardly gave room for the horse track as well,
+when Mary said merrily:
+
+"You must take the blame, Mark, for we shall not be home by dusk."
+
+"Oh yes, we shall," he replied.  "Once we are through these rocks, we'll
+cut right across country, and--who are those people in front?"
+
+"Carriers, with pack horses and donkeys," said his sister; "and they
+have heavy loads too."
+
+Mark looked long and hard at the party, which was partly hidden by the
+trees, and then agreed with his sister.
+
+"Yes," he said; "the horses are loaded with sacks of corn seemingly."
+
+The people with their stores of provender were some distance ahead, and
+Mark thought no more of them, for, soon after, his attention was taken
+up by a group of men behind them a few hundred yards, walking, and
+coming on hurriedly, as if to overtake them.
+
+"Let's ride on faster, Mary," he said rather quickly.
+
+"Why?  What is the matter?"
+
+"Nothing now; only I don't quite like the look of the men behind."
+
+"Not robbers, are they?"
+
+"Oh no, I think not; only we hear so much about Captain Purlrose's men,
+it sets one thinking that every man one sees is a marauder.  But it
+would not matter if they were; we could soon leave them behind."
+
+They rode on, entering the straits, as the place was called from the
+river contracting, as it did in several other places, and running
+between two upright walls of rock.  The men were some distance behind,
+and they had ceased to trouble about them, when, to Mark's
+consternation, on passing round one of the curves in the track, he found
+that there in front the narrowest part was blocked by the horses with
+their loads; and a something in the aspect of the party of men in charge
+of the laden beasts slightly startled him, for he thought them
+suspiciously like some of Purlrose's followers.
+
+The next minute he was awake to the fact that they were in danger, for
+from behind a block of stone a slight figure, whose hands were bound
+with cords, and who made Mark stare, suddenly started to his side,
+shouting:
+
+"Ride for it! ride!  You are in a trap."
+
+There was no time for hesitation.  Two men dashed after the prisoner
+they had made, and in another instant they would have had him, but for
+Mark's quick movement.  He caught his sister's rein, touched his horse's
+side with the spurs, and the two active animals sprang between the men
+and their quarry as they were sharply turned.
+
+"Lay hold of my nag's mane, Darley," he shouted to the prisoner, who
+held up his bound hands, and caught at the dense mass of hair,
+succeeding in holding on, while Mark now drew his sword.
+
+"Oh Mark!" cried his sister, "is there any danger?"
+
+"Not if you sit fast," he cried.--"Can you keep up if we canter?"
+
+"Try," said the prisoner excitedly.  "If not, go on, and save
+yourselves."
+
+The horses broke into a sharp canter, keeping well together, as the men
+they had seen following them with drawn swords, and joined up across the
+narrow way, shouted to them to stop.
+
+Mark's reply to this was a yell of defiance.
+
+"Sit fast, Mary," he cried.  "They must go down before your horse."
+
+The girl made no answer, but crouched lower in her saddle, as they rode
+on, Mark in his excitement pressing home his spurs, and causing his
+horse to make a frantic leap.  But there was no collision; the men
+leaped off to right and left to avoid the charge, and the next moment
+they were behind.
+
+"Well done!" cried Mark excitedly.  "Well done, six!  Ah!--Here, canter
+on, Mary.  I'll soon overtake you."
+
+He checked and turned his own steed, to dash back, for he had suddenly
+found that the bound given when he used his spurs was too much for Ralph
+Darley's hold on the mane, and he had turned, to see the lad lying in
+the track with the men about to seize him and drag him away.
+
+Without a moment's hesitation, Mark charged at the enemy again, and as
+they fled he chased them, sword in hand, for some little distance before
+once more turning to rejoin Ralph, who had struggled to his feet, ready
+to cling once more to the horse's mane, a task made more easy by Mark
+cutting through the bonds with his sword.
+
+Mary was waiting a little farther back, and the trio had to go back some
+distance to reach a fresh track across country, the enemy making no sign
+of pursuit, but getting on with their plunder.
+
+"They completely deceived me," Ralph told his companions.  "I took them
+for carriers."
+
+"Ah! as I did," said Mark grimly.
+
+"And when it was too late, I saw my mistake, for they seized and bound
+me, and," added the lad bitterly, "they have got my sword and belt."
+
+Ralph walked by his companions almost in silence the rest of the time
+that they were together, both Mark and his sister appearing troubled by
+his presence, and it seemed a great relief to all when a path was
+reached which would enable Ralph to reach Cliff Castle, the others
+having some distance farther to go to reach an open part passable by
+their steeds.
+
+"I thank you, Master Mark Eden," he said quietly; and then, raising his
+cap to Mary Eden, he leapt over the stones which led to the top of a
+slope, and soon disappeared from their sight.
+
+"What were you thinking, Mark?" said Mary, breaking the silence at last.
+
+"That this would not be a bad place if we had no enemies.  What were you
+thinking?"
+
+"Plenty of things," said the girl sadly.
+
+"Well, tell me some."
+
+"I'm tired, and hungry, and thirsty.  It will soon be dark.  Father will
+be angry because we have been so long; and I am getting frightened."
+
+"What of?" said Mark sharply.
+
+"Of meeting with the robbers again."
+
+"I should almost like to," cried Mark fiercely.
+
+"Oh Mark!" cried the girl in dismay.
+
+"Well, if you were not here," he said, with a laugh.
+
+"It's getting too bad.  Once upon a time there was only the Darleys to
+mind.  Now these people--this Captain Purlrose and his men--seem to
+belong to the land, and father will not fight them.  Oh, if I only were
+master, what I would do!  There, canter, and let's get home.  I want to
+think."
+
+Home was reached, and Sir Edward made acquainted with the encounter, at
+which he frowned, but said very little that night, except once, when he
+suddenly broke out petulantly:
+
+"It seems, Mark, as if you were always running against this boy of
+Darley's.  Have the goodness in future to go some other way."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER NINETEEN.
+
+A COUNCIL OF WAR.
+
+"How can I help it?" said Mark one morning, as he was sauntering down by
+the river.  "I did not mean to meet him, and here he is again.  Hallo!
+he has got a fresh sword."
+
+The lad instinctively clapped his hand to his side, to feel if he had
+his own buckled on, though of late, consequent upon the troubled state
+of the country round, he had never thought of stirring without it.
+
+"Mark Eden!" said Ralph to himself, as he caught sight of his enemy.
+"Then I suppose now it is going to be our fight.  Very well: it is none
+of my seeking, and I don't think we shall have Captain Purlrose to stop
+it."
+
+They came to a stand about a yard apart, and delivered themselves each
+of a short nod, but for some moments neither spoke.
+
+"Well," said Mark at last, "are you ready?"
+
+"Yes," replied Ralph; "here or somewhere among the trees."
+
+"Of course.  We don't want to be seen."
+
+They walked off side by side till they reached a patch of grass, fairly
+level and free from stones, where they flung their caps on the ground,
+and drew their swords; a dove high up in view of the cliff breaking out,
+as if ironically, with a soft, gentle coo.  But their minds were too
+much occupied with war to think of the bird of peace.  Then all at once
+Mark rested his point upon the toe of his high boot.
+
+"Look here," he said; "if I stop to say something now, will you promise
+me that you will not think it an excuse to keep from fighting?"
+
+"Let me hear what it is," said Ralph coldly; and Mark flushed and raised
+his point again.
+
+"No!" he cried.  "Yes: I will say it, and you may think I'm a coward if
+you like.  I don't care."
+
+"What is it?" said Ralph, making a dimple on the toe of his boot with
+his sword point.
+
+"Well, it's this," said Mark; "and mind, I'm speaking to you as an
+enemy."
+
+"Of course," said Ralph.
+
+"Old Master Rayburn said to me, that as my father did not put a stop to
+the doings of this Captain Purlrose, I ought to do it."
+
+"That's exactly what he said to me."
+
+Mark hesitated for a moment or two, and then, as if speaking with an
+effort, he blurted out:
+
+"And thought I ought to join you, each getting together some men, and
+going and taking the ruffians by surprise."
+
+"Yes; and he said all that to me."
+
+"Oh!  Well, it's quite impossible for us to fight together as friends,
+isn't it?"
+
+"Quite," cried Ralph.
+
+"We did once, though," suggested Mark.
+
+"Yes, so we did.  Well, couldn't we again if we tried?"
+
+"I don't know," said Mark thoughtfully.  "We should have to do it in
+secret if we did."
+
+"Oh yes; nobody must know, or it would be stopped."
+
+"Well, I've thought a deal about it.  What do you say?  Shall we try?"
+
+"I will, if you will."
+
+"And you won't think I don't want to fight you now?"
+
+"Well, I can't help thinking that.  You don't want to, do you?"
+
+Mark frowned, and was silent for a few moments, before saying hurriedly:
+
+"I want to fight the enemy of my house, but I don't want to fight you in
+particular.  You see, it seems strange, after we've fought together
+against another enemy."
+
+"It doesn't seem strange to me," said Ralph quietly; "it seems stupid."
+
+"But I'm not afraid."
+
+"I don't think I am," said Ralph.  "I think we showed we were not afraid
+when I wounded you."
+
+"I wounded you too," said Mark hotly.
+
+"Yes.  Well, then, don't let's fight this morning."
+
+Mark sheathed his weapon, and Ralph did the same.
+
+"Now then," said the former, "how many men could you get together?"
+
+"Nick Garth, Ram Jennings, and six more."
+
+"Eight," said Mark, flushing proudly.  "I could get Dan Rugg, Dummy
+Rugg--he's only a lad, but he's stronger than I am.  Oh yes: and
+fourteen more at least."
+
+"That would not be fair.  If you agreed to come and attack the men at
+Ergles, you would have to bring eight.  But could you get swords and
+pikes for them?"
+
+"Oh yes--for five times as many.  How about yours?"
+
+"We've plenty of arms.  They're old, but very sharp and good."
+
+"And could you depend on your fellows to fight?" said Mark.
+
+"Oh yes," said Ralph, smiling; "they hate these people, and they'd rush
+at them like dogs would at wolves."
+
+"So would ours," cried Mark.  "There isn't one of our men who hasn't had
+some relative or friend attacked and ill-used or robbed."
+
+"Sixteen and ourselves would be plenty."
+
+"And then there's Master Rayburn."
+
+"No," said Ralph quickly; "he's getting a very old man, and I don't
+think he ought to go.  Let's do it all secretly, and make the men vow
+not to say a word.  Nobody else must know."
+
+"When would you go?" said Mark, nodding his head in agreement.
+
+"They say you should always strike when the iron is hot."
+
+"Well, it's hot enough now," cried Mark eagerly.  "What do you say to
+to-morrow night."
+
+"Why not to-night?" said Ralph.  "I'm willing.  Then we'll go to-night.
+What time?"
+
+"It ought to be after our people are gone to bed.  We should have to
+come out unknown."
+
+"Yes, I forgot that.  Then it would have to be ten o'clock first, and it
+would take us quite an hour to get quietly up to the mouth of the cave."
+
+"Yes, with a lantern under a cloak, and every man a torch," said Ralph.
+
+"Oh, I say, you are good at this sort of thing," cried Mark eagerly.  "I
+shouldn't have thought of that."
+
+"We couldn't fight in the dark; we shouldn't know friends from foes."
+
+"We should know our own men, and of course your men would be enemies to
+my men; but, of course, we shouldn't want to fight, but to know Purlrose
+and his men.  Yes, we must have pitch torches.  I can bring any number
+of them, for we use them sometimes in the big parts of the mine, where
+the smoke doesn't matter.  Well, it all seems easy enough.  I don't
+believe there'll be a door to batter down, only a curtain across to keep
+the wind out, and it's a very narrow place, I remember.  I went just
+inside once."
+
+"I went in fifty yards or more, with Nick Garth," said Ralph, "and we
+had candles.  We were looking for lead, but it was all stone shells."
+
+"Oh, there's no lead there," said Mark confidently.  "We've got all the
+lead worth working at the Black Tor."
+
+"Yes, I'm afraid so; but there's a warm spring of water in there, and
+from where we stopped, you could hear water running and falling, ever so
+far-off."
+
+"But what was it like, as far as you went in?"
+
+"Just as if the mountain had been cracked, and both sides of the crack
+matched, only sometimes they were two feet apart, and sometimes twenty
+or more, making big chambers."
+
+"Yes; some of our mine's like that," said Mark thoughtfully.  "I say,
+enemy: think they set any sentries?"
+
+"No, I don't believe they would."
+
+"Then we'll rout them out; and if we can't do that, we'll drive them
+farther in, and pile up big stones at the entrance, and starve them till
+they surrender."
+
+"Yes," cried Ralph eagerly, as he looked at his companion with the same
+admiration Mark had displayed when he had proposed taking the torches.
+"Capital: for the place is so big, that I don't believe we could find
+them all.  Yours will be the way."
+
+"Well, I think it is right," said Mark suddenly; "but we must catch old
+Purlrose to-night."
+
+"We will if we can," said Ralph.
+
+"Well then, that's all.  It's as easy as easy.  All we've got to do is
+to get our best men together, and meet--Ah! where shall we meet?"
+
+"At Steeple Stone, half-way there.  That will be about the same distance
+for you to come as for us."
+
+"That's good," cried Mark gleefully.  "But we must have a word to know
+each other by.  What do you say to `foes?'"
+
+"Oh, that won't do," said Ralph.  "`Friends?'"
+
+"But we're not friends; we're--we're--what are we."
+
+"Allies," said Ralph quietly.
+
+"Why not that, then?  Yes, of course.  `Allies.'  Can't be better."
+
+"`Allies,' then," said Ralph.
+
+"Well, what next?"
+
+"To get the stuff together to fight with," replied Ralph.
+
+"What, the men?  Yes, of course.  Then we'd better see to it at once."
+
+"Yes, in a very quiet way, so that no one knows," said Ralph.
+
+"And meet at the Steeple Stone about half-an-hour after our people are
+gone to bed."
+
+"And the first who are there to wait for the others."
+
+"Oh, of course," cried Mark.  "Fair play; no going first, and doing the
+work.  That would mean a fresh quarrel."
+
+"When I fight, I fight fair," said Ralph proudly.
+
+"I didn't mean to doubt it," said Mark apologetically.  "I say: this is
+more sensible than for us two to fight now."
+
+"Think so?"
+
+"Yes: oh yes; only, of course, our fight has to come.  Yes, when these
+people are cleared off."
+
+"We can't have three sets of enemies," said Ralph gravely; "and I can't
+help thinking that if we do not act, they will get more and more daring,
+and drive us out."
+
+"Pooh!" said Mark defiantly.
+
+"Ah, I laughed at the idea at first; but they might take Cliff Castle or
+Black Tor by surprise some night."
+
+"Well, they might take Cliff Castle," said Mark, in rather a
+contemptuous tone, "but not the Black Tor.  And they shan't even try to
+take either," he added quickly, as if repenting his words.  "We'll
+surprise them, and to-night."
+
+"One moment," said Ralph.  "We must be careful, for it's quite possible
+that some of the ruffians may be out on an expedition, and if we met
+them in the dark, it might cause a serious mistake."
+
+"We'll settle all that when we meet," said Mark.  "`Allies,' then--
+to-night."
+
+"`Allies'--to-night," said Ralph; and after stiffly saluting, in the
+style taught by their fencing masters, the two lads separated, each
+making for his own home.
+
+Mark's task proved easy.  He went straight to the mine, descended, and
+found Dummy.
+
+"Coming to go right through the cave beyond the big waterfall, Master
+Mark?" cried the lad eagerly.
+
+"No," replied Mark shortly.  "Where's your father?"
+
+"Right away down the mine, in the new lead, Master Mark," said the lad
+in a disappointed tone.  "Aren't you never coming to have a hunt?"
+
+"Oh yes, some day."
+
+"That's what you always say.  There's lots to see and find out.  You
+know where that water is."
+
+"Yes: but never mind now."
+
+"But, Master Mark, I'm sure that it comes from the river, where there's
+that sink-hole in the narrow, where you see the water turn round and
+round."
+
+"Very likely; but here, I must see your father.  Take a light, and go
+before me.  Here, Dummy, are there plenty of torches?"
+
+"Yes, Master Mark; but what do you want with torches?"
+
+"Don't ask questions, sirrah."
+
+"Very well, Master Mark," said the boy, so meekly that his young master
+was touched, and said gently:
+
+"Look here, Dummy, can I trust you?"
+
+"I dunno, Master Mark.  I'll do what you tell me."
+
+"That's right.  Will you fight?"
+
+The boy's eyes flashed in the candle-light, down in the grim chamber
+were they stood.
+
+"Torches--fight," he whispered.  "Are you going to tackle the Darleys?"
+
+"No; the robbers."
+
+"T'other's best; and they're robbers too.  But them'll do.  Want me to
+come and help fight them?"
+
+"Yes; will you?"
+
+"Will I?" said the boy, showing his teeth.  "I'll follow you anywhere,
+Master Mark."
+
+"Well, I want to follow you now.  Take me to your father, and--not a
+word to a soul."
+
+Dummy slapped his mouth, and shut it close; then going to a niche in the
+rock, he pointed to a box of candles, and a much bigger one, which he
+opened and showed to be quite full of long sticks of hempen tow soaked
+in pitch, one of which he took out, and gave to Mark, and took one
+himself, lit it, and then led the way down, and in and out among the
+darkest recesses of the mine.
+
+"Smoky," said Dummy, giving his torch a wave, and sending the black
+curls of fume eddying upward, to hang along the stone ceiling.  Then he
+uttered an angry cry.
+
+"What's the matter?"
+
+"Hot pitch, Master Mark.  Big drop splathered on to my hand."
+
+In due time the place where Dan Rugg was working and directing the men,
+chipping out the rich lead ore, was reached, and he came out of the
+murky place.
+
+"Ah, Master Mark," he said.  "You, Dummy, put your foot on that smoky
+link.  Want to smother us?"
+
+"My fault, Dan," cried Mark.  "Come here."
+
+He communicated a part of the plan, and the miner's stern face began to
+relax more and more, till he showed his yellow teeth in a pleasant grin,
+and put his sharp pick under his arm, so as to indulge in a good rub of
+his hands.
+
+"The varmin!" he said.  "The varmin!  Time it were done, Master Mark.
+Oh yes, I'll pick out some lads who owe 'em a grudge, same as I do.  You
+want eight of us?  Me and seven more?"
+
+"You and Dummy, and six more."
+
+"Dummy!  Tchah!  He's no good."
+
+Dummy silently dug his elbow into his master's ribs, but it was
+unnecessary.
+
+"I want you and Dummy, and six men," said Mark decisively.
+
+"Oh, very well, sir; you're young master; but what you can see in that
+boy I don't know.  Nine on us," he continued thoughtfully.  "Twelve o'
+them.  'Taren't enough, master."
+
+Mark hesitated.  He had not meant to speak of his allies, for fear of
+opposition, but concluded now that it would be better, and explained
+everything.
+
+"No, Master Mark; won't do, sir," said Dan, shaking his head ominously.
+"No good can't come o' that.  They'll be running away, and leaving us in
+the lurch."
+
+"Nonsense.  Eight men will be picked who, as you say, owe the ruffians a
+grudge, and they'll fight well."
+
+"But they'd rather fight us, master, same as us would rather fight
+them."
+
+"Not this time, Dan.  We must join hands with them, and beat the
+robbers.  Another time we may fight them."
+
+There was a low savage snarl.
+
+"What do you mean by that, Dummy?" cried Mark.
+
+"You didn't tell me that Darley's boy was coming to fight alongside o'
+you, Master Mark."
+
+"Then I tell you now, Dummy," said Mark haughtily.  "We've joined
+together to crush the robbers; so hold your tongue."
+
+"Ay, he'd better," growled Dan.  "Well, Master Mark, I don't quite like
+it; but if you say it's to be done, why, done it shall be."
+
+"And you'll make the men you choose be secret?"
+
+"Why, master?  Of course Sir Edward knows?"
+
+"Not a word; and he is not to know till we bring in the prisoners."
+
+"Whee-ew!" whistled the old miner; and then he chuckled.  "Well," he
+said, "you have growed up a young game-cock!  All right, Master Mark.
+We'll come; only you must bear all the blame if the master don't like
+it.  You order me to do this?"
+
+"Yes, I order you," said Mark firmly.  "It is time it was done."
+
+"That's so, Master Mark, and that's enough.  I begin to feel as if I
+should like a fight."
+
+"And you shall have it.  I'll be outside, by the horse-stone, with eight
+swords, eight pikes, and eight belts."
+
+"That's good, master; but we must bring our picks as well.  We can
+handle them better than other tools."
+
+"Very well.  You leave your lads down at the bottom, and come up with
+Dummy to fetch the arms; and mind this: I want to show up well before
+the Darleys.  You'll pick fine trusty lads who can fight?"
+
+"You leave that to me, Master Mark," said the old miner.  "I'm proud of
+our family as you are.  They shan't have eight fellows as can equal us,
+'cepting me and that stoopid boy."
+
+"Don't you mind what he says, Dummy," cried Mark laughingly; "he doesn't
+mean it.  There, come along.  I want you to help me pick out some good
+sharp swords and pikes.  Mind, Dan, I shall be waiting for you as soon
+as the last light's out."
+
+"I shall be there, Master Mark," replied the old miner; and the two lads
+returned to daylight, along the passages sparkling with crystals and
+bits of ore.
+
+Meanwhile, Ralph was as busy arranging with the retainers at Cliff
+Castle, and as soon as he had taken Nick Garth into his confidence, that
+gentleman lay down on the ground, and hid his face.
+
+"Why, what does that mean?" cried the lad.
+
+"Couldn't help it, sir.  'Bliged to, or I should have shouted for joy.
+Get seven more?  Have a dozen, sir, or twenty.  Every man-jack'll want
+to go."
+
+"No: seven," said Ralph firmly.  "There'll be nine from the Black Tor,
+so we shall be eighteen."
+
+"What! nine o' them coming to help, Master Ralph!" cried Nick, whose jaw
+dropped in his astonishment.
+
+"Yes: they are as much at enmity with the rascals as we are."
+
+"But, Master Ralph--"
+
+"Now, no arguing, Nick; do as I tell you.  Get Ram Jennings, and six men
+who have been injured by the gang, and I'll have swords and pikes ready
+at ten.  Not a word to a soul."
+
+"Isn't the chief coming?"
+
+"No: I am the chief to-night, and my father will not know."
+
+"But what'll he say to me?"
+
+"Nothing.  I take all the blame."
+
+"But he'll be mad about our going with a lot o' Black Torers."
+
+"I tell you I am answerable for everything."
+
+"Yes, but--"
+
+"Look here, Nick: do you want to rout out Captain Purlrose and his
+gang?"
+
+"Do I want to, Master Ralph?  Do I want to get his head under a stone,
+and sarve it like I would a nut?  Yes, I doos."
+
+"Then pick the men.  Bind them to be silent, and meet me as soon as the
+lights are all out.  Will you do this?"
+
+"Won't I?" said the man exultantly; "and won't we?--Master Ralph, sir, I
+am proud on you.--Well, this is going to be a treat!  But, say, Master
+Ralph, will them Edens fight 'longside of us without being nasty?"
+
+"Yes, because it's against a common enemy," said the lad.
+
+"Common?  They just are, sir.  Commonest muck o' men.  Fit for nothing
+but putting under ground.  Why, how I should like to take my old mother
+with us, and let her loose at that there captain.  I wouldn't give much
+for his chance.  Shall I tell her?"
+
+"No!" cried Ralph.  "Not a soul.  Everything must be done in secret, and
+the rascals up at Ergles taken by surprise."
+
+"You trust me, Master Ralph," said the man; "and when Master Captain
+Purlrose finds who's come, he will be surprised.  We'll hang him for a
+scarecrow at once, of course?"
+
+"No: bring him here a prisoner, and my father will settle that."
+
+"Very well, sir.  We'll take him, dead or alive oh; but if I had my way,
+I'd like to turn him over to my mother and all the women him and his
+have robbed.  Why, do you know, sir, night afore last the beggars
+carried off a pickle-tub and two feather beds.  And they call themselves
+men."
+
+Nick Garth spat on the ground in his disgust, closed one eye as he
+looked at his young master, gave his mouth a sounding slap, and went
+round at once to garden, stable, and barns, to quietly enlist the little
+force, making each man swear secrecy, so that at nightfall not another
+soul save the initiated had the slightest inkling of what was going on,
+either at Cliff Castle or the Black Tor.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY.
+
+ALLIED FORCES.
+
+The crescent moon sank like a thin curve of light in the western sky
+soon after nine o'clock that night.  At ten the last light disappeared
+at both places connected with the adventure, when Mark Eden lowered
+himself from his window on to the top of the dining-hall bay, and from
+thence to the ground.
+
+Soon after, there was a faint whispering and chinking, and three dark
+figures, carrying swords and pikes, descended the steep zigzag to the
+bottom of the great tongue of rock, where six men were lying down
+waiting; and a few minutes later, all well-armed, they were tramping in
+single file through the darkness toward Steeple Stone.  Their young
+leader, armed only with his sword, and wearing a steel morion of rather
+antiquated date, which could only be kept in place by a pad formed of a
+carefully folded silk handkerchief, was at their head; and in obedience
+to his stern command, not a word was spoken as they made for the
+appointed tryst.
+
+A similar scene had taken place in the dry moat of Cliff Castle; and at
+the head of his little party of eight, Ralph Darley was silently on his
+way to the Steeple Stone, a great rugged block of millstone-grit, which
+rose suddenly from a bare place just at the edge of the moor.
+
+The night was admirable for the venture, for it was dark, but not too
+much so, there being just enough light to enable the men to avoid the
+stones and bushes that lay in their way, which was wide of any regular
+path or track.
+
+Ralph's heart throbbed high with excitement, and in imagination he saw
+the gang of ruffians beaten and wounded, secured by the ropes he had had
+the foresight to make Nick Garth and Ram Jennings bring, and dragged
+back at dawn to the Castle to receive the punishment that his father
+would measure out.
+
+He was a little troubled about that, for he felt that it was possible
+some objection might be raised by Mark Eden; and he was also a little
+uneasy about the first encounter of the two little bands of men so
+hostile to one another.  But his followers were amenable to discipline,
+and one and all so eager for the fray, that he soon forgot all about
+these matters in the far greater adventure to come, and marched steadily
+on, keeping a bright look out, till he was nearing the solitary rock.
+
+"See any one, Nick?" he whispered to his head man.
+
+"No, sir.  All as still and lonesome as can be."
+
+"Then we are first," whispered Ralph.  "I am glad.  We'll march close
+up, and then crouch down round the stone till the others come."
+
+Nick grunted; and they tramped softly on over the grass and heath, with
+all looking grim and strange, the utter stillness of the night out there
+adding to the solemnity of the scene.
+
+But they had not taken half-a-dozen paces toward the block, seen dimly
+against the starless sky, when there was a sharp chink, and a familiar
+voice cried:
+
+"Who goes there?"
+
+"`Allies,'" said Ralph promptly.
+
+"Halt!" cried the leader.
+
+"Advance!" came back; and directly after, the two lads were face to
+face, comparing notes.
+
+"Began to think you were Purlrose's men," whispered Mark.
+
+"And I that you had not come."
+
+"Been here some time, and the lads are all lying down.  Now then, what
+are our plans?  I want to get to work."
+
+"March together in single file, about five yards apart, straight for the
+cave.  Get within fifty yards, halt, and let two advance softly to
+reconnoitre."
+
+"Can't do better," said Mark softly.  "But we must keep very quiet, in
+case any of them are out marauding."
+
+"Yes, of course.  When we get up to the mouth of the cave, we must halt
+on one side, light our torches, and rush in.  We must leave it to the
+men then."
+
+"Oh yes; they'll do it.  They've all got their blood up.  We must
+succeed."
+
+"But what about the torches?"
+
+"Got plenty for both, and two men have got mine lanterns alight under
+their gaberdines.  Better pass round torches for your men now."
+
+Ralph agreed that this would be best, and Mark summoned Dummy with a
+faint bird-like chirrup, and made him bring the links.
+
+Then at a word, Mark's men sprang up, and after marking down the spot
+below the dimly-seen top of the mountain-limestone ridge, beneath which,
+half-way down, as they well knew, the cavern lay, the two parties
+marched on in silence side by side, pausing every few minutes, in
+response to a shrill chirp, while the leaders took a few paces ahead to
+make a keen observation and whisper a few words.
+
+"All still," said Ralph, after the last of these pauses, which took
+place where the slope had grown steep, and they had about a quarter of a
+mile to go upward to reach the entrance to the cavern.
+
+"Are you sure we're aiming right?" whispered Mark.
+
+"Certain.  The hole is below that sharp point you can see against the
+sky.  I remember it so well.  Saw it when the men had surrounded us, and
+the captain was making signs."
+
+"Keep on, then," whispered Mark.  "Let's get one on each side of the
+mouth, light our torches, and rush in.  We'll go in side by side, and
+the men must follow as they can."
+
+The march upward in the darkness was resumed almost without a word, but
+no regular lines could be kept to now, on account of the blocks of stone
+projecting, rough bushes, and cracks and deep crevices, which became
+more frequent as they progressed.  Then, too, here and there they came
+upon heaps of broken fragments which had fallen from above, split away
+by the frosts of winter.
+
+Hearts beat high from excitement and exertion, for the slope grew more
+steep now, and an enemy would have been at great advantage above them,
+if bent on driving them back.
+
+But all remained still: there was no warning of alarm uttered by sentry,
+no shrill whistle; and so utterly death-like was all around, that Ralph
+whispered to Mark, who was close beside him now:
+
+"I believe they must be all out on some raid."
+
+"Seems like it," whispered back Mark; and they paused to let their men
+get close up, for the entrance could now dimly be made out, some twenty
+yards higher.
+
+"Better take your lantern," whispered Mark.  "Then give the word after
+you are up, on one side, and we the other.  We must go in at once then,
+for the light will startle them if they're there."
+
+The lantern, carefully shaded, was passed to Nick Garth, and once more
+they pressed on, the men spreading out a little on either side now, so
+as to get level with the entrance, which gradually grew more plain, in
+the shape of a narrow cleft, little more than wide enough to admit one
+at a time; and they saw now that stones had been roughly piled beneath
+it to form a rough platform in front.
+
+Still no sound was heard, and the next minute the two little groups
+clustered in their places close by the platform; Ralph gave the word,
+the lanterns were bared, and thrown open, and three links at a time
+thrust in, to begin burning, though not so quickly as their owners
+wished, while men stood on either side with pikes levelled, ready to
+receive the enemy should a rush be made from inside.
+
+It was a picturesque scene, as the light from the lanterns gleamed dimly
+upon eager faces, and lit up the bright steel weapons.  Then, one after
+the other, the torches began to burn and send upward little clouds of
+pitchy smoke, the light growing brighter and brighter, and throwing up
+the grey stones and darkening the shadows, till all were armed with a
+blazing light in their left hands, and sword or pike in their right,
+while between the two parties the mouth of the cave lay dark and
+forbidding, but silent as the grave.
+
+"Ready?" whispered Ralph.
+
+"Ready!" came from Mark.
+
+"Then forward!" cried the former, and, sword in hand, the two lads
+stepped from right and left on to the platform, their shadows sent first
+into the dark rift; while the Ruggs crowded after Mark, and Nick Garth
+and Ram Jennings shouldered them in their effort to keep their places
+close behind Ralph.
+
+"Hang the link!" cried Mark suddenly.  "Here, Darley, do as I do."
+
+He threw his flaming torch right forward into the cave as far as it
+would go, and it struck against the wall and dropped some dozen yards
+in, and lay burning and lighting up the rugged passage.
+
+"I'll keep mine till we get past yours," said Ralph in a hoarse whisper;
+and the lads pressed in, side by side, to find that the link was burning
+at an abrupt corner, the passage turning sharply to the right.
+
+Mark stopped and picked up his link, but before he could throw it again,
+Ralph stepped before him over the rugged floor and hurled his light, to
+see it fall right ahead, after also striking against the wall.
+
+"Zigzags," said Mark in a sharp whisper.  "Here, mind what you're doing
+with those pikes."
+
+"All right," was growled, but the men who held the weapons did not
+withdraw them, two sharp points being thrust right forward, so as to
+protect the two leaders, the holders being Dan Rugg and Nick Garth.
+Both Mark and Ralph objected to this again, but it was no time for
+hesitation.  At any moment they might be attacked, and they were all
+wondering that they had heard nothing of the enemy, all being singularly
+still, save a low murmuring sound as of falling water at a distance.
+
+"They must be all out," said Mark in a low voice.  "Gone on some raid.
+Well, we shall catch them when they come back."
+
+Chirp!
+
+"Who did that?" said Ralph quickly, at the sound of a steel weapon
+striking against the rock.
+
+But no one answered; and as they advanced slowly, and Mark stooped to
+pick up his burning link once more where it lay against the corner of
+the natural passage, Ralph seized the opportunity to change his sword to
+his left hand, and swing his round the corner out of sight.
+
+They heard it fall, and the glow struck against the wall to their left,
+lighting up the passage beyond the corner.
+
+"Take care, Master Mark," whispered Dan Rugg.
+
+"Ay, and you too, Master Ralph," whispered Nick Garth.  "P'r'aps they're
+lying wait for us."
+
+"No," said Mark, aloud.  "They're away somewhere, and I hope they
+haven't seen our lights."
+
+Whizz--thud!
+
+There was an involuntary start from the attacking party, for at that
+moment the burning link Ralph had thrown came sharply back, struck
+against the wall where the glow had shone just before, and dropped,
+blazing and smoking, nearly at their feet.
+
+"That settles it," said Mark excitedly.
+
+"Yes, and that explains the chink I heard.  They're waiting for us.
+Ready?  We must charge."
+
+Ralph's words were followed by the pressing forward of the men behind--
+those of each family being eager to prove their valour by being before
+their rivals; and the next minute half-a-dozen were round the corner,
+with the two lads at their head, to find that the passage had suddenly
+widened out into a roomy chamber, toward whose high roof the smoke from
+the torches slowly ascended, and contracted again at the end, about a
+dozen yards away.
+
+"Yes, I remember," whispered Ralph.  "I had forgotten: it goes off in a
+passage round to the left again at that corner."
+
+The men crowded in after them, finding ample room now, and all looked
+about, puzzled, for the enemy who had hurled back the link, several of
+those present being ready to place a strange interpretation upon the
+mystery.
+
+But the explanation was plain enough when they reached the end of the
+chamber, where the onward passage was but a crack some two feet wide,
+with a bristling palisade of pike-heads to bar their further progress.
+There was no hesitation.  At the sight of something real to attack, Mark
+uttered a shout.
+
+"Here they are, lads," he cried.  "Now for it!  Pikes."
+
+The men, Edenites and Darleyites, closed in together, forgetting all
+their animosities, and their pike-heads gathered into a dense mass,
+clashing against those which bristled in the narrow opening, clinked
+against the stone sides, and rattled, as the holders thrust and stabbed
+away past their young leaders' shoulders, for, to their great disgust,
+both Mark and Ralph found that they could do nothing with their swords.
+
+And now the silence which had reigned was further broken by the excited
+cries of the men, given at every thrust they made into the opening,
+their attack eliciting yells of defiance, oaths, and threats of what
+would be done directly.
+
+The fight went on for a few minutes, with apparently no effect on either
+side, the attacking party being unable to reach the defenders, while the
+latter seemed to be too much crippled for space to attack in turn,
+contenting themselves with presenting their bristling points against the
+advance.
+
+"Halt!" cried Mark suddenly.  "This is of no use."
+
+"No," growled Nick Garth, as, in obedience to the order, the men drew
+back a couple of yards, to stand, though, with their pikes directed at
+the narrow opening.
+
+"Come out, you rats, and fight fair," roared Dan Rugg; and there was a
+derisive shout of laughter, which echoed through the chamber, followed
+by the hoarse voice of Captain Purlrose.
+
+"Go home, bumpkins!" he shouted, "or we'll spit you all together like
+larks."
+
+"Beast!" shouted back Mark; and stepping forward he hurled his link
+right in over the pike-heads, amongst their holders, eliciting a series
+of thrusts and furious yells, as he took one step back, and fell back
+the next.  A savage roar rose from his men, answered by another from
+within.
+
+"Hurt, Mark Eden?" cried Ralph excitedly, catching at his brother
+leader, and saving him from going down.
+
+"No: feel stupid," panted Mark, who looked confused and dizzy; "point
+struck this stupid steel cap;" and he tore it off, and threw it down,
+though it had in all probability saved his life; the step back he had
+taken, however, had lessened the force of the thrust.  "Better now.--
+Here, stop them.  They are doing no good."
+
+For enraged by what had taken place, the attacking party had rushed in
+again, to go on stabbing and thrusting away with their pikes, keeping up
+a series of rattlings and clashings, till Ralph made his voice heard,
+and they drew back, growling angrily, and the weird light shed by the
+torches showed that blood had begun to flow from hands and arms.
+
+"We must do something different to this," cried Ralph, as soon as the
+yells of derision which greeted their repulse were over.
+
+"Yes, young idiot!  Go home to bed," shouted the captain hoarsely.  Then
+he burst into a savage tirade of curses, for Dummy, in his rage at being
+right at the back, had thrown another blazing torch straight in over the
+bristling pike-heads, lighting up the interior, and showing the savage
+faces of the defenders close together.  Ralph judged that the link had
+struck the captain.
+
+"Stand fast, men," he whispered.  "We may make them charge out that way.
+Go on, Dummy, and half-a-dozen more of you throw in your links all
+together."
+
+The order was obeyed, after the torches had been waved into a fierce
+blaze, and they flew in, scattering drops of burning pitch, bringing
+forth an outburst of yells of rage and pain, and a quick movement showed
+that the marauders were about to rush out.  But the voice of Captain
+Purlrose was heard thundering out the words:
+
+"Stand fast!  Only a few drops of pitch, and a singe or two.  Here, two
+of you, throw them back."  An exchange of burning missiles now took
+place for a few minutes, which soon ended on the part of the defenders,
+who, roaring with rage and pain, kept on trampling out the torches now
+thrown.
+
+"Stop!" cried Mark.  "It's of no good.  The cowards will not come out.
+Here, Ralph Darley."
+
+There was a few moments' whispering, resulting in orders being given to
+the men, two of the Edens, and two of the Darleys standing aside, ready
+for some action.
+
+"Now for another charge," whispered Mark.  "Take as long a hold of your
+pikes as you can, and when I give the order, let your points be all
+together like one.  Ready?  Forward!"
+
+As the little party advanced, with their pike-heads almost touching,
+while those of their enemies were advanced to defend the opening, the
+two men on either side darted close up, shielded by the wall, passed
+their arms over with a quick motion, and each grasped and held fast one
+or two pike-shafts, in spite of the efforts of their holders to get them
+free.
+
+But there were enough left to defend the hole, and one by one, in spite
+of the desperate efforts made to hold them, the imprisoned weapons were
+at last dragged away, to reappear, stabbing furiously, till, breathless
+with their exertions, the men once more drew back, several of the Edens
+in their rage snatching their small mining-picks from their belts, one
+hurling his into the hole, a wild yell telling that it had done its
+work.
+
+"Well," said Mark despondently, "what can we do?"
+
+"Wait and see if they will come out and attack us.  We are wasting
+strength."
+
+"Yes.  It's no good.  We ought to have brought a lot of blasting-powder,
+Dan, and blown them out."
+
+"Yes, Master Mark; but we didn't know.  My advice is that we go back
+now, and come again."
+
+"Why, you're hurt," said Ralph excitedly, as he saw the blood streaming
+down the man's arm.
+
+"Ah, so's a lot of us, young master," growled the man.  "Look at your
+own lads."
+
+Ralph took and raised a torch, and saw that half his own party,
+including Nick Garth and Ram Jennings, were suffering from cuts and
+stabs in their arms.
+
+"Oh, they're nowt," growled Nick.  "They've got it worse inside.  Now
+then, let's go at 'em again, or we shall never do it."
+
+Another yell of defiance came from the passage, followed by mocking
+invitations to them to come on again.
+
+"Yah!  You aren't men," roared Ram Jennings.  "Rats, that's what you
+are--rats.  Only good to go and fight wi' women."
+
+"It's of no good," said Mark bitterly.  "I feel done.  I haven't had a
+single cut or thrust at one of the brutes; neither have you.  We can't
+do it."
+
+"I don't like to say so," said Ralph, "but my father was a soldier, and
+he said a good officer never wasted his men."
+
+"Well, we're wasting ours," said Mark bitterly, "We must give up, and
+come again."
+
+"Stop," whispered Ralph.  "I know.  Give orders to your men quietly, and
+I'll do so to mine.  Then we'll throw the torches in at them with all
+our might, and give a shout, and retreat as if we were beaten."
+
+"And stop on each side of the mouth to catch them as they pursue us,"
+said Mark excitedly, catching at the idea.  "That's it."
+
+The next moment they were hurrying from man to man, who heard them
+sulkily, growling and panting in their rage.  But they obeyed their
+leaders' orders, getting their remaining links well ablaze, the holders
+forming in front, and the rest quietly and quickly filing out by the
+other end of the chamber.
+
+"Now!" shouted Ralph suddenly.  "In with them."
+
+There was a rush of light, and the fiery missiles flew in through the
+opening, falling amongst the defenders, and leaving the chamber in
+comparative darkness, amidst which was heard the quick tramping of feet,
+mingled with the yells of rage from the defenders.
+
+The next minute, with Mark and Ralph coming last, all were outside the
+mouth of the cavern, grouped in two parties, with presented weapons,
+breathing the soft, cool night air, and waiting for the attack of their
+foes.
+
+Sound after sound came from the opening, but not such as they longed
+with bated breath to hear.  Once there was a loud order which came
+rolling out, and a little later a gleam of lights was seen, but no rush
+of footsteps, no sign of pursuit; and suddenly a voice broke the silence
+of the peaceful night air, as Nick Garth roared out:
+
+"'Taren't likely.  Rats won't show for hours after the dogs have hunted
+'em in their holes."
+
+"Ah! might wait for a week," growled Dan Rugg.  "It's all over for
+to-night."
+
+"They're right, Eden," whispered Ralph.
+
+"Yes: they're right," said Mark, with a groan.  "We're beaten--beaten,
+like a pack of cowards.  Let's go home."
+
+"I did not see much cowardice," said Ralph bitterly.  "But it's all
+over, and we must retreat.  Give the word."
+
+"What! to retreat?" cried Mark passionately.  "I'll die first."
+
+"It is not fair to the men to keep them longer."
+
+"Well, you're a soldier's son, and know best, I suppose.  Give the word
+yourself."
+
+Ralph hesitated, for his companion's words seemed to be tinged by a
+sneer, but he knew that it was madness to stay, and hesitating no
+longer, he gave the word to retire.
+
+"We're not going back for your orders," said one of Mark's followers
+surlily.
+
+"Yes, you are," cried his young master fiercely.  "Back home now.
+March!"
+
+There was a low growling on both sides, but the orders were obeyed, and
+slowly and painfully the two parties, stiff with exertion, and smarting
+with wounds, filed over the steep stone-besprinkled slope.
+
+As they walked down, the two lads drew closer together, and at last
+began to talk in a low voice about their failure.
+
+"Head hurt much?" said Ralph.
+
+"Yes, horribly; and I've left that old iron pot behind.  Air's cool to
+it, though."
+
+"Shall I bind it up?"
+
+"No: don't bleed.  I say."
+
+"Yes."
+
+"How are we going to meet our fathers to-morrow morning?  Nice state the
+poor lads are in."
+
+Ralph uttered a gasp at the thought of it.  There was no leading
+prisoners back in triumph, with their hands bound behind them.  They
+were beaten--cruelly beaten, and he was silent as his companion, as they
+tramped slowly on, at the head of their men, till the Steeple Stone was
+seen looming up ahead, where they would separate, little thinking that
+the worst was to come.
+
+The lads halted to listen whether there was any sound of pursuit, and
+the men filed slowly by till they were fifty yards ahead, when all at
+once voices were heard in altercation, angry words were bandied from
+side to side; and spurred by the same feeling of dread, the two leaders
+dashed forward again.
+
+Too late!  The smouldering fires of years of hatred had been blown up by
+a few gusty words of bitter reproach.  Nick Garth had in his pain and
+disappointment shouted out that if the party had been all Darleys the
+adventure would have succeeded.
+
+Dan Rugg had yelled back that it was the Darleys who played coward and
+hung back; and the next moment, with a shout of rage, the two little
+parties were at one another, getting rid of their rage and
+disappointment upon those they looked upon as the real enemies of their
+race.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY ONE.
+
+RALPH PLEADS GUILTY.
+
+It was a savage fight, and before Mark and Ralph, who rushed desperately
+into the _melee_, not to lead their men, but to separate them, could
+succeed in beating down the menacing pikes, several more were wounded;
+and at last they drew off, with their burdens greatly increased by
+having on either side to carry a couple of wounded men.
+
+"We must put it down to Purlrose," said Mark bitterly, as he ran back
+for a moment to speak to Ralph.  "But what do you say--oughtn't we to
+have our duel now?"
+
+"If you like," said Ralph listlessly; "Perhaps we'd better, and then I
+may be half killed.  My father may be a little merciful to me then."
+
+Mark leaned forward a little, so as to try and make out whether his ally
+was speaking in jest or earnest; and there was enough feeble light in
+the east to enable him to read pretty plainly that the lad was in deadly
+earnest.
+
+"No," he said sharply; "I don't think we'll have it out now.  My head's
+too queer, and my eyes keep going misty, so that I can't see straight.
+You'd get the best of it.  I don't want to meet my father, but I'd
+rather do that than be half killed.  The poke from that pike was quite
+enough to last me for a bit."
+
+He turned and trotted off after his men, while Ralph joined his, to hear
+them grumbling and muttering together, he being the burden of their
+complaint.
+
+Nick Garth and Ram Jennings seemed to be the most bitter against him,
+the latter commencing boldly at once.
+
+"Oh, Master Ralph," he cried, "if your father had been here, we should
+ha' paid them Edens for hanging back as they did."
+
+"They did not hang back," cried Ralph angrily; "they fought very
+bravely."
+
+"What!" cried Nick.  "Well, I do like that.  But I don't care.  Dessay I
+shall be a dead 'un 'fore I gets to the Castle, and then we shall see
+what Sir Morton will say."
+
+"Well, you will not hear, Nick," said Ralph quietly.
+
+"No: I shan't hear, Master Ralph, 'cause I shall be a dead 'un, I
+suppose.  But I'm thinking about my poor old mother.  She'll break her
+heart when they carry me to her, stiff as a trout, for I'm the only son
+she has got."
+
+This was too much for the wounded men even.  They forgot their
+sufferings in the comic aspect of the case, familiar as they all were
+with the open enmity existing between Mother Garth and her son, it being
+common talk that the last act of affection displayed toward him had been
+the throwing of a pot of boiling water at his head.
+
+The laugh lightened the rest of the way, but they were a
+doleful-looking, ragged, and blood-stained set, who bore one of their
+number upon a litter formed of pike-staves up the zigzag to the men's
+quarters at day-break; and Ralph felt as if he had hardly strength
+enough to climb back to his window and go to bed, after seeing his
+roughly-bandaged men safely in.
+
+But he made the essay, and when half-way up dropped back again into the
+garden, just as a thrush began to pipe loudly its welcome to the coming
+day; and the blackbirds were uttering their chinking calls low down in
+the moist gloom amongst the bushes on the cliff slope.
+
+"Can't leave the poor fellows like that," he muttered.  "Oh dear, how
+stiff I am!  Father said he always felt it his duty, when he was a
+soldier, to look well after his wounded men."
+
+He stood thinking for a few moments, and then began to tramp down the
+steep path to where the shadows were still dark, and a mist hung over
+the rippling stream.  Then taking to the track beside it, he trudged on,
+with the warm glow in the east growing richer of tint, the birds
+breaking out into joyous song, and minute by minute the vale, with its
+wreaths of mist, growing so exquisitely beautiful that the black horrors
+of the past night began to seem more distant, and the cloud of shadow
+resting above his aching head less terrible and oppressive.
+
+And as the sun approached its rising, so did the beauties around the lad
+increase; and he tramped on with a sensation of wonder coming upon him,
+that with all so glorious at early morn in this world of ours, it should
+be the work of the highest order of creatures upon it to mar and
+destroy, and contrive the horrors which disfigure it from time to time.
+
+"And I've been one of the worst," he said to himself bitterly.  "No: it
+was to stop others from doing these things," he cried quickly.  "Oh, if
+we had not failed!"
+
+He quickened his pace now, and, just as the sun rose high enough to
+light up the vale with its morning glow, he came in sight of the opening
+where Master Rayburn's cottage stood.
+
+"I shall have to wake him up," said the lad, with a sigh; "and oh! what
+a tale to tell!"
+
+But he did not have to waken the old man, for as he drew nearer he
+suddenly caught sight of his friend, standing with his back to him,
+hands clasped and hanging in front, head bent and bare, and the
+horizontal rays of the rising sun turning his silver locks to gold.
+
+The lad gazed at him in surprise, but went on softly till he was quite
+close up, when Master Rayburn turned suddenly, smiled, and said:
+
+"Ah!  Ralph Darley, my lad, that's how I say my prayers, but I'm a good
+Christian all the same.  Why, what brings--here, speak, boy," he cried
+excitedly--"torn, covered with dirt--and what's this?--blood?  Oh,
+Ralph, boy, don't say that you and Mark Eden have been meeting again."
+
+"Yes," said Ralph slowly; "we parted only a little while ago;" and he
+told the old man what had taken place, while the latter eagerly examined
+the speaker to seek for hurts.
+
+"Then--then--you two lads--on the strength of what I said--attacked
+those ruffians in their den?"
+
+"Yes, Master Rayburn," said the lad bitterly; "and failed--miserably
+failed.  Do, pray, come up and see our poor fellows.  One of them is
+badly hurt, and the others have nearly all got wounds."
+
+"But you--you, boy.  I don't see the cause of all this blood."
+
+"No," said Ralph wearily.  "I'm not hurt.  I suppose that came through
+helping the men."
+
+"Ah! and Mark Eden--is he hurt?"
+
+"No: we two ought to have had the worst of it.  He had a thrust on the
+head, but his steel cap saved him, and he walked home."
+
+"But Sir Morton? he did not know you were going?"
+
+"No: we kept it to ourselves."
+
+"He knows now, of course?"
+
+"Nothing at all.  We've only just got back."
+
+"I'll come at once," said the old man; and hurrying into the cottage, he
+took some linen and other necessaries, put on his hat, and rejoined the
+lad, making him give a full account of the attack and failure as they
+walked sharply back to the Castle.
+
+"You don't say anything, Master Rayburn," cried Ralph at last.  "Do you
+think we were so very much to blame?"
+
+"Blame, my boy?" cried the old man.  "I always liked you two lads, and,
+wrong or right, I think you've done a grand thing."
+
+"What?"
+
+"I never felt so proud of you both in my life."
+
+Ralph smiled.
+
+"That's very good of you, Master Rayburn," he said, "and it's a bit
+comforting; but I've got father to meet by-and-by."
+
+"And so have I, my boy," cried the old man warmly, "to take the blame of
+it all.  For it was my doing from beginning to end.  I incited you lads
+to go and do this, and I shall tell your father it is only what he and
+Sir Edward Eden ought to have done months ago."
+
+"But we failed--failed," groaned Ralph dismally.
+
+"Failed!  You have not done all you meant to do, but you have read those
+ruffians a severe lesson, and next time--"
+
+"Ah! next time," sighed Ralph.
+
+"Come, Ralph!  Be a man.  Nothing great is ever done without failure
+first.  Your father will be angry, and naturally.  He'll scold and
+blame, and all that; but I know what he is at heart, and he'll think as
+I do, that he need not be ashamed of his son, even if he has failed."
+
+The quarters were reached soon after, and the sufferer who had been
+carried back received the first attention, the others all having their
+turn; and just as the last bandage had been applied, Sir Morton, who had
+been having a walk round, came upon the pikes, stained and blunted,
+leaning against a buttress of the wall.  This brought him to the men's
+quarters, and in utter astonishment he stood gazing at the scene.
+
+"Ah! good morning," said Master Rayburn, in answer to his wondering look
+from his son to the injured men and back.  "They'll be easier now.  Only
+one hurt much, and he'll be all right again after a few days' rest."
+
+"But what does this mean?" said Sir Morton; and his son stood out, and
+in a frank, manly way, once more related the adventures of the night.
+
+Sir Morton's face grew sterner and harder as he heard everything to the
+finish; and he was just about to speak, when Master Rayburn broke in:
+
+"My doing, from beginning to end.  I told them they ought to do it."
+
+"And a nice business your interference has made, sir!" cried Sir Morton
+angrily.  "You see now that it is impossible for two such adverse
+elements to get on together.  The brutes! to turn upon those who had
+been fighting by their side!"
+
+"Are you speaking about your men or Sir Edward Eden's?" said the old man
+drily.
+
+"Eden's, of course," cried Sir Morton angrily.
+
+"Six of one and half-a-dozen of the other," said the old man; "and all
+due to the evil teaching of their masters, my dear old friend.  Come,
+Darley, it's of no use to cry over spilt milk; the boys have set their
+fathers a splendid example, and driven in the thin end of the wedge.
+The sooner you and Eden send it home the better."
+
+"I must try again."
+
+"Of course.  I don't ask you to make friends.  It would be absurd; but
+you must stir now, and I shall tell Eden the same, and that he cannot
+for very shame leave the work undone that his son has begun.  Ralph,
+lad, you go to bed, and sleep all day.  I am doctor enough to insist to
+your father that you are not to be disturbed.  I must go up to the Black
+Tor at once, for I suppose I am badly wanted there."
+
+The old man hurried away with the remainder of his bandages, and Sir
+Morton signed to his son, who followed him to the room into which
+Captain Purlrose had been ushered.
+
+"Now, Ralph," began Sir Morton, but his son interrupted him:
+
+"Guilty, father," he cried dismally, "and I have failed."
+
+"There, do as Master Rayburn said," cried Sir Morton, "and--well--I'll
+talk to you another time--I'm--er--I'm not very angry, my boy, but--
+there, be off.  It was very brave, and like a soldier's son."
+
+"I wonder what Mark Eden's father has said to him," thought Ralph as he
+threw himself wearily upon his bed.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY TWO.
+
+A CURE FOR THE HEADACHE.
+
+Master Rayburn was anxiously expected at the Black Tor, Mark's first act
+having been to send Dummy Rugg down to his cottage to ask him to come
+up; and not finding him there, the boy had very bravely followed him to
+Cliff Castle, in the full belief that he would be there, and on learning
+that he was, he sent a message in, and then hurried away.
+
+Matters went on in a very similar way at the Tor, even to Sir Edward
+accidentally finding that something was wrong, and going to the building
+at the entrance to the mine, where the wounded men were being attended.
+But he did not take matters in the same spirit as his inimical
+neighbour, but attacked his old friend furiously, vowed that he would
+never forgive him, and threatened his son with the severest punishment,
+though he did not say what.
+
+Master Rayburn said nothing, but went on dressing the men's wounds,
+till, regularly worked up into a perfect fury, Sir Edward turned upon
+him again.  "This ends everything between us, Master Rayburn," he cried.
+"I have treated you as a friend, made you welcome at my table, and
+allowed my son to make you a kind of companion; but now, have the
+goodness to recollect that we are strangers, and if the gang from out of
+the cavern yonder attack you, get out of the trouble in the best way you
+can, for you will have no help from me."
+
+"Very well," said Master Rayburn quietly.
+
+"And now, sir, leave my place at once."
+
+"Oh no!" said the old man quietly, as Mark looked on, scarlet with
+annoyance, but feeling that he must suffer for what had happened.
+
+"Oh no!" cried Sir Edward, aghast.  "Have the goodness to explain what
+you mean."
+
+"Certainly," replied the old man.  "I have not finished with this man,
+and I have another to attend later on."
+
+"Leave, sir, at once," cried Sir Edward.
+
+"No," replied the old man quietly.  "You are angry, and are saying that
+which in calmer moments you will regret.  Those men require my
+assistance, and I must insist upon staying."
+
+Sir Edward made an angry gesture.
+
+"Go on, then," he cried; "finish what you have to do, and then leave at
+once."
+
+"Yes," replied Master Rayburn calmly; "but it will be necessary for me
+to come day after day for quite a week.  This man will need much
+attention."
+
+Sir Edward turned and walked angrily out of the place; and as if not a
+word had been said, the old man went on with his task until he had
+ended.  Then telling the men to be of good heart, for their injuries
+were none of them serious, he went to the door with Mark, whose face was
+troubled and perplexed.
+
+"There, you need not look like that, my lad," he said.  "Your father's
+angry now, but he'll calm down, and I don't think he will say much to
+you.  It is more likely that he will want to take revenge upon those
+ruffians.  Cheer up, my boy: I'm not angry with you for what you've
+done.  It was the fighting afterwards that was the unlucky part."
+
+The old man hurried away, and Mark stood watching him descend the slope.
+
+"Cheer up, indeed!" he muttered; "who's to cheer up at a time like this?
+I wish I hadn't listened to that miserable scrub of a Darley.  I always
+hated him, and I might have known that associating with him would lead
+me into trouble.--Well, what do you want?"
+
+This was to Dummy Rugg, who, like his young master, had escaped without
+much damage.
+
+"Only come to talk to you, Master Mark," said the boy humbly.
+
+"Then you can be off.  I don't want to talk."
+
+"I'll talk, then, and you listen, Master Mark," said the boy coolly; and
+Mark opened his eyes, and was about to order the lad off, but Dummy went
+on quickly.  "I've been thinking it all over," he said.  "That
+gunpowder's the thing.  When we go next we'll take a lot in bags.  When
+we get there, and they're hiding in that narrow bit, I'll untie the bags
+and throw two or three in.  Then we can throw three or four torches, and
+one of them's sure to set the powder on fire, and start 'em; then we can
+all make a rush."
+
+"Oh, then you think that we shall go again?"
+
+"Oh yes, we must go again, Master Mark.  Why, if we didn't go, the
+robbers would think we were afraid, and come at us.  You're not going to
+sit down and look as if we were beat?"
+
+"Well, it would be too bad, Dummy," said Mark, thoughtfully.
+
+"Bad?  I should think it would, Master Mark.  I say, wasn't it grand
+last night?"
+
+"Grand?"
+
+"Yes; when we were in the cave, with the lights shining, and the pikes
+sparkling.  If they had only come out and fought fair, it would have
+been splendid."
+
+"Then you would like to go again, Dummy?"
+
+"Of course, sir.  Wouldn't you?"
+
+"Yes, I suppose so," said Mark thoughtfully.
+
+"Yes, you must go again, and take 'em all prisoners.  But I suppose you
+won't go to-night?"
+
+"Go to-night?  No!"
+
+"Well, there's nothing going on in the mine to-day.  Father's too sore
+to head the men, and he's going to lie down and rest till his arm's
+better.  What do you say to having a good long day below there, and
+finding which way the river runs--the one we heard?"
+
+"Bah!  Stuff!  Rubbish!  After being up fighting all the night!  You
+must be mad."
+
+"No, I aren't," said Dummy.  "I only want you to come.  It'll do you
+good.  You don't know how much better you'll feel after a good walk and
+climb down there."
+
+"What's the good, Dummy?"
+
+"We want to find out where the water goes to that is always falling.
+I'm sure some of it comes out of our river, where the hole's in the
+stream."
+
+"And what good will it do to know where the water goes?"
+
+"I don't know, but I want to.  Can't go to work after such a night as we
+had.  There's nobody down the mine to-day."
+
+Mark put his hand to the place where he had received the blow.
+
+"Headache, Master Mark?"
+
+"Yes.  All jarred-like."
+
+"Then come down.  I've often had a bad headache when I've gone down into
+the mine, and it's been so quiet and still there that it has soon got
+better.  Do come, Master Mark; it'll be better than sitting thinking
+about being beaten last night."
+
+"Very well, Dummy," said Mark at last: "I don't feel as if I could go to
+bed and sleep, and I don't want to be thinking."
+
+"And you'll have too much to do down there to think."
+
+"Yes, I suppose so; and if I stay up, I shall be meeting my father and
+catching it.  Oh, I only wish we had won the day."
+
+"Couldn't; 'cause it was night," said the boy thoughtfully.
+
+"Well, be ready with the candles, and I'll come in half-an-hour, as soon
+as I've seen how the men are."
+
+"Oh, they're all right, and gone to sleep.  They don't mind.  But you
+ought to have let us beat the Darleys, as we didn't beat the robbers."
+
+"You go and get the candles," said Mark sourly.
+
+"Like to have torches too, master?" said the lad, with a cunning grin.
+
+"You speak to me again like that, you ugly beggar, and I won't go,"
+cried Mark wrathfully.  "Think I want all that horrible set-out with the
+torches brought up again?"
+
+"I'm off to get the candles ready, Master Mark," said Dummy humbly; and
+he hurried down the steep steps to get to the mouth of the mine.
+
+"Wish I'd kicked him," muttered Mark, as soon as he was alone.  "I do
+feel so raw and cross.  I could fight that Ralph Darley and half-kill
+him now.  Here, let's go and see how miserable all the men are; it'll do
+me good."
+
+He hesitated about going, though, for fear of meeting his father; but
+feeling that it was cowardly, he went to where the men lay now, found
+them asleep, and came out again to go into the dining-room and make a
+hasty breakfast; after which he went out, descended the steep steps out
+in the side of the rock upon which the castle was perched, glanced up at
+it, and thought how strong it was; and then came upon Dummy, waiting
+with his candle-box and flint and steel, close by the building where the
+blasting-powder was kept.
+
+"Let's take these too, Master Mark," he said, pointing to the coils of
+rope which had been brought back from the cave; "we may want 'em."
+
+He set the example by putting one on like a baldric, Mark doing the same
+with the other.
+
+"Now for a light," he said, taking out his flint, steel, and tinder-box.
+
+"Well, don't get scattering sparks here," said Mark angrily.  "Suppose
+any of the powder is lying about, you'll be blowing the place up."
+
+"Not I," said the boy, smiling; "I'm always careful about that."
+
+He soon obtained a glow in the tinder, lit a match, and set a candle
+burning.  Then taking each one of the small mining-picks, the two lads
+descended into the solitary place, Dummy bearing the light and beginning
+to run along cheerily, as if familiarity with the long wandering
+passages and gloomy chambers had made them pleasant and home-like.  Mark
+followed him briskly enough, for the solemn silence of the place was
+familiar enough to him, and he looked upon it merely as a great burrow,
+which had no terrors whether the men were at work or no.
+
+Dummy went steadily on, taking the shortest way to the chamber where he
+had shown his companion that it was no _cul de sac_, but the entrance to
+the grotto where nature had effected all the mining, and at last the
+great abyss where the sound of the falling water filled the air was
+reached.  Here Dummy seated himself, with his legs swinging over the
+edge, and looked down.
+
+"That's where the river water comes in," he said, "through a big crack.
+Now let's see where it goes, because it must go somewhere."
+
+"Right into the middle of the earth, perhaps," said Mark, gazing down
+into the awful gulf, and listening to the rushing sound.
+
+"Nay," said Dummy; "water don't go down into the earth without coming
+out again somewhere.  Dessay if we keep on we shall come out to
+daylight."
+
+"Eh?" cried Mark; "then we had better find it and stop it up, for as I
+said the other day, we don't want any one to find a back way into our
+mine."
+
+"That's what I thought, Master Mark," said Dummy quietly.  "Wouldn't do
+for Purlrose and his men to find it, and come in some day, would it?"
+
+"No; that wouldn't do at all, Dummy."
+
+"No, sir.  But how's your head?"
+
+"My head?  Oh, I'd forgotten all about it."
+
+"I know'd you would," said the lad, grinning.  "Don't feel so tired,
+neither?"
+
+"No."
+
+"Then I'll light another candle, and we'll get on: but don't you get
+slipping while we are going round here, because I don't know how deep it
+is, and I mightn't be able to get you out."
+
+"You take care of yourself, and lead on," said Mark shortly.  "I dare
+say I can go where you do."
+
+Dummy nodded, and after handing the second candle to his master, he went
+along sidewise, and then lowered himself over the edge of the gulf, and
+dropped out of sight.
+
+"Only 'bout a fathom, Master Mark," he shouted, "and plenty of room."
+
+Mark did not hesitate, but lowered himself in turn, and dropped upon his
+feet, to find they were upon a rugged shelf, about four feet wide,
+sloping downward right by the side of the gulf; and passing along this,
+they soon reached the other side of the great chasm, to stand nearly
+opposite to the end of the passage where they had entered, but about
+twenty feet lower; and here they again looked down into the awesome
+depths.  But nothing was to be seen.  The water fell from somewhere
+beneath where they had entered; and as they judged, plunged deep down
+into a wide chasm, and from thence ran out and under the great crack,
+which the boy found out as the way they had to go.
+
+"Stream runs right under that, Master Mark.  I went along some way, and
+every now an' then I could hear it, deep down.  I say, did you bring
+anything to eat?"
+
+"Some bread that I couldn't manage at breakfast."
+
+"So did I," said the boy.  "P'r'aps we may want it by-and-by."
+
+"We want better lights, Dummy," said Mark, after they had progressed
+some distance.
+
+The boy turned round with a merry look, and was about to suggest torches
+once more, but at a glance from Mark's eyes, he altered his mind and
+said:
+
+"Yes, those don't give much."
+
+But pitiful as the light was, it was sufficient for them to see walls
+covered with fossils, stalactites hanging from the roofs of chambers,
+others joined to the stalagmites on the floor, and forming columns,
+curtains, and veils of petrifaction, draping the walls as they went
+through passage, hall, and vast caverns whose roofs were invisible.  And
+all the time, sometimes plainly, sometimes as the faintest gurgling
+whisper, they heard the sound of flowing water beneath their feet.
+
+"Well, this is grand!" said Mark; "but it's of no use."
+
+"Aren't no lead," said the boy quietly; "but it's fine to have such a
+place, and be able to say it's ours.  May be some use."
+
+"But I say, how are you going to find your way back?"
+
+"Oh, I dunno," said the boy carelessly.  "I've often been lost in the
+other parts, and I always found my way out."
+
+"Yes, but how?"
+
+"Oh, I dunno, quite, Master Mark," said the boy earnestly, "but it's
+somehow like this.  I turn about a bit till I feel which is the right
+way, and then I go straight on, and it always is."
+
+"Mean that, Dummy?"
+
+"Oh yes, Master Mark; that's right enough.  But come along."
+
+There was a certain excitement in penetrating the dark region, with its
+hills and descents, passages and chambers, deep cracks and chasms, down
+in which water was running, and strange ways, formed either by the
+settling or opening of the rock, or literally cut away by the rushing
+water; and every step was made interesting by the weird shapes around,
+formed by the dripping of water from the roof.
+
+Earth there was none, the stalactites and stalagmitic formations were of
+the cleanest stone, pale drab, cream, or ruddy from the solution of
+iron; and at last, when they must have been walking, climbing, forcing
+their way through narrow cracks, or crawling like lizards, for hours,
+the boy stooped by a little pool of crystal water in the floor, and
+said:
+
+"Don't you think a bit o' bread and cheese would be nice, Master Mark?"
+
+"Yes; that's what's the matter with me," cried the lad.  "I was
+beginning to feel poorly.  It's because I did not have a proper
+breakfast."
+
+The next minute they had stuck their twice renewed candles in a crack in
+the rock wall, and were seated upon a dry stalagmite looking like the
+top of a gigantic mushroom, eating ravenously, and moistening their dry
+food with copious draughts from the crystal pool.  There was water, too,
+below them, a low rushing gurgle announcing that they were still
+following the course of the subterranean stream running through a wide
+crevice in the floor.
+
+"How much farther does it go, Dummy?"
+
+The boy shook his head.
+
+"May be for miles; but we'll see now, won't we?"
+
+"Let's finish our eating first, and then see how we feel," said Mark.
+"If we don't now, we will some other time.  I say, if that water was not
+running, how quiet it would be!"
+
+"Yes," said Dummy, with his mouth full.  "I don't think anybody was ever
+here before."
+
+"I suppose not," said Mark, looking round.
+
+"Here, have some more of my cheese," said the boy.  "You haven't got
+none."
+
+Mark nodded, and took the piece cut by the boy's pocket-knife, for it
+improved the dry bread.
+
+"It's some of yours," said Dummy, with a grin.  "They give it me in the
+kitchen."
+
+Mark was looking round, and listening to the water.
+
+"I say, Dummy, suppose there was to be a storm outside, and this place
+filled up, we should be drowned."
+
+"Never been no water along here, only drips," said the boy, examining
+the floor.  "No, there's never been any floods here."
+
+"How do you know?"
+
+"Been some mud or sand left," said the boy, scraping in a narrow chink
+in the floor.  "All hard stone."
+
+"I suppose you're right; but we must be very deep down."
+
+"No.  I have been thinking, just as you have to when we're looking for
+fresh lead, we've been down a deal, and we've been up a deal, 'bout as
+much one as t'other.  I should say we're just a little lower down than
+when we started from that big water-hole, but not much."
+
+"Made my back ache a bit, Dummy," said Mark, with a groan, as he leaned
+himself against a column which was pleasantly smoothed and curved.
+
+"Yes, we've come a good way," replied Dummy, "and you didn't have no
+sleep last night."
+
+The boy munched his last crust, and then lay flat down on his breast,
+with his mouth over the pool, lowered his lips, and took a long deep
+drink, after the fashion of a horse.  After this, he rolled himself
+clear away, and lay upon his back, staring at the two candles stuck in
+the crack a few feet above his head.
+
+"Does rest your back and lynes, Master Mark, to lie like this for a bit.
+You just try it."
+
+There was no reply.
+
+"D'you hear, Master Mark?  You try it."
+
+Still no response, and he turned his head, to see that his companion's
+chin was resting upon his chest.
+
+"Sleep!" said Dummy, with a little laugh.  "Can't stand being up all
+night like I can.  Being on night-shifts, sometimes, I s'pose.  Well,
+let him sleep for a few minutes, and then I'll wake him."
+
+Then all was blank.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY THREE.
+
+JUST IN TIME.
+
+All at once Dummy Rugg uttered a peculiar snort, and started up in a
+sitting position, with the thought still fresh in his brain that he must
+rouse up Mark from his nap.
+
+But all was dark, and there was the gurgling rush of the water below.
+"Why, I've been asleep," muttered the lad excitedly.  "Think o' me doing
+that!"
+
+He rose quickly, and felt for the crack in which he had stuck the
+candles, narrowly escaping a plunge into the little pool from which he
+had drunk.
+
+He found the spot where the candles had been, both of them; he could
+feel it by the size, and knew it by the shape, for it grew smaller at
+each extremity, so that he had been able to wedge the ends of the
+candles tight.
+
+Yes: there was no doubt about it.  Both candles, as if to be in fashion
+with the stony drippings of the cavern, had run down a little, to form
+tiny stalagmites of grease.
+
+"Burnt right out," muttered Dummy, still more excitedly.  "Why, I may
+ha' been asleep for hours."
+
+Thrusting his hand into his breast, there was a faint rattle as he drew
+out tinder-box and match, and then felt for a candle in the box he had
+carried slung by a strap from the shoulder, and laid it ready.
+
+The next minute he was nicking a piece of flint against the steel,
+striking sparks down into the box, and at the second sharp click Mark
+started awake.
+
+"Yes!  What is it?" he cried--"Where am I?"
+
+"On'y here, Master Mark," replied the boy.  "Candle's gone out."
+
+"Why, Dummy!  Have we been to sleep?"
+
+"I s'pose so, Master Mark.  Po-o-o-o-f-f-uf!  There we are!"
+
+He had obtained a light, the match burning up brightly, and then the
+candle, after the fluffy wick had been burnt and blown.
+
+"How tiresome!  I don't know, though.  I feel rested."
+
+"Being up all last night, I s'pose," said Dummy, as he stuck the candle
+in the crack.
+
+"Yes, of course; that's it.  Think we've been asleep long?"
+
+"I dunno.  Fear'd so."
+
+"Let's go back, then, at once," said Mark, springing to his feet.  "Why,
+we may have been asleep for hours.  Light another candle, and let's get
+back."
+
+"Right, Master Mark.  Well, it don't much matter, for we hadn't nothing
+to do."
+
+The second candle was lit, and stuck in the rough wooden carrying-stick,
+the other was taken from the crack in the stone and treated the same.
+
+"Won't go no furrer, then, Master Mark?" said the boy.
+
+"No, not to-day," said Mark decisively, as he looked round the chamber,
+and then stooped to take a draught of the clear water, an example Dummy
+followed.
+
+"Ready, Master Mark?"
+
+"Yes, lead on.  But which way?"
+
+"Don't you know, sir?" said Dummy grinning.
+
+"Haven't the least idea.  Have you?"
+
+"Yes, sir.  This way.  I know."
+
+"But are you sure you are right?"
+
+"Ay, this is right."
+
+"Then you have been there before?"
+
+"Nay, never; but I can feel that's right," and he pointed in the
+opposite direction to that which Mark felt they ought to take.
+
+"Forward, then, and let's get out as quick as we can."
+
+"Yes, but it'll take some time;" and the boy led on.
+
+"Why, Dummy," cried Mark, suddenly, "we must have slept for hours and
+hours."
+
+"How do you know, sir?"
+
+"Why, I can feel."
+
+"In your head, like, sir?" said Dummy eagerly.
+
+"Head?  No: somewhere else," cried Mark, laughing.  "I am half-starved."
+
+A good three hours must have elapsed before, after a weary climb and
+tramp, and when the last candle had been lit, the two lads emerged from
+behind the stony veil into the grotto-like place that had deceived Mark
+Eden.
+
+"Don't matter about candles now, Master Mark," said Dummy; "I could find
+my way out ready enough by touching the wall with one hand."
+
+"Well, make haste and let's get out; I don't want to be in fresh trouble
+through stopping so long.  I believe it's supper-time."
+
+"Yes, Master Mark," replied the boy, "and so do I."
+
+They had still a long way to go, but once past the veil of stalactite,
+they began to enter the workings with the passages and chambers
+possessing fairly level floors, made for the convenience of transporting
+the ore to the mouth of the mine.  The walking then became comparatively
+easy, but Mark's weariness was on the increase, and there were moments
+when the faint glow of light which spread around Dummy, as he walked in
+front, grew misty and strange, playing fantastic tricks to the
+observer's eye: now it seemed close to him; now it and the black
+silhouette it formed of the bearer's body appeared to be far-off, and to
+die away in the distance, but only to return again with a sudden jerk,
+as Mark started and tried to step out more firmly.
+
+At these moments, his own candle having burned out, Mark watched the
+shadow of his companion dancing about, now on the floor, now on the
+ceiling or on either side, looking grotesque and goblin-like for a few
+moments, and then dying out again and causing the lad to start, as he
+felt in a dreamy way that he was being left behind, though on recovering
+his fleeting senses it was only to find that Dummy was almost within
+touch.
+
+This had been going on for some time, when Mark spoke:
+
+"I say, don't go right away and leave me, Dummy."
+
+"Who's a-going to?" said the boy, looking round in surprise.
+
+"I know you wouldn't on purpose, but keep looking round.  I can't keep
+awake.  My legs do, but all the rest goes to sleep, and I begin getting
+in a muddle."
+
+"Oh, we shall soon be out now," said the boy laughing.
+
+"Soon be out!  I never knew the place was so big before.  Keep looking
+back to see that I don't drop down fast asleep."
+
+"I'd make you go first," said Dummy, "but you don't know the way."
+
+"No: keep on as you are, and make haste."
+
+"Can't: must go steady, because of the candle."
+
+"Oh dear!" sighed Mark.  "I am so sleepy, and it's beginning to get down
+below my belt, to where my leg was hurt."
+
+"No, no, don't you think that," cried Dummy.  "Let's keep on talking."
+
+"Yes," said Mark, jumping at the proposal.  "Let's keep talking--Who are
+you laughing at?"
+
+"You, Master Mark.  You are sleepy.  'Tarn't far, now.  Fresh air'll
+soon rouse you."
+
+There was no reply, and as the boy glanced back he could see that his
+companion was beginning to reel about like a drunken man, and that his
+eyes had a peculiar dull, fixed look.
+
+The next minute the lids drooped, and he walked on as if that which he
+had said was quite true--that all was fast asleep but the legs, which
+went on automatically, and supported their load.
+
+"With a fal, lal-lal, lal-lalla, lalla, la!" yelled Dummy, not
+unmusically; and it had its effect, for Mark sprang at him, and caught
+him by the shoulder.
+
+"What was that?" he cried excitedly.
+
+"On'y me singing, Master Mark.  Soon be out now."
+
+"That's what you keep on saying," cried the lad, pettishly.  "I don't
+believe we're going right.  You've taken a wrong turning by mistake.
+Here, I can't go any farther, Dummy.  I must lie down and go to sleep
+again.  It's horrible to keep on like this.  I know I shall fall."
+
+"You do, and I'll stick a pin in you," said the boy roughly.
+
+"What!"
+
+"I'm not going to have you fall asleep again.  Come, rouse up, Master
+Mark; I'm ashamed of you.  For two pins I'd hit you over the head."
+
+"What!" cried Mark, in an access of passion; "why, you ugly big-headed
+mole, how dare you speak to me like that?"
+
+"'Cause I like," cried Dummy sharply.  "Talking of going to deep, like a
+great gal.  Yah!  Gen'lemen aren't no use.  Never do have no legs."
+
+"You insolent dog!" roared Mark, leaping at him, and striking the boy
+twice heavily on the back, with the result that the one candle was
+jerked out of the stick he carried, to fly forward on to the floor,
+flicker for a moment or two, and then, before it could be seized, go
+out, and with it Mark's bit of passion.
+
+"Oh!" he cried, as he stood fast in the darkness.
+
+"There, you've done it now," cried Dummy, in mock tones of horror.
+
+"Yes, be quick; get out the flint and steel."
+
+"What for?"
+
+"To get a light."
+
+"For you to begin knocking me about again."
+
+"No, no, Dummy; I won't touch you again.  It was your fault: you made me
+so cross."
+
+"All right, Master Mark," said the boy, with a good-humoured laugh.  "I
+only did it o' purpose to wake you up, and it has.  I don't mind what
+you did.  Don't feel sleepy now, do you?"
+
+"No, no, I'm quite awake.  The drowsy feeling has gone off.  Come, light
+the candle."
+
+"Shan't now," replied Dummy.  "We're only a little way off now, and I
+can manage."
+
+"But are you sure?"
+
+"Oh yes, I'm sure enough, Master Mark.  Wait a minute."
+
+"Yes.  What are you going to do?"
+
+"Only unloose a few rings of this line we brought."
+
+"What for?  If you play me any tricks now we're in the dark, I'll--"
+
+"Who's going to play any tricks?" grumbled the boy.  "Men don't play
+tricks.  Here, kitch holt: now you can follow me, and feel me, if you
+keep the rope tight, and won't go hitting yourself again the wall."
+
+Mark grasped the end of the rope handed to him, and they started forward
+in the intense blackness, the novelty and sense of shrinking soon
+passing off, and the lad feeling more and more confidence in his leader.
+
+"Don't feel a bit sleepy now, do you?" asked Dummy.
+
+"Not in the least.  I say, are you sure that you can go on without
+taking a wrong turning?"
+
+"Oh yes, I'm right enough, Master Mark."
+
+"How far is it now?"
+
+"On'y 'bout fifty fathom or so.  We're just getting to the rise."
+
+"Then we--no, you're wrong.  We can't be.  Why, if we were so near the
+mouth we should see daylight."
+
+"What! in the middle o' the night?  Not you."
+
+"What!  You don't think it's so late as that?"
+
+"Yes, I do.  It's past twelve o'clock, if it's a minute."
+
+"Then we must have slept a very long time below there."
+
+"Hours upon hours," said Dummy, chuckling.
+
+"Hark!  What's that?" said Mark excitedly.
+
+"Shouting," said the boy, after listening.  "My! they are making a row
+about it.  They're coming to fetch us, because we've been so long."
+
+The two lads were still making for the mouth of the mine, and were now
+ascending the rough steps, to pause by the stone shed inside the
+entrance, where tools, gunpowder for blasting, and several kinds of
+tackle were kept, in among the candles and torches.
+
+"Here, Dummy," cried Mark excitedly, as the noise outside and above them
+increased, "what does this mean?  They're fighting!"
+
+"Fighting?" cried the boy excitedly.
+
+"Yes, what can it mean?"
+
+"Mean, Master Mark?  I can tell you.  It's the Darleys come at last to
+take our place.  Oh, why didn't I kill young Ralph that night when I
+followed him home through the wood?"
+
+"You did what?"
+
+"Followed him.  I wasn't sure he'd been trying to kill you, or I would."
+
+"Come along, and don't talk," whispered Mark excitedly.  "Ah!  I have no
+sword."
+
+"Got a pick in your belt, and so have I."
+
+"You'll stand by me, Dummy?"
+
+"Won't I, Master Mark!  I want to get a hit at some of 'em.  You won't
+stop me, will you, to-night?"
+
+"If they've come and attacked us, no.  Hush, quiet!  Let's steal out
+first, and see."
+
+The night was very dark as they left the mouth of the mine, but after
+their late experience it seemed to both to be comparatively light, and
+with Mark now armed with the miner's pick, which he felt would be a good
+substitute for a battle-axe, they hurried up the steps, with the noise
+above increasing, but seeming to be over on the other side of the little
+castle.  A minute or two later they had reached the platform which led
+to their right over the narrow natural bridge, to the left, through the
+gateway into the first courtyard.  This was empty, and they ran lightly
+across it, to find that the encounter was going on beyond the second
+gateway, which led into the little inner courtyard, surrounded by the
+dwelling-house portion of the castle.  Both gateways were furnished with
+means of defence, the outer having an iron grille of heavy crossed bars,
+while the second had folding doors of massive oak, with a wicket for
+ordinary use in the lower part of one of the folds.  But in spite of the
+enmity between the two families, little heed had of late been given to
+the defences.  Sir Edward had considered that the outer gate at the end
+of the natural bridge was sufficient, as there was so little likelihood
+of an attack without warning; and, as far as Mark could make out, it
+seemed that under cover of the darkness the enemy had crossed the bridge
+and forced the gate under the little towers, when the rest would be easy
+for them.  They had only had to pass through the first courtyard, and
+were now in the lesser or inner court, evidently trying to batter down
+the entrance door into the hall.
+
+They must have begun their work before Sir Edward and his people were
+alarmed; but how long before it was impossible to tell.  What met the
+eyes of the two lads now was an armed group trying to batter in the
+great door by means of a beam they had brought up into the yard, while
+others, armed with pikes, guarded their companions, upon whom missiles
+of all kinds were being dashed down from above, and thrusts were being
+made with other pikes from the windows which flanked or overhung the
+door.
+
+"The Darleys," whispered Dummy, as they peered together round the inner
+corner of the gateway dividing the two courts.
+
+"In with it, boys!" roared a hoarse voice; and they dimly made out a
+heavy figure standing in the shelter of the wall.
+
+"Captain Purlrose and his gang," whispered back Mark huskily.  "I wonder
+how many men my father has in there."
+
+"They were going over to Dexham for a holiday, all but them as was
+hurt," whispered Dummy.  "Come on and help, or the robbers'll get in."
+
+A pang shot through Mark, and he grasped the handle of his pick firmly,
+ready for a dash, but the feeling that it would be utter madness kept
+him back.  For he knew that even if he could strike down two of the
+attacking party, they must succumb to the others, and they would have
+done no good.
+
+It was all plain enough.  Purlrose must have gained the information that
+the mine people were away, and that Sir Edward would be almost without
+defenders, and, out of revenge for the previous night's attack, have
+seized the opportunity for a reprisal.
+
+"Why, Dummy," he whispered, with his lips close to the other's ear, "if
+they take the castle, they'll keep it, and turn us out."
+
+"Yes, and grab the mine," said the boy hoarsely.  "Well, we mustn't let
+'em."
+
+_Bang_, _bang_, came the reports of a couple of arquebuses from one of
+the windows, but no harm was done, and the men answered with a derisive
+cheer and continued their battering of the door, which still resisted
+their efforts.
+
+Another shot was fired, but still without effect, and Mark ground his
+teeth together as he felt the impotency of his father's efforts now that
+the enemy had stolen in beyond the gates that would have been admirable
+for defence.
+
+"Well, aren't you going to do something, Master Mark?"
+
+"What can I do, Dummy?" cried the lad, in despair.  "We might shut these
+gates, and defend them."
+
+"Yes, so we could; but what's the good?"
+
+Just then there was a quick flash and a sharp roar close to the doorway,
+and in the bright light the lads saw the men drop the beam and run back;
+but no one was hurt, and in answer to a roar of orders from their
+leader, the enemy seized the beam again and began to drive it against
+the centre of the great door.
+
+"Running away from that," roared Purlrose; "handful of powder rolled up
+in a bag and thrown at you!  Down with it! they've got no more."
+
+"Yes, they have," whispered Dummy, excitedly.  "Here, Master Mark,
+quick!"
+
+Mark grasped the idea, without explanation, and ran back with his
+companion, leaving the shouting, cursing, and firing behind, to descend
+with him to the mouth of the mine, and then downward to the big stone
+shed, where Dummy tore open the great oaken closet, and drew out a bag
+of the coarse blasting-powder used in the mine.
+
+"Feel in that box, Master Mark; that's it.  You know.  The fuse cord."
+
+Mark had a roll of loose twisted hemp soaked in saltpetre and powder out
+of the box directly, and armed with a powder-bag each, they hurried
+trembling back, to reach the gateway, peer round the corner, and see
+that the attack was going on as fiercely as ever, while the defence was
+very weak, and they knew that before long the door must yield.  In fact,
+amidst a burst of cheers, a hole had been already driven through, to be
+made use of by the defenders for sending thrusts out with their pikes.
+
+"Up with you," whispered Mark, and the two lads hurried up a little
+winding staircase on to the top of the inner gate-tower, from whence
+they could go along one side of the little yard, hidden by the
+crenellated battlement, till they were about five-and-twenty feet from
+where the men were carrying on their attack.
+
+"Light it, and chuck it among 'em," whispered Dummy, but he proceeded
+with system.  "Put t'other inside the doorway," he whispered.  "Don't
+want that to go off too."
+
+Mark obeyed, and returned unseen by those below, or the party defending
+the hall-door, to find that his companion, used to seeing such things
+done, had cut a little hole in the side of the powder-bag, inserted a
+piece of the fuse, and thrust the rest in his pocket.
+
+"Here, you hold the end of the string up," whispered Dummy; and there
+was a rattling noise, as he took out the flint and steel he was
+carrying.
+
+A cold chill ran through Mark.
+
+"Mind," he whispered; "you'll blow us to pieces."
+
+"Nay, I won't," said the lad, between his teeth.  "You hold the thing in
+your hands; open it out a bit.  I won't send no sparks nigh the powder.
+Aren't afeared, are you?"
+
+"No," said Mark, setting his teeth; and stooping down, he screened the
+bag by passing the fuse between his knees, holding the frayed-out end
+ready while Dummy made a low clicking noise, and cleverly sent a shower
+of sparks down upon the prepared hemp.
+
+It caught directly, and began to sparkle and sputter, Mark holding it
+firmly, but feeling as if he were the victim of some horrible nightmare
+dream.
+
+"That's the way," said Dummy, coolly replacing the flint and steel.  "It
+won't go off yet.  I want it to burn till it's nearly ready, and then
+heave it down right amongst 'em.  Make some on 'em squint."
+
+"Throw it--throw it," panted Mark hoarsely.
+
+"Nay, not yet.  They'd see it burning, and tread it out.  Here, you let
+me have it.  I'll hold it to the last minute, and when I throw, you duck
+yourself down, or you might get burnt."
+
+Dummy took hold of the burning cord with his left hand, the bag with his
+right, pressing his companion out of the road, and then standing
+twitching the sparkling fuse, which was only a few inches away from the
+powder in the bag.
+
+"I've often seen it done," he whispered.
+
+A shout came up from the little court, for the followers of Captain
+Purlrose had again driven their battering ram through the great door,
+and a shout of defiance came back from the hall from a few voices, among
+which Mark recognised his father's; but he could not turn from that
+sparkling piece of line to glance over the stony battlement to see what
+was being done.  His eyes were fascinated, and nothing could have
+withdrawn them then.
+
+He had proved again and again that he was no coward, but a great terror
+chained him now, and his voice trembled as he panted out:
+
+"Quick--quick; throw--throw!"
+
+"Nay, not yet.  I'm watching of it.  Father always waits till there's
+on'y about an inch, to make sure it'll go off."
+
+There was not much more as he spoke, and just then, in obedience to an
+order from their captain, the men drew back from the doorway, balancing
+the beam swung between them, as, four on each side now, it hung from
+their hands, and backing till they were past the spot where the pair
+were crouching.
+
+"Now, all together, my brave boys," cried Purlrose; "a good run, and
+down goes the door.  Off!"
+
+The order answered for Dummy as well as the men, and feeling now that he
+had waited too long, the boy swung the bag over the battlement.  The
+passage through the air increased the sparkling of the fuse, and before
+it touched the pavement, a few feet in front of the men starting for
+their run, there was a wondrous flash of light, a fierce wind drove the
+two lads backward, and then came a deafening roar, mingled with the
+breaking of glass, a yell of horror, and as the roof still quivered
+beneath the lads' feet they heard the rush of men through the gateway,
+across the next court, and through the outer opening on to the bridge,
+and then down the first slope.
+
+"Come on!" cried Dummy, running to the low doorway of the gate-tower,
+where he picked up the other powder-bag, and, hardly knowing what he
+did, Mark followed him down the winding stair into the gateway.
+
+"Come on!" cried Dummy again, and Mark still followed, across the outer
+court and the first gateway, grasping the pick from his belt, feeling
+that they were about to charge the rear of the flying enemy.
+
+"Come on," shouted Dummy, for the third time, and they crossed the
+narrow space, which brought them to the little tower and gateway by the
+natural bridge, where, as Mark closed up, he could hear the babble and
+growl of voices from the bottom of the first slope.
+
+"Shied it too soon," growled the boy.  "I don't believe it's killed
+one."
+
+"They're coming back, Dummy," cried Mark, "and the gate's broken away
+from the hinges."
+
+"Then they shall have it this time," cried the lad, and cutting a hole
+with his knife in one corner of the powder-bag, he held it down at one
+side behind the massive wall of the little tower, and striding his legs,
+walked slowly forward till he reached the middle of the bridge, where he
+plumped the powder-bag down, after leaving a little train of the black
+grains behind him where he walked.
+
+Then carefully avoiding it, he stepped quickly back to where Mark was
+standing, and took out and handed him the flint and steel.
+
+"You do it this time," he said.  "We shall be in shelter here.  I'll
+watch and say when."
+
+Mark took the rough implements, and knelt down by the commencement of
+the train.
+
+"Hold it close down, quite steady, and give one good nick, and it will
+set the powder off."
+
+"Come on, you cowardly dogs," cried a now familiar voice.  "There's
+everything that's good in there, and the place will be ours, I tell you.
+What, going to be scared by a puff of smoke?  The place is our own now.
+All here?"
+
+"Ay," came in a growl.
+
+"Form in good order, three abreast, and charge right across and into the
+yard.  Halt!  Steady!  To think of running for a flash in the pan!"
+
+"You ran too," growled a voice.
+
+"You won't be happy till you're strung up, Hez Bingham," cried the
+captain.  "Now then: swords.  Steady!  Forward!"
+
+"Now!" whispered Dummy; and as the men tramped on to the bridge for
+their renewed attack, Mark struck the steel with his flint, and a tiny
+spark or two fell.
+
+"Quick--another!" whispered Dummy, and the men halted in the middle of
+the bridge.
+
+"Forward!" shouted the captain from the rear; "what are you halting
+for?"
+
+"What's this here?" growled one of the men in the first line, for he had
+caught sight of the powder-bag lying in the middle of the pathway, his
+question taking off his comrades' attention from the two sharp clicks
+which came from behind the lesser gateway.
+
+But they saw a little line of light and smoke running over the stone
+paving of the bridge, and with a yell of horror, they turned and fled
+hurriedly back and down the slope.
+
+"Don't look!" yelled Dummy, forcing Mark aside, when the flash brought
+the castle and summit of the Black Tor into full view; then there was an
+awful muffled roar, which went echoing away, and as it died out, the two
+lads dashed across the bridge to the head of the zigzag descent, to make
+out by hearing that the enemy were in full retreat.
+
+"I think that settled 'em," said Dummy quietly.  "You did it fine,
+Master Mark."
+
+"Hoi!  Who's there?" cried a voice behind them.
+
+"Dummy Rugg, father."
+
+"And you, my boy?  Thank Heaven!  I was afraid something was wrong."
+
+"Then it was you two with my powder," cried another voice out of the
+darkness.
+
+"Yes, Dan Rugg, and a splendid use they made of it," cried Sir Edward.
+"Well done, my lads.  But come into shelter; they surprised us, with
+everything left open.  We must lock the stable door now.  Think they'll
+come again, Rugg?"
+
+"Nay, Sir Edward; not to-night.  Those explosions will bring our lads up
+to see what's the matter."
+
+"Well, secure the gates as we go in."
+
+Dan Rugg was right.  Within half-an-hour a dozen men had come up and
+been admitted, ready to meet the enemy should he return, but the silence
+up at the Black Tor was not disturbed again that night.
+
+"Out of revenge for you boys' attack," said Sir Edward, when he had
+heard his son's account of their proceedings in the mine, and Dummy's
+clever thought about the powder.  "It might have meant the loss of this
+place.  But there must be an end to it now.  You lads were so handy with
+the powder-bags that you shall try your hands upon that wasps' nest, for
+I can't rest now till I've had it well burnt out.  Pity more powder was
+not used this time.  I don't believe they were more than singed, and
+half my windows were smashed."
+
+"But if we had used more powder, father," said Mark, smiling, "we might
+have knocked down the place."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY FOUR.
+
+AN ENEMY IN DISTRESS.
+
+The rattling of a handful of tiny pebbles took Mark Eden to his window
+that morning--for it was beginning to grow grey in the east when he went
+to his bed, Sir Edward insisting upon his going, and announcing that he
+was going to keep watch with three men.
+
+Mark pleaded for permission to join in the vigil, but Sir Edward firmly
+ordered him to go and take proper rest; so he went, feeling that after
+such an exciting time sleep would be impossible, and going off directly
+into a deep dreamless slumber, from which he was awakened by that shower
+of pebbles.
+
+He threw open the casement, fully expecting to find that he had been
+summoned to help defend the place from a fresh attack; but only saw
+Dummy Rugg below in the yard, waving his arms to him.
+
+"Dress yourself and come down, Master Mark," cried Dummy, in a hoarse
+whisper, uttered between his hands.  "What is it--the enemy?"
+
+"Yes," said Dummy, nodding his head a great deal.  "He wants to see
+you."
+
+"Me or my father?"
+
+"You," whispered Dummy mysteriously.  "Look sharp."
+
+Mark did look as sharp as he could, hurriedly washing and dressing,
+while still feeling stupid and thick with sleep.
+
+As he went down he saw one of the servants, and asked for Sir Edward,
+but learned that his father had not long gone to his chamber.
+
+He went out of the battered hall-door, looked round at the shivered
+casements and the walls blackened and whitened by the powder blast, and
+then hurried through the gateway into the outer court.
+
+But Dummy was not there now, so he passed through and saw the boy
+waiting at the entrance of the gateway which had protected the bridge so
+poorly on the previous night.
+
+"Where is he?" cried Mark.
+
+"Bit o' the way down the path," was the reply.
+
+"Is it Captain Purlrose?" asked Mark.
+
+"Yah!  No, not him.  T'other enemy."
+
+"What enemy?  Whom do you mean?"
+
+"Him you hate so.  Young Ralph Darley."
+
+"Here?" cried Mark in astonishment.
+
+"Yes; I see him coming up, and was going to heave a big stone down on
+him, but he threw up his hands, and called out as he wanted you."
+
+"Why, what can he want?" cried Mark, flushing with fresh excitement.
+
+"I dunno, but it's some mischief, or a Darley wouldn't have come.  You
+be on the look out: he's got his sword.  I'll come with you and let him
+have my pick if he means anything again' you.  He's heard of the
+fighting, and thinks we're beat; so just you look out."
+
+"You stop here," said Mark sharply, for he felt that this must be an
+advance toward friendship on the part of the Darleys--that on hearing of
+the attack Sir Morton had sent his son as an ambassador, to offer to
+join Sir Edward Eden in an expedition to crush their mutual foe.
+
+"Stop here, Master Mark, and let you go into danger," cried Dummy.  "I
+won't!"
+
+"Stop here, sir!  How dare you!" cried Mark.  "Do you think that I
+cannot defend myself against a boy like that?"
+
+"He's as big a boy as you are, Master Mark, and I won't let you go
+alone."
+
+"Dummy, you're an insolent dog," cried Mark haughtily.  "Keep your
+place, sir, or I'll never go down the mine with you again."
+
+"Oh, very well," said the boy sulkily, "but if he cuts your head off,
+don't come and howl about it to me after it's done."
+
+"I promise you I won't," cried Mark.
+
+"And I shall climb up yonder and watch you, Master Mark; and if he kills
+you I'll follow him till I get him, and I'll take him and heave him down
+that big hole in the mine, where the water falls."
+
+Mark hardly heard this, for he was hurrying over the bridge, followed by
+Dummy, who, as his young master went down the zigzag path, began to
+climb up to where he could keep watch, a sentry being higher still,
+where he could command the approaches to the Tor Castle.
+
+At the bottom of the third slope, Mark came upon Ralph, who was
+approaching to meet him, and at a glance he saw that something terrible
+had happened, for the lad's face was haggard and wild.  There were
+smears of blood about his temples, while his face looked as if it had
+been washed, and some injury had bled again.  In addition, a closer
+inspection showed that his hair had been singed off on one side, while
+the other was matted by dry blood.
+
+"Why, hullo!  Have you been in the wars too?"
+
+"Help!" cried the lad, holding out his hands to him imploringly.
+
+"Help?  You come to me!" said Mark wonderingly.
+
+"Yes, to you, mine enemy," cried Ralph, with a wild hysterical cry.  "I
+am humbled now--there is no one else to go to.  Oh, for pity's sake,
+help!"
+
+He covered his face with his hands in his shame and agony, feeling that
+his manhood had gone out of him, and Mark felt that something terrible
+must have occurred, for a burst of hysterical sobbing escaped from the
+wounded lad, and he threw himself face downward upon the path.
+
+For a moment shame and contempt reigned in Mark Eden's breast, but they
+were chased away by a manly feeling of pity for the enemy who seemed to
+be humbling himself so before him.
+
+Then all selfishness passed away in turn, and the word enemy dropped out
+of his being as the true English boy shone out of his eyes in compassion
+for a lad who had evidently passed through some terrible experience.
+
+"I say!  Darley," he said gently, "don't go on like that.  I know,
+though I don't like you, that you are a brave lad, and it hurts me to
+see you so.  There's a sentry up yonder, and our boy, Dummy.  Don't let
+them see you cry.  It's like a woman."
+
+Ralph sprang to his feet, with his face distorted, and his eyes flashing
+wildly.
+
+"Yes," he cried fiercely, "like a weak, pitiful girl; but I couldn't
+keep it back.  If it had not come I should have gone mad, for my head
+felt as if it was on fire.  That's past now, and I can talk.  You see
+how I am, I have come to you and your father--to you Edens, our
+enemies--to ask you by all that is holy, by all that's manly, to help
+me."
+
+He stopped, panting, and trying to speak, but the words would not come;
+he was choking.  The blood seemed to rush to his temples so that the
+veins stood out, and he reeled and would have fallen had not Mark
+caught, supported him, and lowered him down upon the rocky path.
+
+Then looking up, he shouted to Dummy.
+
+"Fetch two men here--quick!" he cried.
+
+Dummy disappeared, and Mark knelt down and unfastened the neck of the
+lad's doublet, and saw that his head had received a bad cut, for the cap
+had fallen off, and his face was ghastly.
+
+"Poor lad!" said Mark softly.  "I know it's wrong, but I can't help
+liking him.  Why, I know," he cried excitedly.  "That's it.  I never saw
+such an enemy!  He must have known that we were being attacked, and been
+coming to help us, and those fiends have served him like this.  That's
+it!  He's just the fellow who would do it, for I know he likes me.  I've
+seen it over and over again."
+
+He sprang up, feeling ashamed of what he had said, and afraid of being
+seen by his people, for he heard steps coming; and directly after, Dummy
+came running down, followed by a couple of stout miners, each fully
+armed.
+
+"Here, Dummy," cried Mark, "run all the way to Master Rayburn, and tell
+him to come here directly."
+
+"Go to fetch Master Rayburn for him?" said the boy, staring.
+
+"Yes, can't you see he is wounded and burnt?  Run, or I'll go myself!"
+
+Dummy, awed by this--to him--awful threat, dashed down the zigzag at a
+dangerous pace, while, at their young master's orders, the two miners
+gently lifted and bore the insensible lad up to the castle, into the
+dwelling-house, and then to Mark's chamber, where he was laid upon the
+bed.
+
+As soon as he had dismissed the bearers, Mark began to bathe the lad's
+temples, and in a few minutes he opened his eyes and stared wildly
+round.
+
+"Where am I?" he said.
+
+"Here: safe," said Mark.
+
+Recollection came back to the poor fellow's swimming brain, and he threw
+his legs off the couch and tried to rise, but sank back with a groan.
+
+"There: you can't," said Mark soothingly, and he took his hand.  "Tell
+me--what's happened?  You didn't see, because you'd fainted when I had
+you brought in, but we're in trouble too.  But I suppose you know.  Were
+you going to help?"
+
+"To help?" said Ralph faintly.  "No; to ask for help.  They took us by
+surprise.  Our men wounded.  Just at day-break.  We were all asleep.
+They climbed in."
+
+"Who did?  Purlrose?"
+
+"Yes; and his men.  Father called me to dress, and we called the men
+together, but they got between us and the arms.  The cowards! they cut
+us down.  The poor lads who were wounded too.  All so sudden.  In a few
+minutes it was all over.  Father prisoner--half our men dead; rest
+locked in one of the lower rooms: and I crawled away--to lie down and
+die, I thought."
+
+"Why, it must have been after they had failed here," muttered Mark.
+
+"They did not see me; I was behind an over-turned table, and a curtain
+and chair over me.  I could hear all they said.  They sat and drank
+after they had dragged out four of our poor fellows, dead."
+
+"Then they sat and talked; I heard them.  That captain said Cliff Castle
+would do as well as Black Tor, and they would stay there."
+
+"Ah!" panted Mark excitedly.
+
+"And a great deal more.  It meant that they'd taken the place, and I
+felt then that I must die.  I don't know how long they were there.  It
+was hot and stifling, and there was smoke, and a man rushed in, and said
+the prisoners had escaped, and set fire to the place."
+
+Ralph shuddered and was silent, till Mark began bathing his face again,
+when he seemed to revive a little, and wandered on:
+
+"Fire burned so fast--crawled out--through the window--Minnie's
+fish-pool--castle burning so fast--father--Minnie--help!--oh help!"
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY FIVE.
+
+DRAWING TOGETHER.
+
+Mark bathed the sufferer's face again, but there was no return to
+consciousness, and growing more and more alarmed, he hurried to his
+father's chamber and woke him, Sir Edward as he leaped up, still
+dressed, snatching eagerly at his sword.  "You, Mark?" he cried.  "The
+enemy?"
+
+"Yes--no, father.  Come quickly.  Young Darley's here, dying."
+
+"Young Darley here!"
+
+"Yes, in my room," cried Mark wildly.  "I've sent for Master Rayburn,
+but come and do something; we mustn't let the poor fellow die."
+
+And in a wild incoherent way, he told Sir Edward all he knew.
+
+"Then in their disappointment they went on down there," cried Sir
+Edward, as excited now as his son.  "The fiends! the monsters!" he
+continued, as he entered his son's room.  "Poor boy!  Oh, Mark, lad, but
+for God's mercy, this might have been you.  Oh! who can think about the
+old family enmity now?  How long is it since you sent for old Rayburn?"
+
+"Ever so long, father.  Oh, I say, don't--don't say you think he'll die,
+father!"
+
+"Heaven forbid, my boy," said Sir Edward softly, and he laid his hand
+gently on the wounded lad's brow--and kept it there as Master Rayburn
+entered the room.
+
+"You've heard, then!" he cried, throwing down his hat and stick, and
+beginning to examine his patient.
+
+"Yes, Mark tells me.  Is it all true?"
+
+"True, yes," growled Master Rayburn.  "I find they attacked you, were
+beaten, and then went across and round by the down to Cliff Castle.
+When I got there it was in ashes, burnt out, and the wretches had gone
+back with what plunder they could save, and two prisoners to their den."
+
+"Two prisoners?"
+
+"Yes--put your finger here, Mark, while I clip off his hair.  Here's a
+bad cut--Sir Morton badly hurt, and his sweet young child, Minnie."
+
+"Oh!" cried Sir Edward excitedly.  "But is this true--are you sure?"
+
+"I had it from one of his men, Nick Garth.  Badly wounded too.  But he
+and three others broke out of their window where they were prisoned, in
+a tower chamber, and out of revenge, to keep the enemy from keeping the
+place, as they were going to do, they set it on fire."
+
+"Who did?" said Sir Edward sharply.
+
+"Nick Garth and Ram Jennings.  He's wounded too.  A fine chance for you
+now, Eden.  You can march in and take possession of your enemy's lands."
+
+"I'll march in and take possession of that cursed den that my boy here
+tried to take, and failed," raged out Sir Edward.  "Mark, we can do
+nothing here.  Off with you, and muster every man we have.  I can't show
+mercy now.  Tell Daniel Rugg to get ready an ample supply of powder and
+fuses, and I'll blow up the hornets' nest, and let them stifle where
+they lie.  Rayburn, you'll stay with this poor lad; and Heaven help you
+to save his life."
+
+"Amen," said Master Rayburn softly.
+
+"His father--his sister--carried off by these demons," muttered Sir
+Edward, and seizing his son's arm, he hurried with him to give his
+orders himself.
+
+Mark Eden followed his father, feeling half stunned.  The one thought
+which seemed to stand out clear above a tangle of others, all blurred
+and muddled, in his brain, was that these troubles--the attack on the
+Black Tor, and the hundred times more terrible one upon Cliff Castle--
+were caused by him.  Certainty Ralph Darley had something to do with it,
+but he was badly wounded and out of the question now, so that he, Mark
+Eden, must take all the blame.
+
+Then, too, he could not understand his own acts.  It all seemed so
+absurd, just such a confused sequence of events as would take place in a
+dream, for him to be listening to Ralph's appeal for help, and to begin
+pitying him, his natural enemy, feeling toward him as if he were his
+dearest friend; and then, with his heart burning with rage against those
+who had injured him and his, to follow his father, panting to get ready
+an expedition whose object was to drive Captain Purlrose and his
+murderous, thieving crew off the face of the earth.
+
+That was not the greatest puzzle which helped to confuse Mark Eden, for
+there was his father's conduct, so directly opposed to everything which
+had gone before; but at last, after fighting with his confusion for some
+time, his head grew clearer, and he drew a long deep breath.
+
+"I know how it is," he said to himself, with a curious smile, mingled of
+pleasure and pain; "the old trouble's dead.  This business has killed
+it, and I'm jolly glad."
+
+"Mark, boy," said his father just then, and it seemed to the lad that
+his father must have been thinking and feeling in a similar way, "I
+daresay you think my conduct strange, after all the teachings of the
+past, but nature is sometimes stronger than education, and after what
+has taken place we must, as English gentlemen, forget all old enmity,
+and behave toward the Darleys as--as--as--"
+
+"I'm sure Ralph and his father would have behaved towards us, if we had
+been in such a terrible state."
+
+"Yes, my boy--thank you--exactly," cried Sir Edward, with a sigh of
+relief.  "I was afraid you would think it half mad and strange of me to
+be doing this, when--when you see we could go over and take possession
+of the Darley's place, and hold it for our own."
+
+"But we couldn't now, father," cried Mark.  "If it had been a challenge,
+and we had gone and attacked them, and conquered, it would have been
+grand, but the Edens couldn't go and fight wounded men--hit people when
+they are down."
+
+"No, my boy," said Sir Edward firmly; "the Edens could not do that."
+
+A busy day followed, with the men collected in a state of the wildest
+excitement, those who had been wounded in the attack upon the cavern and
+the bitter encounter between the allies for the most part declaring
+their readiness to bear arms again.
+
+"But you're not fit, Dan," said Mark, as he stood talking to the head
+miner.
+
+"Not fit, Master Mark?" cried the sturdy old fellow, showing his teeth;
+"I'm going to show that gang of murderous wolves that I am very fit
+indeed.  My arm won't go very well, and I turn a bit sick and swimming
+whenever I turn my head."
+
+"Then you mustn't go," cried Mark.
+
+"Mustn't, Master Mark," said the man grimly, "but I must.  The lads'll
+fight as well again with me there.  And look here: I won't use my right
+hand, and I won't turn my head; so I shall be all right, and I'm not
+going to fight."
+
+"Then what is the use of your coming?"
+
+The man half shut one eye.
+
+"Powder!" he whispered--"powder.  You know what that will do, eh?"
+
+"Yes, you can manage that, Dan," said Mark thoughtfully.
+
+"Better than any one else, my lad, and that aren't boasting.  Look here,
+Master Mark; I've been having it over with the lads, and we all think
+the same.  The Darleys are about as bad a lot as ever stepped, and
+they've done us a lot o' wrong, and deserved all we could give 'em, but
+they aren't deserved this, and we are going to forgive 'em a bit.  Who's
+going to stand still and see a lot o' ragged rapscallions come and
+attack our enemies, and try to take that castle?  It aren't to be borne,
+Master Mark; now is it?"
+
+"No, Dan, it is not to be borne."
+
+"Right, sir.  I've heered everything now: how they'd took the castle,
+and was wineing and beering theirselves, and going to stop there, when
+Nick Garth--ah!  I do mort'ly hate that fellow--sets fire to the place,
+and burns 'em out.  Makes me feel as if I could half forgive him all old
+scores.  My pick!  It was a fine idea."
+
+"A grand idea, Dan."
+
+"And don't you see, Master Mark, as they missed getting Cliff Castle,
+they'll just wait their time, and catch us napping, and get this place."
+
+"Never," cried Mark hotly.
+
+"Never, it is, Master Mark.  Me and the lads'll blow the old place up
+first."
+
+"Mark, my boy," cried Sir Edward just then; "here, I want you."
+
+The lad hurried to his father's side, and a strong hand was clapped upon
+his shoulder, Sir Edward looking him full in the face, but with his eyes
+thoughtful and fixed.
+
+"No," he said suddenly, "they could not think that if you go alone."
+
+"Who, father?  Where?" said Mark, staring.
+
+"I've been thinking, boy," said Sir Edward.  "We can make up a good
+muster, but we ought to be as strong as we can, and it is only right to
+give Sir Morton's poor fellows who are left a chance of striking a blow
+for their master and young mistress.  Would you mind riding over to the
+enemy's camp, and asking all who can to come and join us in our
+expedition this evening?"
+
+"Mind?  No, father: I should like to."
+
+"Then go at once."
+
+"Yes, father."
+
+"And bring back with you all you can.  If it's only four or five sturdy
+fellows, it is worth while; and I hope they will be willing to come
+under my command--no, this will be better: ask them if they will follow
+you."
+
+"I think I can bring them," cried Mark, flushing.
+
+"Then off.  Tell them we have plenty of arms."
+
+Mark hurried away, gave Dummy orders to saddle the cob, and ran in and
+up to his own room, whose door he opened softly, to start in surprise on
+finding a nurse assisting Master Rayburn, and seated by the head of the
+bed, fanning the heated brow of the poor disfigured lad, as he lay
+muttering in delirium.
+
+"You here, Mary," said Mark, in a sharp whisper.
+
+"Of course she is, boy," cried the old man testily.  "Woman's place--and
+girls grow to women--look finer than a queen on a throne, seated by a
+sick-bed."
+
+"Yes," assented Mark.  "How is he?"
+
+"Couldn't be worse," said Master Rayburn.  "There, go and beat the dogs,
+and if one of them bites you, we'll make up another bed, and nurse you
+too; won't we, Mary?"
+
+"Oh, no, no, Mark dear; don't, pray don't you get hurt," whispered the
+girl wildly.
+
+"He won't get hurt much," said Master Rayburn.  "Come to stay?"
+
+"No," said Mark, as he made the old man's eyes twinkle by going on
+tip-toe to the bedside, and gently taking Ralph's right hand which he
+held for a few moments, and then laid it back.
+
+"Needn't put it down in such a hurry, boy," whispered the old man.
+"Didn't hurt you, did it?"
+
+"Poor fellow!  No," sighed Mark.  "But I must go.  Father has ordered me
+to go down the river to the Cliff, to try and get all the Darley men
+together to come and help in the attack."
+
+"What!" cried Master Rayburn; "Sir Edward has told you to do that?"
+
+"Yes," said Mark, flushing hotly.  "Well, what have you to say to it?"
+
+"Nothing," said the old man softly; "only, boy, that I wish you God
+speed."
+
+There was the clatter of hoofs heard through the open window, and Mark
+hurriedly kissed his sister.
+
+"I'll take care," he said, smiling.
+
+"But the Darley men may attack you, Mark," she whispered excitedly.
+
+"I'm not afraid," he said, laughing.  "Don't let Ralph Darley die,
+Master Rayburn; he isn't such a bad fellow after all."
+
+"Bah!  Bad, indeed," said the old man, pressing Mark's arm, and looking
+at him proudly, "Deal better fellow than you."
+
+The next minute Mark leaped into the saddle, and the restive cob began
+to rear.
+
+"Take me with you, Master Mark," said Dummy, as he held the rein.
+
+"Can't!  Must go alone, Dum.  You come by my side to-night."
+
+"Got to carry bags of powder."
+
+"Well, I shall be there."
+
+"But s'pose the Darleys fight you, Master Mark?"
+
+"They will not, Dummy," cried Mark.  "Let go."
+
+And pressing the cob's sides, the little animal bounded over the narrow
+bridge, and would have galloped in a break-neck fashion down the steep
+zigzag but for the strong hand at the rein.
+
+The pony had its own way, though, along the rough track by the river, on
+past Master Rayburn's peaceful cottage, and away again, till at a bend
+of the stream the rider saw a cloud of smoke hanging over the ravens'
+cliff, and soon after caught sight of one corner of the castle, with the
+glorious beeches and sycamores low down, and birches high up, scorched
+and shrivelled; and now he saw through an alley burned by the flames
+driven downward by the wind that the beautiful old pile was reduced to a
+shell, in whose interior the smoke was still rising from a heap of
+smouldering wood.
+
+As he drew nearer, and crossed the ford which led to the steep path up,
+he saw on one of the terrace platforms quite a crowd of women and
+children, collected from the outlying cottages and farms, all standing
+gazing at the smoking ruins; and on one side there was a little group of
+men, some standing, others sitting and lying down upon the stones.
+
+"And if it had not been for Dummy our place might have been like this,"
+thought Mark, as he rode up.  The men, as they caught sight of him,
+began to rise to their feet, two or three actively, the others as if in
+pain, but all wearing a savage scowl.
+
+But Mark did not shrink.  He rode right past the women, and drew rein,
+as Nick Garth said fiercely:
+
+"Well, youngster, have you come to enjoy's morning's work?"
+
+"What have I ever done to make you think me such a cowardly brute, Nick
+Garth?" said Mark boldly; as the others uttered a menacing growl.
+"Well," he continued, "is that all you have to say?  What about your
+young master?"
+
+The man's face was convulsed by a spasm, and he turned away, pointing
+the while at the smoking ruins.
+
+"What does he mean by that?" said Mark to another of the men.
+
+"They killed him," said the man hoarsely.  "Burned, poor lad!  In
+yonder."
+
+"No, no," cried Mark excitedly.  "He escaped, and came up to us--to ask
+for help."
+
+"The young master?" cried Nick, turning back to look at the speaker
+fiercely; "why, I see him cut down with my own eyes."
+
+"I tell you, he crawled out of the fire.  He's badly wounded and burned,
+but he's lying in my room, with Master Rayburn by his side."
+
+"Say that again--say that again, youngster!" cried Nick Garth, as he
+caught Mark fiercely by the hand, and thrust his blood-smeared and
+blackened face close to him.
+
+"There is no need," said Mark.  "He is very bad, but he was able to ask
+us for help."
+
+A wild _hurrah_! burst from the men, even the worst wounded waving their
+hands, as they crowded round the startled pony, which began to rear, and
+tried to unseat his rider.
+
+"Quiet!" cried Mark, patting the spirited little animal's neck, and as
+soon as it was quiet, turning to the object of his mission.
+
+"Now," he said, "my father starts this evening to crush out this gang of
+miscreants and rescue Sir Morton and your young lady.  We have plenty of
+swords and pikes, and I have come to ask as many of you as can strike a
+blow to join us."
+
+"Is this a trap, young gen'leman, to make an end of us now we're weak
+and down?"
+
+"Look in my eyes, Nick Garth," said Mark, gazing straight at the sullen
+lowering face.  "The Edens are gentlemen, not such vile cowards as that.
+Now then, who'll come and strike a blow for Sir Morton, your young
+lady, and Master Ralph Darley, lying helpless there?"
+
+"All on us, my lad," cried Nick, with a fierce growl--"all on us as can
+manage to crawl."
+
+"Ay," rose in a shout.
+
+"It's all right, lads," continued Nick; "the young gen'leman means what
+he says.  No one could be such a hound as to come down upon us now.  I
+says it's right, sir.  We trust you, and if you'll give us your hand
+like a man-like an Englishman should--we'll come."
+
+Mark's hand went out, and his handsome young face shone with the glow
+that was at his heart, as he gripped the grimy blackened hand extended
+to him.
+
+He held on tightly, and then gazed wonderingly at the man, whose face
+turned of a very ashy hue, and he caught at the pony's mane to save
+himself from falling.
+
+"What is it?" cried Mark eagerly; "you are faint!"
+
+"Got my hand brent a bit, young master," said the man, recovering
+himself with a forced laugh.  "Better now."
+
+He drew back, and limped a little.
+
+"But you are badly hurt.  I'll get Master Rayburn to run down."
+
+"Nay.  We'll come up to him.  Let him stop with the young master."
+
+"You are not fit to come."
+
+"What!  Not to have a stroke at them devils?" cried the man fiercely.
+"I'm a-coming, and so's all as can walk.  I'd come if it was half a hour
+'fore I was going to die.  I did try to burn 'em where they were
+drinking together, on'y I was in too great a hurry.  I ought to ha'
+waited till they was asleep."
+
+Mark shuddered slightly, but he said no more, and proceeded to examine
+the men, all of whom, to the number of seven, declared themselves fit to
+come.
+
+But, including Nick, there were only five really fit to bear arms; the
+rest had unwillingly to give up.  Still, there were three quite
+uninjured, and these would, Mark felt, be a valuable addition to the
+little force at home, for they were burning to try and do something to
+help Sir Morton in his terrible strait; and even the women wished to
+join.  But this was declared impossible, and soon after, feeling the
+strangeness of his position, Mark was riding back with his recruits.
+
+Five minutes later, he cried, "Halt!" and sprang from his pony.
+
+"Here, Garth," he cried, "I can't ride and see you limp along with that
+wounded leg."
+
+"Can't help my leg being hurt, young sir," cried the man sourly.  "I
+won't go back, so there!"
+
+"I don't want you to; I want you to strike for your master; but you are
+lame.  There: up with you.  Master Rayburn will make you better able to
+walk when we get to the Tor."
+
+"What, me ride on your pony?" said the man, staring.
+
+"Yes: up, and don't lose time."
+
+The man refused again and again, till Mark cried fiercely:
+
+"You said you'd follow me, and I'm in command.  Up this minute, sir;"
+and the man climbed into the saddle.
+
+It was in this fashion that Mark Eden led the Darley men up the zigzag,
+and into the inner court of the Black Tor, where his father's followers
+welcomed them with a hearty cheer, for, enemies they might be, but those
+assembled felt that they were stricken sore.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY SIX.
+
+"HAS YOUR FATHER BEEN A SOLDIER?"
+
+There had been plenty going on in Mark's absence of an hour or two, and
+as soon as he had seen the recruits to their little force settled down
+in the hall to rest and refresh, he hastened up to Master Rayburn to
+find how his patient was going on.  "Badly, Mark, boy," said the old
+man; "very badly.  He has been wounded in the mind as well as body.  The
+best remedy for him will be the knowledge that his father and sister are
+safe.  Well, what fortune in your mission?"
+
+"That's good in two ways," he said, as soon as he had heard Mark's
+account; "strengthens your hands, and sounds as if the people are
+getting as wise as their masters."
+
+Mark did not wish to discuss that subject, for it was irksome to him at
+a time when he felt that he did not know whether the Darleys and he were
+enemies or friends, his thoughts going toward the former as being the
+more natural in connection with the past.
+
+Under these circumstances, he hurried away, descended, and found his
+father superintending the repair of the gate which defended the castle
+by the bridge.  The piping times of peace had caused carelessness, and
+this gate had been so neglected that Purlrose and his men had had no
+difficulty in levering it off the pivots, and gaining an entrance.
+
+Sir Edward was determined not to be caught sleeping again, for sentinels
+had been posted, and various means taken for strengthening the place.
+As for the damage to the great doors of the hall, these had already been
+covered with stout boarding, and missiles in the shape of heavy stones
+and pigs of lead were piled up on the platform of each tower.
+
+Under Dan Rugg's supervision, arquebuses had been cleaned and placed
+ready for use, and a couple of small cannon trained where they could
+sweep the approach to the bridge, and in turn the gateways leading into
+the outer and inner courts.
+
+Sir Edward expressed himself as being highly pleased with his son's
+success; and, treating him in this emergency as if he were a man, he
+joined him in the little council of war that was held with Dan Rugg.  In
+this the best way of proceeding was discussed, and it was determined
+that instead of waiting for the darkness, the attacking party should set
+off early in the evening.
+
+For old Dan had said: "It's no use to think of trying to surprise them
+now, master; they'll be well on the look out for us, and have men ready.
+Means a sharp bit of fighting to get up to the hole yonder, but once we
+get there, the powder will fight for us."
+
+"You mean to fire some at the entrance?" said Mark.
+
+"Ay, Master Mark; that's it, and then send another bag in before us, and
+fire that, and go on doing it till we've either blasted 'em all out of
+the place or made 'em so sick and sorry that they'll cry surrender."
+
+The hours glided by, as it seemed to Mark, very slowly, till the time
+appointed for starting approached; and, after a final glance at Ralph,
+he was coming down, when Master Rayburn followed him.
+
+"I should like to come with you, Mark, my boy," he said gravely, "but my
+place is here.  Heaven grant that you may be successful; and if you
+are," he said meaningly, "there will be peace in our vale."
+
+Mark pressed his hand, buckled on his sword, and went down into the yard
+to join his father, who was giving final instructions to the wounded men
+about keeping the gates fast during their absence, not that an attack
+was expected, but "to make assurance doubly sure."
+
+While he was giving his last instructions, Dummy came running over the
+bridge, and trotted up to Sir Edward.
+
+"Well, boy, could you see anything?"
+
+"Yes," replied Dummy, with a sharp nod of the head.  "You can see two,
+if you go far enough, one on each side of the hill, keeping a look out."
+
+"Did they see you?"
+
+"Nay, I was a-creeping among the bushes."
+
+"Then it is of no use to try and get up unobserved, Mark," said Sir
+Edward, quietly.  "It must be a bold open attack."
+
+He turned and said a few words to Sir Morton Darley's men, Nick and the
+rest, after having had their injuries tended, and a few hours' rest and
+refreshment, looking far better prepared for the encounter, and falling
+into their places with sullen determination.
+
+Mark, at a word from his father, marched up alongside of Nick Garth, who
+gave him a surly nod, and seemed to be about to speak, but checked
+himself, and then let his curiosity master him.
+
+"What ha' they got in them baskets?" he said, nodding to a couple strung
+from poles, and each hanging from two men's shoulders, "bread and
+cheese?"
+
+"No: blasting-powder."
+
+"Eh?  What for?" said the man, staring.
+
+"Blow out the cavern," said Mark quietly.
+
+The man uttered a low long whistle, and then a grim smile covered his
+face.
+
+"Hah!" he whispered, "that does a man good, young Eden!  I was coming,
+and I meant to fight till I dropped; but after what we tried to do, I
+knew they'd be too many for us; but I begin to see my way now."
+
+"Yes, they don't like the powder," said Mark.  "We made them run with it
+when they attacked us here."
+
+"What, did they 'tack you here?"
+
+"Yes, and were beaten off, and came down to you."
+
+"Well, it wasn't very neighbourly to send 'em down to us," said the man
+sourly.
+
+"You should have beaten them off, and sent them back again," said Mark,
+smiling.
+
+Then the order to march came, and the little band of sturdy men went off
+at a solemn tramp, Dummy carrying a couple of lanterns and a box slung
+from his shoulder, well supplied with torches, candles, and slow match,
+for the powder which it did not fall to his lot to bear.
+
+As they passed over the bridge, the wounded men clanged to the gates,
+and two of them took their places on the tower above, while, as the
+party tramped across and turned to descend the zigzag, a thought came to
+Mark, and he turned back to glance at the window of his bed-chamber, as
+he wished that Ralph Darley were uninjured and marching by his side to
+help in the rescue of his father and sister.
+
+There were two faces at the casement: those of Mary and Master Rayburn;
+and as the lad descended the slope they waved their hands to him.  The
+next minute the cliff-side hid them from view.
+
+The march in the calm bright evening was uneventful.  Everything was so
+beautiful that it seemed hard to realise the horrors which had taken
+place during the past night, till Mark looked to right or left, and saw
+the bandages of several of the men.  Nick Garth, too, was limping, but
+he resolutely kept on declaring that it was nothing to mind.
+
+The Steeple Stone was left to the right, for there was this time no
+party of allies to meet; and very soon the great heavy mass of barren
+rocky hill loomed up before them, higher and higher, till the party were
+out from among the trees which had so far concealed their march, and
+proof was soon given that they were observed.
+
+For all at once something was seen to be in motion, and Dummy shouted:
+
+"There: I told you so!"
+
+At the distance they then were, the object seen might have been a sheep
+or goat, slowly moving up the higher part of the mountain; but before
+long it stood out on the ridge, clear against the golden evening sky,
+plainly enough now a man.
+
+Mark judged that after watching them the sentinel waved his hand to some
+one below, for the movement was seen, and a few minutes later another,
+and again another figure came up to stand clearly marked against the
+sky; and after a time all descended, their course being tracked down the
+barren hill face, till they disappeared, without doubt, in through the
+mouth of the cavern.
+
+"Preparing a warm reception for us, Mark, my lad," said Sir Edward,
+advancing to his son's side; "but we shall be able to give them one
+equally warm.  Well, my man, how are the wounds?  Would you like to have
+ten minutes' halt?"
+
+Nick, to whom this was addressed, showed his teeth in a peculiar smile.
+
+"When we've done our work, master; not before.  Dessay we shall be
+'bliged to wait before we get in."
+
+"I hope not," said Sir Edward.  "I mean for us to make a bold rush."
+
+"That's right, master," said the man, whose fellows were listening
+eagerly; "but I've been thinking about Sir Morton yonder, and my young
+lady."
+
+"Yes?  What about them?" asked Sir Edward.
+
+"You're going to use blasting-powder?"
+
+"Well, what of that?"
+
+"I was thinking about them inside.  We wouldn't like to hurt them."
+
+"Of course not; but as I know the place, there is little fear.  I went
+in some distance, some twenty years ago, and the passages run to and fro
+and keep opening up into chambers.  Now, one of these, some distance in,
+is sure to be turned into a prison for the captives, where they would be
+beyond the reach of the powder, and I feel certain that they would be
+too far away to be hurt."
+
+"Won't bring the roof down upon 'em, will it?" asked the man.
+
+"I don't think there is any fear; but it is only where we fail to drive
+the wretches back that I shall have a charge fired.  I must save my men
+from injury as much as I can."
+
+"That's what Sir Morton used to say, young gentleman," said Nick, as Sir
+Edward drew back; and for the next half-hour the attacking party, a good
+twenty strong, advanced steadily, the steepness of the climb soon
+enforcing slower progress.
+
+For some little time now they had been aware of the fact that the enemy
+had been making preparations for an attack.  Taught by the last, they
+had worked hard, and built-up a massive wall across the entrance to
+their stronghold, this defensive work being formed of the rough blocks
+lying about the little slope, and for the most part they were dragged
+down, and hoisted into their place.
+
+Upon this, half-a-dozen armed men were standing, watching their
+approach, and the attacking party made out their swords and pikes, the
+latter leaning against a rock, with their bright steel heads sloping
+towards the climbers.
+
+When these latter were within about a hundred yards, Sir Edward halted
+his party, and ranged them in a curved line, the men at a short distance
+from each other, so that as they all made for the mouth of the cave they
+would gradually draw together, and be close when they delivered the
+attack.
+
+"Pikes only," said Sir Edward.  "Keep your swords for the close
+hand-to-hand work."
+
+"Has your father been a soldier, youngster?" whispered Nick Garth
+hoarsely.
+
+"No; why?"
+
+"Talks like one.  He couldn't do better.  He'll give the word soon, and
+the sooner the better.  I've got my wind now.  'Member the master and
+the young missus, lads."
+
+There was a growl from his companions, and as Mark glanced at them he
+felt that it would go hard with any one among the enemy who came within
+reach of their pikes.
+
+The enemy had, however, now descended from the top of their wall, and
+only their heads and breasts were visible, as, ten strong now, they
+stood in a row, with their pikes resting upon the top; ready to thrust
+at the first who came within reach.
+
+"Now, my lads," cried Sir Edward; "have you all got your wind?"
+
+"Ay!" ran along the crescent line.
+
+"You with the powder, and the two centre men stand fast till you are
+wanted."
+
+This order was obeyed as the next was given, and headed by Sir Edward
+and his son, the party made steadily for the wall, at first slowly and
+gradually increasing the pace, till Sir Edward cried, "Charge!" and they
+broke into a trot, the fastest speed to be attained to upon such a
+slope.
+
+Then, amidst shouts of hatred and mocking defiance from the marauders,
+there was the clash of steel, and the heavy rattling noise made by the
+pike-staves, as, thrusting and stabbing, the attacking party strove to
+win their way over the wall.  Sir Edward led his men bravely, while, in
+a wild fit of excitement, Mark, young as he was, strove to show the
+Darley men that he was worthy to be their leader.
+
+A fierce rage filled these men, fresh from the ruined home, and half mad
+with desire to revenge themselves upon those who had given them their
+wounds; but all along it was the same; they were at a terrible
+disadvantage in their approach, their enemies having their undefended
+bodies as marks for their weapons, while they had only head and
+shoulders to strike at, the rest of their bodies being safe, behind the
+strong breastwork.
+
+Then, too, feeling secure in this approach to their stronghold, the
+marauders stood firm, waiting their opportunities, and then thrusting
+home, with the result that several of their assailants went down, and at
+the end of five minutes' vain attack, Sir Edward ordered the men to draw
+back a few yards, and with some difficulty he and his son, by rushing
+before them, and thrusting up their pikes, induced them to obey.
+
+"This is useless, Mark," he said anxiously.  "They are too strong for
+us.  Take the extreme right next time we advance, and I will take the
+left.  Then as soon as they are well engaged in front, you, with two men
+must try to get in over your end, and drop over amongst them from the
+side, and I will do the same.  Do you dare to do that?"
+
+"I feel as if it is horribly risky," replied the boy, "but I'll try."
+
+"Then you will do it," said Sir Edward quietly.  "Choose your men, and I
+will do the same."
+
+Five minutes later, amidst the mocking jeers of the men behind the
+breastwork, a fresh attack was made, and as Mark reached the front, he
+ducked down to avoid a thrust from a lance, crept close to the wall and,
+followed by Nick Garth and Ram Jennings, turned the end of the stones,
+climbed on, and reached the stone-strewn cliffs behind.
+
+Then, knowing that the two men, in their fierce energy and hate, would
+be quite close, Mark turned suddenly, drew himself up, sword in hand--
+his followers letting their pikes slip through their hands, and holding
+them close up to the heads--and leaped down inside the breastwork, his
+father simultaneously coming over at the other flank.
+
+There was not much force in either attack, but it proved effectual by
+its suddenness, throwing the defenders into confusion.
+
+These rallied directly, and pikes were swung round and directed at the
+flanking parties, but the momentary check gave the men in front the
+opportunity to rush close up to the breastwork, which now became their
+protection, the defenders, having fallen back, becoming in turn exposed.
+
+The fight now became furious, for the marauders began to back toward the
+mouth of the cave, giving way step by step, as the length of their line
+was gradually contracted by one after another dashing in, till all had
+passed into the narrow passage, the first men blocking the way with the
+heads of their pikes, while their fellows stooped and crept beneath,
+till the last was in safety.  It is needless to say that an attempt to
+follow would have meant instant death.
+
+A cheer now rose from the attacking party, who had achieved the taking
+of the outwork, and Sir Edward forced his way to his son's side, to clap
+him on the shoulder, as he stood just out of reach of the defenders'
+bristling pikes, which effectually barred the way.
+
+"We have them now, Mark," he cried.  "Pass the word there for Daniel
+Rugg."
+
+But a low growl on the other side of the wall told that there was no
+need to pass any word.  As soon as he saw that there was a chance for
+the next step, Dan had signed to Dummy, who trotted forward with
+lantern, fuse, and powder-bag, and father and son climbed into the
+little fort a few feet away from the opening into the cavern.
+
+"Silence!" roared Sir Edward now--"you within there, lay down your arms,
+and march out at once."
+
+A defiant yell came from the holders of the pikes, enraging Nick Garth
+to such an extent that he picked up a block of stone from the top of the
+breastwork, raised it above his head, and dashed it into the doorway,
+Ram Jennings following suit with another.
+
+The stones crashed in among the pikes with plenty of rattling, and a
+burst of yells followed as the men picked up a couple more.
+
+"Stop, there," cried Sir Edward sternly.  "You can do no good, and I
+want the wall left sound for our own protection."
+
+Nick growled savagely, but he obeyed, and the men all stood fast at the
+cavern's mouth with presented pikes, ready to attack if any movement was
+made by the defenders, while Dan Rugg and his son quickly prepared their
+missile.
+
+"Ready," shouted Dan from where he stood inside the wall with, his back
+to the men, and with Dummy looking intensely interested standing ready
+with the lantern.
+
+"You, in there," cried Sir Edward now, "will you surrender?"
+
+"No," cried a hoarse voice from inside.  "Go back with your ragged pack
+of hungry hounds, or we'll come and burn you out as we did the other
+idiot."
+
+"Once more," cried Sir Edward, who still hesitated to proceed to the
+sternest measures; "will you give up your prisoners and surrender?"
+
+"Bah!  Laugh at him, boys," cried the same hoarse voice: and another
+derisive yell arose.
+
+"Out with you, my lads," cried Sir Edward; and his men sprang over the
+wall again.
+
+"You too, Mark," said Sir Edward; and Mark followed, while Dan Rugg came
+close up with his bag of powder and fuse carefully tied in.
+
+"Lay it as near as you can, so as to be out of reach of the pikes."
+
+"No good, Sir Edward," said the man in a husky whisper.  "Out with you.
+I'm going to light the fuse, and go right close, and heave it in over
+their pikes."
+
+"But that is too dangerous for you."
+
+"Not it.  I know to a quarter of a minute when it will fire, and I shall
+hold it till then.  That'll give me time to jump the wall.  Quick, sir,
+please."
+
+It was no time for hesitation, and feeling that his old servant at the
+mine could be trusted, Sir Edward climbed the wall, and Dummy, showing
+his teeth in a satisfied grin, opened the door of the lantern.
+
+The next moment Dan had held the end of the short fuse he had provided
+to the candle, and a slight spluttering began.
+
+"Over with you," growled Dan, as his son snapped to the lantern door.
+
+"Take care of yourself, daddy," said the boy coolly.
+
+"You be off," growled Dan, and Dummy placed the lantern on the top of
+the breastwork, and vaulted over amongst the men, who were crouching
+down behind, to be out of the blast.
+
+All this had taken place unknown to the defenders, who, from the
+narrowness of the entrance, were shut off from seeing the quaint,
+sardonic face of the old miner, as he stood holding the bag, with the
+burning fuse spluttering and sending up its curls of greyish smoke.
+
+The men held their breath, and Mark's eyes dilated as he watched the
+brave old fellow holding the bag, in the full knowledge that if he held
+the powder a moment too long he must be shattered to pieces.
+
+It was a combination of the familiarity which breeds contempt and the
+confidence born of long experience which made Dan Rugg stand there so
+coolly for what seemed to be a long time before turning as he watched
+the burning fuse.
+
+"Heads down there," he said suddenly; "she's going off."
+
+There was a quick movement, but Mark felt as if he was held by a
+nightmare dream, and he stood there watching, as the old man took a
+couple of steps forward, and now for the first time in full sight of
+those who held the fence of cross pikes.
+
+In an instant there was a wild yell, and the pikes went down with their
+heads to the stones, and disappeared, but it was as Dan Rugg raised the
+bag above his head, and hurling it right into the cavern passage, he
+started aside to the shelter of the wall, while now by a step aside Mark
+also reached shelter.  Then there was a roar and a burst of flame and
+smoke came as from the mouth of a cannon, and the men sprang up again to
+cheer.
+
+"Steady--steady!" cried Sir Edward.  "Now, my lads, over the wall with
+you, and follow me; never mind the smoke.  Rugg, have another charge
+ready; we shall want it soon."
+
+"Ay, Sir Edward, that was a failure.  I didn't hold it long enough.
+They had time to get away."
+
+Sir Edward and his son entered the murk, and had to feel their way, and
+halted.
+
+"Light torches," cried Mark: and half-a-dozen were lit and passed in,
+when once more the party advanced, expecting to be attacked, but the
+blast had produced a scare, though it had done no serious harm, save
+tearing down a few stones, and instead of attacking, the marauders stood
+on their defence in the place familiar to Mark and some of the men.
+
+There was again the same bristling array of pikes in the opening; and
+after a renewed summons to surrender, the old miner proceeded coolly to
+prepare a second bag of powder.
+
+This was fired, but the explosion did not take place till some time
+after the defenders of the cavern had retreated; and for a while the
+passage was so stifling with the fumes that it was impossible to go on,
+so the party had to draw back to allow them to be dissipated.
+
+At last it was deemed prudent to proceed, and once more the advance was
+ordered, the men eagerly obeying; and with torches adding their smoke to
+that already hanging in the gloomy cracks and vaults, they pressed on
+till once more the way was blocked.
+
+It was no array of spear-points in a narrow passage, but in this case
+the solid blocking of a wall of stone, built-up with care, the stones
+well wedged in, a narrow opening left for the retreat of the defenders
+having been filled up since their last retreat, and the wonder to those
+who examined it was that it had been so quickly secured.
+
+The choice of position, though, had been well made, for the passage was
+not above four feet wide at this point, and the roof had sunk till it
+was in this particular spot only five in height.
+
+Once more the powder was brought forward by Dummy, the bag laid close to
+the bottom stones, the fuse added, and lit, and the party retired to a
+safe distance, to wait until the powder had swept the barrier away.
+
+The explosion was long in coming, and when it did, with a mighty roar,
+an hour had to be passed before another advance was made, but no farther
+than the wall, which was found apparently quite uninjured, though the
+powder had brought down a huge mass from the roof.
+
+"Pull it down," said Sir Edward impatiently, and a couple of the men--
+there was no room for more--attacked the well-fitted stones, but only
+for one to start back with a cry of rage and pain, his hand to his side.
+
+"Hurt?" cried Mark excitedly, and he ran to the man's aid, to be sent
+staggering back by a heavy blow.
+
+It was Sir Edward's turn to rush to his son, and he too reeled as he
+received a thrust, but in the case of both, the pike-thrusts did not
+penetrate their clothes, the point of the weapon having been turned,
+unknown to the man who used it, by a thrust against the rock.
+
+It was a warning, and throwing the light of the torches well upon the
+built-up wall, a couple of the men found the holes through which the
+thrusts had been made, and advancing cautiously to send their pikes
+through, had to leap back again, for the enemy thrust at them.  Nick
+struck in turn, though, and a yell of pain told that it was not without
+effect.
+
+"Keep back," cried Sir Edward, as his men advanced recklessly, and when
+the wounded man had been drawn away and carried out, after a rough
+bandage had been applied to his wound, Sir Edward turned to his son.
+
+"You must be hurt, my boy," he whispered.
+
+"I was, father, horribly."
+
+"But I mean wounded."
+
+"Only my doublet," said the lad merrily.  "What are we to do now?"
+
+After a few moments' thought, as Nick Garth had been so able, Sir Edward
+decided to let him try again, which he eagerly did, feigning so as to
+draw a thrust from the enemy, and darting aside and close up to the
+wall.  Then, as the man withdrew his pike, Nick, holding his own short,
+thrust it through after it, and again there was a yell of pain, but
+almost at the same moment Ram Jennings was just reached by a thrust
+through another hole, and sprang back, roaring like a wild beast.
+
+"Yah! don't howl like that," cried Nick angrily; "do as I do."
+
+But poor Ram Jennings preferred to stand nursing his injured arm, and
+watching his fellow ramming away with his pike, as if loading a gun,
+till suddenly it was jerked out of his hand, and drawn through the wall.
+
+"Look at that," he growled.  "Here, give's hold of another."
+
+But Sir Edward ordered him back.
+
+"It's of no use, my lad," he cried; "come away."
+
+"All very well to say come away, captain," growled the man, as he stood
+close up, "but if I stir, I shall get a hole through me."
+
+Sir Edward saw the man's difficult position, and gave an order in a low
+tone, when every man bearing a light ran back and round one of the
+corners, leaving the cavern in darkness.
+
+Nick took advantage thereof, and sprang away from his perilous position.
+The rattle of a pike-staff against the stones told that a thrust had
+been made at him in the darkness.
+
+"Are you hit?" cried Mark anxiously.
+
+"Ay, youngster, but on'y with the staff," growled Nick; and the order
+for the lights to be brought back was given and obeyed.
+
+"Another, Rugg," said Sir Edward laconically, and Dan, who had a bag
+ready, primed with fuse, laid it on the stony floor, picked it up on the
+point of a pike, and advanced to place it against the wall.
+
+A couple of thrusts were made at it directly, but he lowered it, and the
+enemy could not force their points down low enough to reach it.  But as
+Dan placed it against the bottom of the wall the pikes were aimed now at
+his breast.
+
+"Back!" roared Sir Edward, as Mark rushed at the man to drag him away.
+
+"All right, Master Mark," said Dan coolly; "my arms and my pike are as
+long as theirs.  They can't reach me.  They've got all the thickness of
+the wall to push through as well;" and he coolly placed the powder-bag
+and arranged the fuse ready for being lighted.
+
+"I did not think of that, Dan," said Mark.
+
+"Ay, but I did," said the old fellow, chuckling.  "Now, Dummy, my boy,
+son, bring a lighted torch."
+
+Dummy trotted forward, and they heard a growl from beyond the wall, as
+the miner thrust the point of his pike into the end of the torch, and
+then reached out toward the fuse, but only succeeded in getting it
+half-way before it was knocked off the point of his weapon.
+
+"Ah, deal o' good that's done," growled Dan, trying to drive the point
+of his pike into the torch again.  "There," he shouted, "run for it; I
+can reach to pitch it up to the bag."
+
+The men on the other side did not grasp the fact that if Dan did this
+his companions would fare worse than they, but scuffled off at once,
+their steps being plainly heard.
+
+"Fools!" growled Dan, and stepping forward, he picked up the torch, went
+close up to the wall, and touched the end of the fuse, which began to
+sparkle at once.
+
+"Plenty o' time, Sir Edward," he said coolly, "if you'll now order us
+back."
+
+The order was given, and as it was obeyed, Sir Edward and his son
+retiring last, they saw Nick Garth step close up to old Dan and pat him
+on the shoulder.
+
+"You're a cool one, mate," he said.  "I never see one as cool as you."
+
+Dan chuckled a little, and all went along the narrow passage and into
+the chamber beyond, well out of reach of the blast, and waited.
+
+It was a good two minutes before the explosion took place, and Mark had
+made perfectly sure that the fuse had gone out, when there was a
+sensation as if his breath was being sucked away, then a deafening roar,
+followed by a crash.
+
+Again they had to wait till the fumes had somewhat dispersed.  Then,
+with Sir Edward and Mark leading, they returned, expecting to see the
+wall demolished; but as far as they could see it was perfectly sound,
+while another huge mass from the roof had come down, to lie piled up
+before it, so that there was hardly room for a man to crawl over the
+heap, so close was it to the roof.
+
+"It's of no use, Mark," whispered Sir Edward, as they drew back a little
+from the smoke, "we must devise some other plan.  It is useless to try
+another bag there without first clearing away the mass of stones, and we
+can only do that at the expense of many men wounded by pike-thrusts,
+perhaps killed."
+
+"Yes," said Mark, "and it doesn't seem fair to order them to do it."
+
+"I cannot, my boy.  There, we have done our work for this time.  Let's
+get out of this horrible smoke."
+
+"Hoi, you!" came from beyond the wall; "if you fire any more of that
+choke-dog stuff, I'll give orders to my men to kill the prisoners,
+'specially the girl."
+
+"You cowardly ruffian!" cried Mark, in a rage.
+
+"Bah!  Puppy!" came back scornfully.
+
+"Don't answer, boy," said Sir Edward softly.
+
+"But father!--if--"
+
+"It is only a boast.  They dare not do such a thing as that.  Come."
+
+They retired, making for the mouth of the cavern, where the cool night
+air blew with refreshing force.
+
+"But we cannot give up, father," cried Mark.
+
+"I am not going to give up, my boy," said Sir Edward quietly.  "When an
+assault upon a stronghold fails, a general tries to starve his enemy
+into submission.  We must do the same here.  Unfortunately they must
+have stores, and they have a good supply of water from a spring within
+there.  But still we must try.  The first thing is to protect ourselves
+from a sudden attack, and this will be easy.  Now, my lads, every man
+take in a block of stone, and carry it into the cavern as far as the end
+of the first chamber.  Take these from the breastwork; we do not want it
+now, for we shall encamp inside."
+
+Mark nodded approval, and the men, glad that the night's fighting was at
+an end, set to work with a will, after laying their arms aside; and in
+less than an hour had walled up to a great thickness the narrow exit
+from the cavern, wedging in the top stones with blows, and in spite of
+the want of mortar producing a good solid piece of work, through which
+no pikes could be thrust.
+
+This done, Sir Edward reduced his force to one-third, this being plenty
+to defend the wall should it be attacked from the inner side; and the
+rest were sent back to the Tor Castle, for provisions and blankets.
+
+"Now, Mark, lad," said Sir Edward, "the thing to consider is, how long
+can the enemy hold out?"
+
+"Not long, father," replied the lad; "they cannot have a very good
+supply."
+
+"That," said Sir Edward, "remains to be proved."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY SEVEN.
+
+PREPARATIONS FOR A SIEGE.
+
+Siege was now commenced, Ergles being to all intents and purposes an
+impregnable natural castle.  Provisions and other necessaries were
+brought up, and the force was divided into three watches, who regularly
+mounted guard in the chamber in front of the wall.  But the whole of the
+next day passed without a sound being heard, the enemy not attempting to
+break down their own side, for fear of getting into a trap, the utter
+stillness being interpreted to mean a _ruse_ to get them to make an
+opening through which an attack would be made.
+
+Then another day was passed, and still all was quiet; but toward the
+middle of the next those on guard in the chamber heard, and reported to
+Mark, that they could hear the distant sound of stones rolling down, and
+Mark went and listened so as to determine whether his father ought to be
+roused, for after a very long watch he had lain down upon a blanket to
+sleep.
+
+"I wouldn't call un, Master Mark," said Dan.  "He's tired enough.
+Watches twice to our once.  Let the hounds come; we could account for
+'em if they tried to pull our wall down."
+
+"Well, it would be plenty of time to awaken my father if they came and
+tried," said Mark.  "Look here, then, we'll wait; and let it be in
+perfect silence, so that we may hear if they come as far as the other
+side of the wall."
+
+The men were as obedient to his orders as to those of Sir Edward, and
+they all sat or lay about, with their weapons close to their hands,
+listening in the darkness, the calm and silence being good for thought;
+and before long Mark's brain was at work thinking about the state of
+affairs at the castle, to which he had been three times since the siege
+began, to see his sister and learn how Ralph Darley was progressing.
+
+The news was always bad, Master Rayburn shaking his head and looking
+very serious.
+
+"Bad hurts, Mark, boy," he said, "bad hurts.  I hope, please God, he may
+be spared; but I have my fears."
+
+"Master Rayburn!" cried Mark wildly.  "Oh! you must not--you shall not
+let the brave fellow die."
+
+"I'd give my poor old life to save his," said the old man sadly.  "We
+can only wait and hope."
+
+And as Mark sat in the dark natural chamber formed in the old limestone
+hill, he recalled Ralph's white, fire-scarred face, looking pale and
+unnaturally drawn, and wondered that he should feel so low-spirited
+about one who was an enemy and almost a stranger, till his musings were
+interrupted by a dull sound on the other side of the wall--a sound which
+came after the long period of utter silence which had succeeded to the
+noise made by forcing out and rolling down stones.
+
+No one else heard the faint sound, and setting it down to fancy, Mark
+was thinking again about the prisoners within, and wondering what
+treatment they were receiving from the enemy.
+
+It seemed hard enough for Sir Morton Darley, but Mark could not help
+feeling how terrible it must be for a delicately sensitive girl.
+
+Then once more he heard that sound, which he felt sure could only be
+caused by a foot kicking against a stone.
+
+Just then there was a faint rustling, a hand was laid upon his arm, and
+Dummy whispered:
+
+"Hear that, Master Mark?"
+
+"Yes.  Don't talk," whispered Mark, and the two lads, who were well upon
+the alert, listened in perfect silence, till all at once there was a
+faint gleam of light, so feeble that it could hardly be distinguished,
+but there it was, close to the roof, and Mark was satisfied that it must
+come over the top of their defensive wall.
+
+Then all was still for a minute or two, till the two mentally saw what
+was taking place--some one was passing his hands over the built-up
+stones, and trying whether one of them could be dislodged.
+
+Then all was still again, and the light died out.
+
+It was not till hours after that any further sound was heard, and this
+time Sir Edward was awake and about, passing from the dark chamber where
+the sentries were on guard to the light outside, and back again.
+
+Mark went with him, and Sir Edward had just happened to say in a
+whisper:
+
+"All quiet enough now," when a voice, apparently close to his elbow,
+said hoarsely:
+
+"No.  I'm not going to walk into a trap."
+
+There was a good deal in those few words, for to Mark, among other
+things, they meant that if the speaker was not going to walk into a
+trap, it was because he must have food enough to last him for some time
+longer, and was not willing to lay down his arms.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY EIGHT.
+
+DUMMY RUGG HAS THE THINKS.
+
+The blockade was strictly kept up at the mouth of the cavern, Sir Edward
+having cast aside, at all events for the time being, every feeling of
+enmity; and in spite of the many disappointments, he grew day by day
+more determined to rout out the gang, and rescue their prisoners.  "Only
+tell me what to do, Mark, my boy, and if it is possible, it shall be
+done.  If we go on blasting the place we shall end by shutting them in
+beyond recovery," said Sir Edward, "a good enough thing to do as far as
+the ruffians are concerned, but we shall destroy Sir Morton Darley and
+his child."
+
+"I can't think of anything, father," said Mark, gloomily.  "I suppose we
+can only wait."
+
+"That is the conclusion I always come to, my boy.  All we can do is to
+be perfectly ready for the moment when, utterly desperate, they will
+surrender or break out."
+
+"I hope they'll fight, father," said Mark grimly.  "Why?"
+
+"Because it would be so horrible for them to surrender.  I'd rather see
+them die fighting."
+
+"Yes," said Sir Edward, frowning heavily.  "Hanging prisoners was all
+very well a hundred years ago.  We don't want to do that sort of thing
+nowadays.  There, run over to the Tor, and see how things are going.
+You need not hurry back.  Tell Mary I shall come myself to-morrow, and
+that I'm getting very tired of sleeping in a cavern."
+
+"But suppose the men try to break out while I'm gone, father."
+
+"Well, if they do, I shall have all the honour of the fight."
+
+"But I shall not like that," said Mark.
+
+"I might say the same to you to-morrow, my boy," said Sir Edward,
+smiling.  "Go and see how young Darley is; we cannot give up everything
+to this business."
+
+Mark started for home, leaving his father with a strong enough guard to
+master the men if they attempted to escape; and before he had gone fifty
+yards, Dummy came trotting after his young master like a dog.
+
+"Hullo! what is it, Dummy?" cried Mark, stopping short.
+
+"Only coming home with you, Master Mark.  Saw you, and father said he
+didn't want me."
+
+"Oh, very well.  Getting tired of it?"
+
+"Ever so, Master Mark.  I liked it when we were firing the powder, or
+having a bit of a fight, but it's so stupid to be doing nothing but sit
+down and watch a wall, like dogs after rabbits that won't ever come."
+
+"Yes," said Mark, with a sigh, "it is weary work."
+
+"Father says he don't believe they'll ever come."
+
+"But they must, when they've finished their food."
+
+"He says they've got such lots.  They've been at work, he says, for
+twenty miles round, as he knows, and they've stored up sacks of meal and
+corn, and sides of bacon, and hams, and pickle-tubs of pork.  There
+aren't no end to the stuff they've got, and then they've plenty of good
+water, both warm and cold."
+
+"Oh, don't talk about it," cried Mark; "it makes me feel as bad as can
+be."
+
+Dummy settled down into the mood which originated his name during the
+rest of the way, and the lads parted as they reached the Tor, Dummy to
+go down the steps to the mine to see how everything looked, and report
+to his father upon his return, and Mark to hurry up to his room, where
+Ralph Darley lay insensible still, and where he had a very warm
+reception from his sister and Master Rayburn.
+
+"Then you have taken the place at last, Mark," cried Mary.
+
+"No," said the lad, frowning, "and we're not likely to take it.  I say,
+Master Rayburn, isn't he a long time getting better?"
+
+"Yes," said the old man gravely, "and perhaps after all it is a mercy
+that he remains insensible.  Poor fellow! it would be horrible for him,
+in his weak state, to lie fretting because he could not go to the help
+of his father and sister."
+
+Mark conveyed his message about Sir Edward's intentions for the
+following day, and he was bending down over the sufferer's pillow,
+thinking how very much he was changed, when there was a tap at the door,
+and an announcement that Dummy Rugg must see Master Mark directly.
+
+"I must go, Mary," said Mark excitedly.  "Some one has come over after
+us."
+
+"Oh Mark!" cried the girl, looking startled, and clinging to him.
+
+"Don't do that," cried the lad.  "Be brave; I'll take all the care I
+can."
+
+"Yes," said Master Rayburn to him, with a sad smile, "you will take all
+the care you can.  I know what you are, Mark, but do try, boy, not to be
+rash."
+
+Mark promised, and hurried down and out into the courtyard; but there
+was no Dummy visible till he had passed the second, and found him seated
+on a block of stone, whistling, and swinging his legs to and fro.
+
+"What is it? some one come to fetch us?" cried Mark excitedly.
+
+"No: nobody aren't come," said the boy, looking at him fixedly.
+
+"Then why did you send for me?" cried Mark angrily.
+
+"'Cause I wanted you, Master Mark, very bad indeed."
+
+"Here, what do you mean?  What's the matter with you?"
+
+"Got the thinks, very bad."
+
+"Dummy!"
+
+"Yes, Master Mark, I was took with 'em as soon as I got as far as the
+powder store.  It all come at once."
+
+"What do you mean?"
+
+Dummy was perfectly silent, but not perfectly still; for as he stared
+straight in Mark's face in a peculiarly stolid way, he kept on swinging
+and jerking his legs till he seemed as if some one was pulling a string
+to make him act like a jumping toy.
+
+"Look here, stupid-head," cried Mark angrily, but only to break into a
+laugh, half of amusement, half of vexatious contempt, "are you going
+mad?"
+
+"I dunno, Master Mark.  Perhaps I am.  There's something keeps on
+buzzing in my head like a wheel going round."
+
+"You've been out too much in the sun."
+
+"No, I aren't.  I've been down the mine in the dark."
+
+"And got frightened?"
+
+"Not as I knows on, Master Mark.  It's the thinks."
+
+"Here, what do you mean, thick-head?  I can't stop here listening to
+your nonsense."
+
+"'Taren't nonsense, Master Mark," said the boy, giving him a peculiar
+stare.
+
+"What is it, then?"
+
+"I want to know where that water goes to yonder in the mine."
+
+"What! do you mean to say you've had me fetched out to tell me that?"
+
+Dummy nodded, and Mark doubled his fist.
+
+"I've got it, Master Mark."
+
+"Got what, you idiot?"
+
+"We're up ever so much higher here than they are at Ergles, yonder,
+aren't we?"
+
+"Higher?  Of course," said Mark, looking at the lad curiously; "but what
+of that?"
+
+"That's what I wanted you to tell me, Master Mark, and that's it then."
+
+"What's what then?"
+
+"Why, that water in the mine where we went along, and was under us when
+we went to sleep--that goes along under ground, right under the
+moorland, and it comes out again in Ergles Dale."
+
+"Do you think it goes in that direction?"
+
+Dummy nodded.
+
+"Well, but suppose it does, what then?"
+
+"I'm sure it does now, Master Mark, and what the thinks have made me
+see's this: if you and me had kept going on instead of sitting down, and
+eating and drinking till we went fas' asleep, we should have found
+ourselves in Ergles Hole, and if it hadn't been for the Purlrose gang,
+we might have worked back 'bove ground."
+
+"Why, Dummy!  I don't know--yes, if it's that way--goes for miles.  I
+say, perhaps you're right."
+
+"Yes, I'm right," said the boy quietly; "but you don't jump about a bit:
+you aren't glad."
+
+"Glad?  Jump about?  Why should I?  Oh!"
+
+"Haw--haw--haw!" laughed Dummy.  "He can see it now.  Why, it come to
+me, Master Mark, like a flash of lightning."
+
+"Oh, Dummy, I'll never call you a thick-head again," cried Mark
+excitedly.
+
+"Why not?  May if you like: I don't mind."
+
+"Then you think," cried the lad, who was trembling now with excitement,
+"that we might get into Ergles through our mine?"
+
+"Sure I do--all along them grotters and passages."
+
+"And take the ruffians by surprise?"
+
+"Ketch 'em asleep, Master Mark.  They'd never think of our coming
+behind, like."
+
+Mark seized the boy by the shoulders, and shook him as hard as ever he
+could.
+
+"Why, you stupid old, ugly old, cleverest fellow that ever was!  Why
+didn't you think of this before?"
+
+"Couldn't, Master Mark," cried the boy, grinning as if he were
+determined to display every tooth in his head; "it never come till this
+morning.  Right, aren't I?"
+
+"Right!  You must be.  But suppose we can't get all the way?"
+
+"Water does.  Sure to be plenty of room.  See how there always was."
+
+"Hurrah!  Then we'll go at once."
+
+"What, us two?"
+
+"Of course!"
+
+"We couldn't fight all that lot.  Six to one!"
+
+"No; we must go and tell my father at once."
+
+"That's best way," said Dummy, jumping off the stone.  "Come on," and
+they started off at once for the tiny camp, discussing the possibility
+of the men finding the way through.
+
+"Suppose they got into the mine, and attacked the Black Tor while we're
+away?"
+
+"No fear o' that, Master Mark," said Dummy, with another of his nice
+open smiles.  "Not many folk as would go and do what we did."
+
+"No, I suppose not," said Mark thoughtfully.
+
+"I'm sort of used to it, Master Mark, from always being down the mine,
+and always wanting to see where every hole went.  No, I don't think any
+o' them would care to go.  Too big and clumsy.  They'd never get there."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY NINE.
+
+PLAYING MOLE.
+
+Sir Edward met them as they ascended the slope, Mark having been taking
+mental notes all the way of the trend of the hills and the valley,
+seeing for certain that, in spite of its bulk and height, Ergles was a
+good deal lower than the range along the valley of the Gleame.
+
+Their narrative of adventure below was listened to in silence, and Sir
+Edward grew moment by moment more interested till the whole was told.
+
+"I don't think there is a doubt of it," he said.  "We are quite three
+hundred feet lower here, and in all probability it is the same
+underground stream as we have at the Tor; but whether it will be
+possible to get right through into this cavern is more than we can judge
+till we have tried."
+
+"But you will try, father?"
+
+"Of course, my boy," cried Sir Edward; "and at once.  Here, we must have
+Daniel Rugg, and hear what he says."
+
+Dummy fetched his father, who listened in turn without a word.
+
+"Sounds well, Rugg," said Sir Edward.
+
+"Yes, Sir Edward; sounds well."
+
+"But is the grotto likely to run so far?"
+
+"Lots on 'em do.  There's one yonder up in the Peak as goes for miles,
+and they've never yet found the end, nor where the water goes."
+
+"Well," said Sir Edward, after a few minutes' thought; "I'm afraid to be
+too sanguine.  This may all end in disappointment; but it shall be
+tried."
+
+"Now, at once, I s'pose, Sir Edward?"
+
+"Now, at once."
+
+Ten men were chosen for the expedition, and Mark noted with satisfaction
+that Dan Rugg put forward those who had been accustomed to work in the
+mine.
+
+"Better for getting along, Master Mark," said the miner, on seeing that
+Mark took notice of his action.
+
+"But will ten be enough, Dan?"
+
+"Why not, sir?  Ten, and me and Dummy's twelve, and you and Sir Edward
+fourteen.  Well, perhaps it would be as well to have a couple more."
+
+Garth and Jennings were selected without having the slightest notion of
+where they were going, but they took their places without a word, only
+too glad to have some change from the monotonous existence they had been
+leading for many days.
+
+No embargo was placed upon their way of marching, and they tramped
+eagerly on, till the occupants of the Castle were startled by their
+sudden arrival, to share in the surprise of their fellows when orders
+were given for rations to be supplied to each man, after a good meal had
+been eaten.
+
+Half-an-hour after, well provided with picks, hammers, big nails for
+driving in the cracks, either for foot-hold or to bear ropes, the whole
+party were descending into the mine, with Dummy promoted, from his
+knowledge, to the onerous post of guide, leading, and Mark by his side
+or following next, according to the state of the way.
+
+The men were in excellent spirits, for by this time the object of the
+expedition had oozed out, and it gave them a feeling of confidence now
+that the attack was to be made through the mine, where they were all
+much at home.
+
+There was the rumour, too, that they were to take the enemy by surprise
+where there would be no barricades or breastworks, and altogether the
+men moved on after their young guides in the highest of spirits, feeling
+as they did that at last the petty war was to be brought to a
+conclusion.
+
+The ways through the old galleries and chambers of the mine were
+traversed with the men talking and laughing, and reminding one another
+of this or that particular working where the lead ore was rich; and
+Dummy strode in front, bearing his lantern well, and his importance ill.
+For he was to all intents and purposes the originator and head man of
+the little campaign, till suddenly casting his eyes sidewise he caught
+sight of Mark looking at him in an amused way, which discharged all his
+conceit upon the instant, as he flushed up and changed back to the old
+Dummy at once.
+
+"You shouldn't laugh at a poor fellow, Master Mark," he remonstrated in
+a whisper.
+
+"Then you shouldn't strut along like a game-cock just come in for his
+spring feathers."
+
+"I didn't," said Dummy angrily.
+
+"You did.  But go on.  I will not laugh at you any more."
+
+A complete change came over the boy, and he went on gravely enough after
+the reproof, till, to the surprise of all, they were led into the
+chamber hung with the veils of stalactite, where Dummy stopped and
+looked round.
+
+"Well, my lad, what does this mean?"
+
+Dummy smiled in a rather imbecile way, and his father nudged him heavily
+with his elbow.
+
+"Don't you hear what Sir Edward says?  What you come here for?  Lost
+your way?"
+
+"No, I aren't lost my way, father."
+
+"Then go back and show us.  Where is it?  Down by the old workings?"
+
+"Nay, this is right," said the boy, in high glee at his father's puzzled
+look; and giving Sir Edward a wave of the hand, he went on to the end,
+and passed behind the stony veil dropping from near the roof.
+
+Sir Edward, uttered an ejaculation, and turned to his son.
+
+"You have been by here, then?" he cried.
+
+"Yes, father; this is the way," replied Mark.  "Follow him."
+
+"No, keep with him yourself," said Sir Edward.  "You are the guides.
+But be silent now."
+
+"There is no need yet," replied Mark; "we have a tremendously long way
+to go yet."
+
+"Let there be silence," said Sir Edward sternly.  "For aught we know,
+these men, if the grottoes do communicate, may be exploring on their own
+account, and sound runs curiously along these passages."
+
+Mark accepted the rebuke, and joined Dummy at once, the rest of the
+party followed, and at a word from Sir Edward, raised their pikes and
+advanced steadily, as if expecting at any moment to meet the foe.
+
+But many hours seemed to have elapsed, during which they had climbed,
+descended, squeezed through narrow upright cracks, and crawled, as the
+two lads had crawled before, ere they reached the limpid pool where
+their guides had rested and gone to sleep.
+
+Here, at a word from Mark, Sir Edward gave the word to halt for
+refreshment, while, in company with the two lads, he made a farther
+advance, and planted two men at intervals along the route they took,
+following the flow of the underground stream, whose musical gurgling
+grew very plain at times.
+
+The second man was posted a good two hundred yards beyond the first, and
+made no objection to being left in the dark, showing Dan Rugg's wisdom
+in selecting miners for the task in hand.
+
+Then, silently and with great caution, Dummy led on along a wild chasm
+of the same nature as others they had passed, and formed, evidently
+during some convulsion, the encrinite marble of which the walls were
+composed matching exactly, and merely requiring lateral pressure and the
+trickling of lime-charged water to become solid once again.
+
+About three hundred yards beyond the last sentinel the trio paused, and
+stood listening and gazing as far as they could across a rock chamber
+whose sides glittered with double prismatic crystals.
+
+But there was the water gurgling at the bottom of the deep crack along
+which they passed--nothing more; and they returned toward the pool, Sir
+Edward giving the men a word or two of caution, and then passing on to
+the others who were whispering to each other as they ate their food.
+
+It was too good an example not to be followed, and soon after, quite
+refreshed, Sir Edward gave the order for a fresh start, the way being
+doubly interesting now that it was all fresh ground to the guides.  In
+addition, it became more difficult, for the formation began now to
+change, and instead of being a succession of narrow crack-like
+passages--in almost every variety of inclination between the horizontal
+and perpendicular, and rock grotto-like chambers of varying extent--the
+road began to fork and break up into vast halls, from which more than
+once they could hardly find an exit.
+
+But Dummy was invaluable, and there was a kind of triumph in his face
+when he pointed out how easy it was to go on if you listened for the
+trickling of the stream below.
+
+At last, after passing through a long succession of scenes that were as
+wondrous as strange, Sir Edward called upon the boy to stop, and upon
+Dummy coming back to his side, lantern in hand, "Do you think you can
+find your way back?" he asked.
+
+"Yes, with my eyes shut," said the boy, smiling.
+
+His tones chased away his master's feeling of uneasiness, and he went
+on:
+
+"That's a good boy; but what about your notion of this place leading
+into the cavern where those ruffians are?  We must be far past Ergles,
+even if we are in the right direction."
+
+"No," said Dummy confidently, as his father, who now came up, lantern in
+hand, looked doubtful too.
+
+"Why do you say no, boy?" said Sir Edward.
+
+"Because we've got among the same sort of rock as you find at Ergles."
+
+"Good, lad!" burst out Dan Rugg.  "That's minding your teachings.  But
+are you right?"
+
+"Yes, father: look," said the boy, holding up his lantern toward the
+glittering roof of the hall in which they stood.  "There it is: Blue
+John."
+
+Dan raised his lantern too, and drew his miner's pick from his belt.
+
+_Chink_, _clash_.
+
+There was a sharp blow from the pick, and Dan stooped to take up the
+piece of rock he had struck off, and handed it to his lord.
+
+"Boy's right, Sir Edward," he said.  "Look at that."
+
+"But what has Blue John, whoever he is--Oh, pish!  I had forgotten the
+name of the blue spar.  Is there any of it in Ergles?"
+
+"Only place about here where there is any, Sir Edward, and that's a
+piece."
+
+"Then we may be close to the cavern," said Sir Edward, lowering his
+voice.
+
+"Or in it, perhaps," said Mark excitedly.
+
+He started, for at that moment Dummy clapped a hand upon his lips, and
+pointed forward.
+
+"Cover your lanterns," he whispered.
+
+The word was passed along back, and the next moment they were standing
+in darkness, watching a faint gleam of light in the distance.
+
+It was playing upon the glittering prismatic crystals which covered
+wall, roof, and floor, and these flashed as the light played upon them,
+disappeared, and came into sight again from behind a Gothic pillar, was
+again eclipsed, and once more came into sight; and now, plainly seen,
+they made out that it was the light of a lantern, which shone upon a
+man's face as he went slowly along what seemed to be an opening, which
+led him past where they stood watching.
+
+Then the light seemed to go down toward the floor, lower and lower, as
+it went on till it passed out of sight, but left a faint glow.
+
+"Let Dummy and me go," whispered Mark to his father.
+
+"Yes.  Cautiously.  Don't be seen."
+
+Dummy was panting to be off, and keeping his lantern hidden, he felt his
+way onward toward the glow, keeping tightly hold of Mark's hand, till,
+as they came nearer, they saw that the man must have been descending a
+steep rift, and as the light came into sight again, they found that they
+were standing on the very edge of this place, and that the light was
+away to their left, twenty feet or so lower, and gleaming upon the
+surface of a smooth far-spreading pool.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY.
+
+NEARING DAWN.
+
+The two lads stood there motionless for a time, wondering what the
+lantern-bearer could be doing, for he evidently had no suspicion of his
+being watched.  Then as they saw that in place of gleaming over the
+water, the lantern was once more in motion, they crouched down, with
+their eyes alone over the edge of the clean-cut chasm, feeling that
+whoever it was must pass just beneath them, when they would be able to
+see which way he went, and so gain a clue to the robbers' hold.
+
+The light came nearer, and it was plain that whoever bore it was coming
+very slowly, but they grasped the reason directly, for he was passing
+over a flooring of slippery crystals, and as he came on they could hear
+him breathing hard.
+
+As they had anticipated, he came very close beneath them, and Mark felt
+that if he looked up they would be seen.  But he whom they watched
+walked stooping, and letting the light fall upon the glittering
+ascending floor, so that at last he was not six feet below them, and
+Mark said in a quick whisper: "Sir Morton!"
+
+"Great Heavens!" came back in company with a sharp crash, as of an
+earthenware pitcher falling in shivers upon the rocky floor.
+
+"Hush!"
+
+"Who is it?"
+
+"Friends," whispered Mark.
+
+"Thank Heaven!  At last--at last," came up, with a piteous groan, and
+they heard a heavy fall.
+
+"Quick, Dummy," whispered Mark.  "We must go down to him."
+
+"Listen first," said the boy: "p'r'aps some one heard."
+
+But as he spoke there was the sound of a hoarse laugh from a long
+distance off, and Dummy whispered: "Didn't hear.  Been to fetch water,
+and broke the pitcher.  I say, Master Mark, wasn't I right?"
+
+Mark made no reply, for he was lowering himself down over the edge, and
+directly after he dropped on to the crystals below.
+
+"Show the light, Dummy," he whispered, and the boy lay face downward and
+swung the lantern down as far as he could reach.
+
+As Mark touched the fallen man's hand he began to recover consciousness.
+
+"Not a dream--not a dream," he murmured.  "Whoever you are, have you
+come to help?"
+
+"Yes; but hush!  Purlrose and his men--are they near?"
+
+"Too far to hear us speak; but hide your lights.  Now tell me, are you
+one of those who attacked these wretches?"
+
+"Yes; and we have reached you at last."
+
+"Ah!" sighed the prisoner.  "It was time--it was time.  I don't know
+your voice; I could not see your face; but if you know, tell me, for
+mercy's sake--my poor boy--was he killed?"
+
+"No.  Badly wounded, but alive, and he will live."
+
+Mark heard the prostrate man muttering, and felt the hand he grasped
+trembling violently.
+
+"It puts life into me," he whispered, "when I was nearly spent.  Tell
+me--pray tell me--where is my boy!  Not a prisoner?"
+
+"No: safe with us, at the Black Tor."
+
+"Safe--at the Black Tor!" faltered Sir Morton.  "Then you are an Eden?"
+
+"Of course: and my father is close by here with a dozen stout men to
+punish these villains and save you, and--you do not say anything about
+your child."
+
+There was no reply, and Mark pressed the hand he held, to find that
+there was no response, and that it was turning wet and cold, for the
+unfortunate prisoner had been unable to bear the tidings, and had
+swooned away.
+
+"Go back," whispered Mark, "and tell my father whom we have found."
+
+"Leave the light?" said the boy.
+
+"No, take it.  Tell him all you have heard."
+
+The light glided away, and the next minute a faint sigh told that Sir
+Morton was regaining his senses, his complete recovery thereof being
+announced by a trembling pressure of the hand.
+
+"Weak," he whispered.  "I was badly wounded.  So Heaven has sent my
+greatest enemy to save us."
+
+"Us?" cried Mark excitedly.  "Then Ralph Darley's sister is safe."
+
+"Will be, I pray," said Sir Morton feebly.  "I, her father, can do no
+more."
+
+Sir Edward came up, in company with Dan Rugg and five men, approaching
+cautiously with one lantern; and they were in the act of descending to
+Mark and the prisoner when a hoarse bullying voice was heard from a
+distance, the words echoing and reverberating as along a vaulted
+passage.
+
+"Now then, back to your den, old fool.  Don't be a week fetching that
+water."
+
+"I--I am going back," cried Sir Morton, and then in a whisper--"the
+light--the light.  I will soon return."
+
+He caught at the lantern, and began to move off painfully, while his
+would-be rescuers stood watching till the light disappeared round a
+corner, and a minute later the same harsh voice was heard speaking
+fiercely.  Then all was still.
+
+"Hah!" whispered Sir Edward, "at last.  Keep all lights covered, Rugg,
+and go and bring up the rest of the men."
+
+Dan grunted, and they heard his steps as they stood listening.  Twice
+over there came the hoarse sound of laughter, but Sir Morton did not
+return, and Sir Edward in his impatience was about to order a movement
+forward, now that all his men were at hand, when from out of the black
+darkness, close by where Mark stood listening with every nerve upon the
+strain, the lad heard a slight rustling, then a faint panting sound as
+of hasty breathing, and a low voice whispered: "Is any one there?
+Please speak."
+
+"Yes, yes," whispered Mark, and he stepped forward quickly with
+outstretching hands, which came in contact with one as cold as ice.
+
+"Oh!" gasped its owner, as another hand felt for him and clung to him.
+"I know your voice, Mark Eden.  I am Minnie Darley: pray, pray come and
+help my father; he is too weak to come back to you."
+
+The voice trailed off into a wail.
+
+"Hush!  Don't, pray don't cry," whispered Mark.  "Can you guide us to
+where your father is?"
+
+"Yes; oh yes."
+
+"In the darkness?"
+
+"Yes, I can find my way."
+
+"Can you lead us, my child, to where these ruffians are?" said Sir
+Edward, who had approached.  "We must surprise and make them prisoners
+first."
+
+"Yes--no, you will kill them," whispered the girl.  "It is too
+treacherous and dreadful."
+
+"My child," said Sir Edward gently, and he stretched his hand forward
+till he could touch the girl's head, upon which he softly laid his hand;
+"I have a girl as young and fair as you, and Heaven forbid that she
+should ever be called upon to perform such an act.  But think: it is to
+save your father's life; to save you from the hands of these treacherous
+ruffians.  You must be our guide."
+
+There was a dead silence for a few moments, and Sir Edward felt his hand
+taken and held to two soft lips.
+
+"Yes," came gently; "it is to save my poor father.  He will die in this
+terrible place; and I must die too.  You do not know, and they would
+easily kill you if you went without.  Yes, I will guide you to where
+they are.  I feel that I must."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY ONE.
+
+THE WASPS' NEST.
+
+There was a sound in the darkness as if several men had drawn a deep
+breath together, and then for a few moments all was very still, so still
+that Mark started when he heard his father's voice, and felt strange and
+wondered to hear the gentle tones in which he spoke.
+
+"Do you feel that you can guide us all without lights?"
+
+"Oh, yes; I have been so long in the dark, and have often come with my
+father to fill the pitcher in that pool below."
+
+"Rugg, you and your boy stay back, and keep the lights hidden," said Sir
+Edward firmly.
+
+"Oh!" cried the old miner, in a tone full of protest; and then hastily:
+"Right, Sir Edward."
+
+"And be ready to bring the lanterns, and come to our help when called."
+
+Dan Rugg growled his assent, but Dummy murmured angrily.
+
+"Join yourselves together, my lads," whispered Sir Edward, "by carrying
+your pikes each with the head upon the shoulder of the man before him--
+the man behind me to rest his in the same way as I lead.  Ready?"
+
+"Ay!" came in a low growl from out of the darkness.
+
+"One word more," said Sir Edward sternly, and his words sent a thrill
+through Mark.  "If the enemy surrenders, show mercy now: if he does not,
+remember not a man must escape."
+
+A low deep murmur, full of hatred against the destroyers of their homes,
+came from the miners, and then in the renewed silence Sir Edward said
+sharply:
+
+"Mark, take this poor child's other hand, and protect her when I am
+away.  Now forward."
+
+A little soft cold hand closed tightly upon Mark's, as he stepped to
+Minnie's side; and then slowly and silently the party advanced under the
+girl's guidance for quite two hundred yards through what seemed to be
+solid darkness, out of which her voice came in a low whisper from time
+to time.
+
+"Stoop here--a little to the right--to the right once more--now through
+this narrow opening on the left.  Only one can pass at a time: you
+first."
+
+Mark led, and passed through a rift, to see a feeble glow upon his left,
+where a candle was stuck against the rock, and beneath it lay a figure,
+very dimly-seen, while, apparently coming through an opening farther on,
+they heard the low hoarse sound of voices; and words came suggesting
+that the speakers were engaged in some game of chance.
+
+Minnie withdrew her hands from her protectors, and hurried to kneel down
+by the figure in the corner, Sir Edward and Mark following, to bend over
+the prisoner.
+
+"Too weak," he panted--"I tried to come.  Eden!  A strange meeting, oh
+mine enemy!  God forgive us all the past; and if when you--come back--a
+conqueror--for the sake of Him who died--protect my child.--Minnie!" he
+cried faintly, and the girl sank beside him with a wail.
+
+Sir Edward went down on one knee, sought for, and took his enemy's hand.
+
+"Can you hear?" he whispered.
+
+A feeble pressure was the answer.
+
+"Trust me.  I will.  Now we are in complete ignorance of the place, and
+must be guided so as to succeed."
+
+"You need no guidance," said Sir Morton feebly.  "Cross yonder--there is
+an opening: follow the narrow passage for twenty yards, and there is a
+big chamber-like grotto, and upon your right an archway leading into
+another smaller chamber.  The enemy--are there.  You have them as in a
+trap."
+
+Sir Morton Darley's voice grew a little firmer as he proceeded, and when
+he, ceased there was a low murmur of satisfaction, and the men's faces,
+dimly-seen, were turned to Sir Edward for the order to advance.
+
+"Lay your pikes in that corner," he whispered.  "It will be close
+quarters.  Draw your swords."
+
+The order had hardly been executed when there came suddenly angry
+shouts, sounding hollow and strange, multiplied as they were by
+reverberations.
+
+"They know we are here, father," whispered Mark excitedly.  But at that
+moment came distinctly the words:
+
+"He cheated!  A thief!" and the clashing of swords.
+
+"Forward!" said Sir Edward, and closely followed by his son and Nick
+Garth, whose breath came thickly, he followed the directions given by
+Sir Morton Darley, guided more by the sounds, to reach the entrance to a
+natural chamber, with high Gothic roof and walls glittering with
+crystals, which reflected the light of half--a--dozen candles stuck here
+and there.
+
+Mark saw all this at a glance, as he grasped the fact that the inmates
+had broken into two parties, and were contending so fiercely that for a
+few moments they did not see the doorway crowded with angry
+countenances, and were only brought to a knowledge of their peril by the
+rush that was made by all but two of Sir Edward's men, who stayed back
+to guard the entry and cut off the escape of any who tried to get away.
+
+The encounter was short and fierce, Sir Edward's men dashing forward
+like a wedge, striking with all their might; and at the end of a couple
+of minutes' savage encounter, the mercenaries fighting like rats at bay,
+there was a terrible silence, broken only by muttered curses and groans,
+while eight men stood erect, half of whom had cast away their swords and
+fought with their miners' picks.
+
+The scene was ghastly, as shown by two only of the candles, the rest
+having been knocked down in the struggle.
+
+"Hurt, Mark?" cried Sir Edward from the far end, where he stood sword in
+hand, supporting himself by the wall, and with his foot resting upon the
+burly body of Captain Purlrose.
+
+"Not much, father," panted the lad.  "Bit of a cut."
+
+"How many escaped?  I saw three make for the door."
+
+"None, master," growled Nick Garth, who was upon the floor at the right.
+"There they lay: those brave lads brought 'em down."
+
+"Shout for the lanterns, Mark, boy," cried Sir Edward; and Mark reeled
+as he stepped over the bodies lying in the way.
+
+His call was responded to directly by Dan Rugg and his son, both
+standing aghast for a few moments before energetically setting to work
+to help their friends, who, saving the two who had guarded the entrance,
+were wounded to a man, while of Captain Purlrose's party, four and their
+leader were dead, the others lying disabled to wait their turn of help
+from their captors, who, now that the rage of battle was at an end, were
+ready to show mercy to their wounded foes.
+
+Sir Edward was so badly hurt that after a brave struggle he had to give
+up, and leave the ordering of the work now necessary to his son, who
+began by having his father borne to the chamber where Minnie crouched,
+trembling with horror, by her half-insensible father's side; but upon
+being reassured by the information that her captivity was at an end, she
+revived, and devoted herself to helping the wounded with all a true
+woman's zeal.
+
+Mark's next task was to go with Dan Rugg and Dummy to the entrance,
+wondering the while at the extent of the place and the hoard of all
+necessaries which the fellows had collected in the cavern.
+
+Upon reaching the wall beyond which the guard were stationed, still in
+perfect ignorance of what had taken place within, a few shouts set the
+men to work, the defence was rapidly demolished, and the wounded were
+borne out into the light--a ghastly procession, though not a man
+murmured; and as soon as they were laid upon the heather, began to chat
+eagerly together about the success of the underground expedition.
+
+As for the wounded prisoners, they were kept under guard in the
+chamber--where the wall had just been destroyed.
+
+The two great enemies were borne out last; and as Mark followed with the
+trembling girl upon his arm, he looking proud and satisfied, in spite of
+a stained bandage upon his forehead, and she with her face unnaturally
+white and her eyes closed, unable to bear the light after so long an
+imprisonment in the depths of the cavern, Nick Garth raised himself upon
+his elbow and uttered a shout which rose into a rousing cheer.
+
+"God bless you, Mistress Minnie!" cried the man hoarsely, "and you too,
+youngster.  You're a brave lad, and I'll never call you an enemy again."
+
+"Humph!  No," said Dan Rugg, who was close to him.  "I s'pose all that's
+dead as mutton now.  Look here, Nick Garth, I never see a man who could
+fight as well as you, and if you'd got a decent paw I'd say shake
+hands."
+
+"Say it, mate," said Nick, and he painfully lifted a wounded arm, to
+place his bandaged hand in that of the old miner who had hated him all
+his life.
+
+A man had been started off as soon as the news was known to fetch more
+help from the Black Tor; and, as tidings fly swiftly, assistance soon
+came from every farm and cottage for miles, the women flocking up to
+Ergles, and eagerly helping to bear the sufferers to their homes.
+
+Sir Edward and Sir Morton went last, each borne upon a litter, Minnie
+being provided with a pony, led by one of her father's men, who kept on
+shaking his head and saying that he couldn't understand it, for it
+seemed so strange that his master and young mistress and their leaders
+should be going up to the Black Tor.
+
+He said this to Nick Garth, who was lying with closed eyes upon a
+roughly-made litter of poles.
+
+"Well," said Nick roughly, "who can?  It's 'cause they say the world
+turns round, and sometimes we're standing on our heads and sometimes on
+our feet; we're on our heads now, and it's o' no use to kick when your
+legs are in the air."
+
+There was one more task to see to, though, before Mark left the place,
+with its plunder in charge of Dan Rugg and a guard, so that the robbers'
+stores could be restored to their rightful owners.
+
+Over this matter Mark had a whispered consultation with the two wounded
+knights, and then went off to Rugg.
+
+"Well, yes, Master Mark," said that worthy; "I was thinking o' something
+o' that sort.  Right in that little chamber place.  A good thick wall,
+and well made, with plenty o' lime.  It wouldn't seem Christian-like to
+throw 'em out on the hill among the stones; and you see there's so many
+ravens and crows."
+
+Dummy Rugg kept as close to Mark as he could in these busy times, and
+tried several times to speak to him, but without success.  At last,
+though, the opportunity came.
+
+"Oh, Master Mark," he said, in a tone full of reproach; "you ought to
+have spoke out."
+
+"When?  What about?"
+
+"When I was sent back to take care of those nasty old lanterns.  But it
+serves you right.  If I'd been there at the fight you wouldn't have been
+hurt like that."
+
+"And perhaps you'd have been killed.  Get out, you ungrateful dog!"
+
+"Dog, am I?  Well, it's enough to make me bite."
+
+"Bite away, then, Dummy.  I can't lift my arm to hit you now."
+
+"Then I'll wait till you get well again.  But it was mean.  I never seem
+to get a chance."
+
+"Well, you are a grumbler, Dummy.  Here, you've done what none of us
+could do--shown us how to end all this trouble, and pleased everybody,
+and yet you're not happy."
+
+"Happy?" said the boy; "who's to be happy after what I've done?  Why, I
+shan't never dare to come past Ergles now in the dark."
+
+"Why?"
+
+"'Cause old Purlrose and his men'll come popping out to haunt me for
+getting 'em killed.  I shall never like to come by there again."
+
+"They won't come out this way, Dum," said Mark, trying to look very
+serious; "they'll come the other way, and get into the mine to lie in
+wait for you in the dark parts, and heave blocks of stones at you."
+
+"Think they will, Master Mark?" gasped the boy, and his eyes and mouth
+opened wide.
+
+"Sure to."
+
+"Get out: you're laughing at me."
+
+"I'm more disposed to cry; to think of such a stout, brave lad as you
+should believe such nonsense."
+
+"Nonsense?" cried Dummy.  "What, don't you be--believe in ghosts and
+bor--bogies, Master Mark?"
+
+"Do I look as if I did?" cried Mark contemptuously.  "You wait till I
+get well, and if you tell me then that you believe in such silly old
+women's tales, I'll kick you."
+
+Dummy grinned.
+
+"You wouldn't," he said.  "But I say, Master Mark, think old Purlrose
+will haunt me?"
+
+"Bah!" ejaculated Mark.  "There, come along; I want to get home and let
+Master Rayburn do something to my bit of a wound.  It hurts so I can
+hardly walk."
+
+"Here, let me carry you, Master Mark.  Pig-a-back.  I can."
+
+"No, no, Dummy, old lad; but you come to the castle to-morrow, and say
+you are to walk up and see me.  I shall have to be put to bed, I expect,
+in the same room with young Ralph Darley."
+
+"Then I shan't come," said the boy, scowling.
+
+"Why?"
+
+"'Cause I don't like him, and I don't like to see his father and their
+girl took there as if they were friends."
+
+"They are now, Dum, and there isn't going to be any more fighting in the
+vale."
+
+It was a strange scene when the slow procession wound its way up the
+zigzag, at the top of which Mary Eden and Master Rayburn were waiting
+with the women and the tiny wounded garrison to receive the fresh party
+of injured folk.
+
+Mary ran to her wounded father to embrace him, and then to Minnie
+Darley, to whom she held out her hands, and the people cheered as the
+two girls kissed.
+
+Mary was about to lead the trembling girl in, but she shook her head and
+went to her father's side; and then Mary looked round for her brother,
+and ran to him, as he came up leaning upon Dummy's arm.
+
+"Oh, Mark, darling! hurt?" she cried, flinging her arms about his neck.
+
+"Just a bit," he said, with a sickly smile.  "You do as Minnie Darley
+did.  Never mind me; go and stay with father.  He's more hurt than he'll
+own to.  Ah, Master Rayburn! brought you some more work, but we've burnt
+out the wasps."
+
+"My brave boy!" cried the old man, wringing his hands.  "There, I'll
+come to you as soon as I can.  I must go to those who are worse."
+
+"Yes, yes," said Mark; "I've got my doctor here.  But tell me--young
+Ralph?"
+
+"Recovered his senses, and asked about his father and sister."
+
+"Come along, Dummy," said Mark faintly; "let's go and tell him we've
+brought them safe; and then you shall wash and bind up my cut."
+
+He uttered a faint "Ah!" and would have fallen but for the boy's ready
+arm; and the next minute he was being borne up the steps, pig-a-back
+after all, though he had scouted the offer before.  He had fainted dead
+away.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY TWO.
+
+A DEAD FEUD.
+
+Time glided away as fast in the days of James the First as it does in
+the reign of our gentle Queen; and a year had gone by in the quiet
+peaceful vale, where, to a man, all who had been in the great trouble
+had more or less quickly recovered from their wounds.
+
+The prisoners were the worst sufferers, and in the great friendly peace
+brought about between the old lords of the land, partly by their own
+manly feeling and the love that had somehow sprung up among their
+children, the greatest of all the Christian virtues took deep root, and
+flourished in a way that would have put the proverbial green bay tree to
+shame.
+
+Hence it was that, as very slowly one by one the miserable crippled
+prisoners, so many wrecks, diseased by their own reckless life and
+crippled by their wounds, struggled back slowly to a condition in which
+perhaps a few years were left them for a better life, they were left
+entirely in Master Rayburn's hands; and first one and then another was
+sent off with a little money and a haversack of food to seek his friends
+and trouble the peaceful valley no more.
+
+It took nearly the year before the last of the wretched crew bade
+farewell to the place, grateful or ungrateful, according to his nature,
+after going through a long course of physical suffering; and by that
+time Cliff Castle was pretty well restored, and the two lads, after a
+long absence, were back home again to the land of mighty cliff, green
+forest, and purling stream.
+
+It was on one of those glorious early summer mornings when the air seems
+full of joy, and it is a delight even to exist, that, as the sycamores
+and beeches in their early green were alive with song, there came a
+rattle of tiny bits of spar against Mark Eden's casement window, and he
+sprang out of bed to throw it open and look down upon Ralph Darley,
+armed with lissom rod over his shoulder and creel on back.
+
+"Oh, I say," he cried, "asleep, and on a morning like this!"
+
+"Yes, but you're too soon."
+
+"Soon?  Why, I'm a quarter of an hour late.  Be quick, the May-fly are
+up, and the trout feeding like mad, and as for the grayling, I saw the
+biggest--oh! do make haste."
+
+"Shan't be long."
+
+"And Mark, tell Mary that father is going to bring Min up about twelve,
+and they are to meet us with the dinner-basket up by the alder weir.
+Well, why don't you make haste and dress?"
+
+"I was thinking," said Mark, with a broad smile.
+
+"What about?"
+
+"Oh, here's Dummy with the net," cried Mark.  "Hi! you sir! why didn't
+you come and call me at the proper time?"
+
+"Morn', Master Ralph," said the lad, with a friendly grin.  Then with an
+ill-used look up at the window:
+
+"'Tis proper time.  You said six, and it aren't that yet."
+
+"There," cried Mark; "you are too soon."
+
+"Very well.  It was so fine; but I say, what were you thinking about?"
+
+Mark grinned again.
+
+"Is it so very comic?" said Ralph impatiently.
+
+"That depends on what you say."
+
+"Well, let's hear."
+
+"I was thinking that you and I have never finished that fight."
+
+"No; you haven't been down to steal our ravens.  I say, Mark, what do
+you say?  Shall we?  They're building there again."
+
+"Let 'em," said Mark, "in peace."
+
+THE END.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Black Tor, by George Manville Fenn
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE BLACK TOR ***
+
+***** This file should be named 21298.txt or 21298.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/2/1/2/9/21298/
+
+Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.